... ; 'iuTi
K-nvSw;
vv '•*
JAN 28 1332
‘ v^OfllCAL S twV
*\*£
Division
Section
BSZ5Z5
r^6>4
H2.3
Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2019 with funding from Princeton Theological Seminary Library
https://archive.org/details/syllabusfornewteOOrobe_O
SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
A. T. ROBERTSON, m.a., d.d., ll.d
L.ITT.D.
By PROFESSOR A. T. ROBERTSON
Syllabus for New Testament Study
The Minister and His Greek New Testament
A Harmony of the Gospels for Students of the Life of Christ
Types of Preachers in the New Testament Paul, the Interpreter of Christ
Practical and Social Aspects of Christianity (Ex¬ position of James)
A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament Studies in Mark’s Gospel
A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Historical Research
A Translation of Luke’s Gospel
John the Loyal: A Sketch of John the Baptist
Epochs in the Life of Jesus
Epochs in the Life of Paul
The Pharisees and Jesus. The Stone (Princeton) Lec¬ tures for 1916.
Luke the Historian in the Light of Research The Student’s Chronological New Testament The Glory of the Ministry The Divinity of Christ in the Gospel of John Paul’s Joy in Christ: Studies in Philippians
Making Good in the Ministry: A Sketch of John Mark
The New Citizenship
Commentary on Matthew: The Bible for Home and School
Keywords in the Teaching of Jesus Life and Letters of John A. Broadus The Teaching of Jesus Concerning God the Father Studies in the New Testament
SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUB$Tof?
AX
A Guide for \ '
Lessons in the Class-Room^ oaiciAL
BY
A. T. ROBERTSON, m.a., D.D.j LL.D.j LITT.D.
Professor of New Testament Interpretation in the Southern Baptist Theological Seminary Louisville, Kentucky
NEW
YORK
GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY
COPYRIGHT, 1923,
BY SUNDAY SCHOOL BOARD OF THE SOUTHERN BAPTIST CONVENTION
Fifth Edition , Revised and Enlarged
COPYRIGHT, 1915, BY A. T. ROBERTSON
SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY. II
PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
PREFACE
The immediate purpose of this Syllabus is to facilitate the work in the class in New Testament English in the Southern Baptist Theological Seminary. It is not de¬ signed for general use, though other institutions have adopted it. The book, revised throughout, serves the function of a broad outline of the New Testament his¬ tory with precise references to the text-books used for the daily lessons. The method pursued is the study of the sources of our knowledge as far as practicable with the aid of useful helps. The course follows the historical development of the events of the period and the inter¬ pretation of the New Testament books is based on his¬ torical exegesis. The whole of the New Testament era is covered in one session of eight months and the work is of necessity rapid, while comprehensive. This grasp of the whole period is essential for proper interpretation of any single portion. The more important books, with various critical standpoints, are mentioned from time to time. The rather full bibliographies are useful for future exhaustive study of special topics and for research work. They have been brought up to date. The plan and spirit of the course are due to John A. Broadus, who estab¬ lished it in 1859, the first course in the English New Testament in any theological seminary so far as I know. All ministers need a thorough grip upon the English New Testament whether they do or do not know the Greek. The knowledge of each reacts favorably upon the other. Neither takes the place of the other. Both are necessary to the real student of the New Testament. The student who enters this class ought to know at least
vi
PREFACE
what is in the author’s Studies in the New Testament . In addition to the assignment for each lesson specific ref¬ erences for wider reading are given for the benefit of unusually well equipped men.
It happens that this year 1923 marks the conclusion of thirty-five years of teaching in the Seminary and that I am sixty years old. This is the Fifth Edition of the Syllabus, while the Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament appears in the Sixth Edition and the Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Historical Re¬ search in the Fourth Edition this year. Two new volumes, published this year, The Minister and His Greek New Testament and A Translation of Luke's Gospel, will make twenty-six volumes to my credit, alas, for the public.
A. T. Robertson.
Louisville, Ky., 1923.
CHART OF INTERBIBLICAL AND NEW TESTAMENT TIMES
(Many of the dates are confessedly provisional, especially in the Apostolic history.)
DATE
B. C.
405
400
399
334
333
331
330
323
320
312
299
285-247
250
225
216
198
|
RULERS OF JUDEA |
HIGH PRIESTS |
WRITINGS AND EVENTS IN JUDEA |
|
Under Persia 536 B. C. to 331 B. C. Artaxerxes Mne- mon. |
Part of Book of Baruch. Book of Tobit possibly. |
|
|
Jonathan. |
||
|
End of Persian rule. Beginning of Greek rule over Judea. Alexander the Great. |
Death of High Priest Jaddua, last name men¬ tioned in O. T. (Neh. 12 : 11 f.) |
|
|
Ptolemaic rule over Jews. |
||
|
Simon I, The Just, High Priest. Ptolemy Phila- delphus. |
Traditional date of the so-called Great Synagogue and the fixing of canon of the O. T. Translation of the S'eptuagint be¬ gun. Probable date of Ecclesiasticus or the Wisdom of Son of Sirach. Appearance of Chasidim. |
|
|
Eleazer (287- 26). |
||
|
Beginning of Seleucid rule over Jews, under An- tiochus the Great. |
Jewish - Alexan¬ drian Philosophy. Aristobulus and Wisdom of Solo¬ mon here or little later. |
|
CONTEMPORARY
EVENTS
Retreat of the Ten Thousand (Xenophon).
Death of Soc¬ rates.
Roman Consuls begin.
Plato.
Aristotle.
Battle of Grani- cus.
Battle of Issus.
Alexander con¬ quers Persian Em¬ pire.
Alexander dies at Babylon.
Ptolemaic Rule begins in Egypt.
Seleucid Kings begin rule in Syria.
Seleucid Era.
Zeno.
Epicurus.
First Punic War.
Second Punic War.
Battle of Cannae (Hannibal).
Vll
Vlll
CHART
DATE
RULERS OF JUDEA
B. C 190
175
172
Antiochus Epi- phanes begins his efforts to Hellen- ize the Jews.
HIGH PRIESTS
WRITINGS AND EVENTS IN JUDEA
CONTEMPORARY
EVENTS
Jason, the Hellenizing High Priest.
Antiochus the Great beaten by Romans at Mag¬ nesia. Romans gain foothold in the East.
Menelaus, another Hel¬ lenizing High Priest.
167
166
165
161
160
153
146
143
142
135
130
108
105
104
Beginning of Maccabean Revolt under Mattathias.
Judas Macca- baeus.
Death of Judas at Eleasa.
Jonathan Macca- baeus succeeds him.
Death of Al- cimus (Hellen¬ izing High Priest) .
No High Priest for 7 years.
Jonathan made High Priest and so combines polit¬ ical and reli¬ gious office.
Rededication of the Temple.
Book III, of Sybilline Oracles probably about this time.
Book of Judith.
Probably I. Es- dras.
Probably also part of Book of Enoch.
Simon Macca- baeus rules.
John Hyrcanus rules.
Political inde¬ pendence of the Jews.
Aristobulus calls himself King of Judea.
Alexander Jan- naeus reigns.
Samaritan tem¬ ple destroyed.
Destruction of Samaria.
The Essenes.
Revival of Hel¬ lenism.
Clash with Phar¬ isees, and siding with S'adducees. Party strife.
100
Polybius.
Third Punic War.
Carthage and Corinth destroyed.
Embassy to Rome.
Terence.
Gracchi.
Cicero and Pom' pey born.
Power of Marius.
Birth of Julius Caesar.
CHART
IX
|
DATE |
RULERS OF JUDEA |
HIGH PRIESTS |
WRITINGS AND |
CONTEMPORARY |
|
EVENTS IN JUDEA |
EVENTS |
|||
|
T5 C. |
Book of Jubilees or Little Genesis |
Sylla. Lucretius. |
||
|
86 |
||||
|
and Psalms of Solomon. |
Catullus. |
|||
|
Revival of Phar- |
||||
|
isaism. |
||||
|
78 |
Salome -Alexan- |
Hyrcanus |
||
|
74 |
dra rules. |
High Priest. Separation again between political and religious rule. |
Birth of Herod |
|
|
the Great. |
||||
|
69 |
AristobulusKing. |
H y r canus |
Overthrow of |
|
|
High Priest still. |
Hyrcanus by Aristobulus. |
|||
|
66 |
Antipater takes side of Hyrcanus. |
Pompey sent to Asia. |
||
|
65 |
Syria a Roman Province and so |
|||
|
end of Seleucid kings. |
||||
|
63 |
Pompey re-in¬ states Hyrcanus. |
Pompey enters Temple. |
Catiline. |
|
|
Cicero. |
||||
|
Roman rule of Judea really be- |
||||
|
60 |
gins. |
First Trium- |
||
|
virate (Pompey, Caesar, Crassus). |
||||
|
57 54 |
Rule by Councils. |
Crassus plunders Jerusalem. |
Rise of the Par- |
|
|
thians to power. |
||||
|
48 |
Caesar crosses |
|||
|
the Rubicon. Defeat of Pom¬ pey at Pharsalia. Caesar with Cle¬ opatra in Egypt. Downfall of Re¬ public. |
||||
|
47 |
Hyrcanus ap¬ pointed Ethnarch |
1 Maccabees and |
Caesar perpetual Dictator. |
|
|
II Maccabees both |
||||
|
by Caesar, and An- |
belong to this cen- |
|||
|
tipater his Prime |
tury. |
|||
|
Minister (Procu- |
Probably also the |
|||
|
44 |
rator). |
so-called IV Mac¬ cabees. |
Assassination of |
|
|
Caesar. |
||||
|
42 |
Battle of Phi- |
|||
|
lippi and victory of the Second Triumvirate (Oc¬ tavius, Antonius, Lcpidus) over |
||||
|
Brutus and Cas- |
||||
|
sius. |
X
CHART
DATE
B. C. 41
40
37
35
31
27
25
20orl9
6
5 4 4
A. D. 4
6
7
9
12
14
15
16
|
RULERS OF JUDEA |
HIGH PRIESTS |
WRITINGS AND EVENTS IN JUDEA |
|
Herod appointee Tetrarch and rule taken away from Hyrcanus, Judea now a Roman Province. Parthians estab¬ lish Antigonus as King. Herod becomes King of Judea. |
Parthians cap¬ ture Jerusalem while Herod flees to Rome and is appointed King of Judea. Herod marries Mariamne. Hillel and Sham- |
|
|
Hyrcanus deposed and Ananelus made High Priest. Aristobulus |
||
|
High Priest. His drowning. Succeeded by Jesus and then Simon. |
mai, rival teachers of Rabbinism in Jerusalem. Scribism domi¬ nant in Palestine. Jewish Rabbi¬ nical Theology (Talmud A. D. 200-500). Rise of Hero- dians. |
|
|
Samaria rebuilt. |
||
|
Herod begins repairing the Tem¬ ple at Jerusalem. Birth of John the Baptist. BIRTH OF JE¬ SUS. Death of Herod the Great. |
||
|
Matthias. |
||
|
Arr.helaus Eth- |
Joseph. Joasar. |
|
|
narch of Judea. |
||
|
Eleasar. |
||
|
Archelaus de¬ posed and Judea again made Prov¬ ince of Rome. Coponius Procu¬ rator. |
Jesus. Ananus. |
Rise of Zealots. Visit of the Boy Jesus to Jerusa¬ lem. |
|
Ambivius Procu¬ rator. Annius Rufus Procurator. |
||
|
Valerius Gratus Procurator. |
Assumption of Moses. |
|
|
Ishmael. |
||
|
Simon. |
1 |
CONTEMPORARY
EVENTS
Anthony loses a kingdom for Cleo¬ patra.
Virgil.
Tibullus.
Battle of Actium and victory of Oc¬ tavius over An- tonius.
Octavius be¬ comes Emperor (Augustus).
Cornelius Nepos.
Sallust.
Horace.
Livy.
Ovid.
Herod Antipas Tetrarch of Gali¬ lee and Perea. Philip Tetrarch of Iturea, Trachoni- tis, etc.
Diodorus
Siculus.
Strabo.
Death of Au¬ gustus.
Tiberius be¬ comes full Em¬ peror (after two years co-reigning in the Provinces).
CHART
xi
DATE
18
25 (or 26)
26 (or 27)
30 (or 29)
Pass¬
over-
Forty
days
later.
30
Pente¬
cost.
34
34- 36
35- 37 36
37
39
41
43
44
45
48
49 52
50-51
54
55-57
59-60
59
60
RULERS OF JUDEA
Pontius Pilate (Procurator.)
Recall of Pon¬ tius Pilate. Sue ceeded by Marcel- lus.
Maruelus.
Herod Agrippa I, given Judea also. Rules as King.
Death of Agrippa I. and Judea a province again. Cuspius Fadus Procurator.
Alexander.
Cumanus.
Felix.
Festus succeeds Felix.
HIGH PRIESTS
Caiaphas.
Jonathan.
Theophilus.
Simon.
Matthias.
Ellonaios.
Joseph
Ananus.
Ishmael.
Joseph.
WRITINGS AND EVENTS IN JUDEA
John Baptist be¬ gins ministry. Baptism of Jesus.
Crucifixion and Resurrection of Christ.
Ascension of Christ.
Descent of the Holy Spirit.
Death of Ste¬ phen.
Conversion of Saul.
Writings of Philo (born about B. C. 20).
Death of James the Apostle. Im¬ portant date in ca¬ reer of Paul be¬ cause of visit to Jerusalem at time of famine and death of Herod (Acts 11:30).
Epistle of James.
Conference at Jerusalem.
Epistles of Paul to the Thessaloni- ans (First group).
CONTEMPORARY
EVENTS
Death of Philip the Tetrarch.
Caligulus Em¬ peror.
Herod Agrippa I, made King.
Herod Antipas deposed as Tet¬ rarch.
Claudius Em¬ peror.
Rebellion Theudas.
of
Second group of Paul’s Epistles. 1 Cor., 2 Cor., Gal., Rom. Date of Galatians uncer¬ tain.
The Judaizers. Important date in career of Paul.
Possibly Mark and Matthew by this time.
Probably Gospel) of Luke during stay at Caesarea (58-60).
Rebellious out¬ breaks of Jews against Rome. Nero Emperor.
Burrhus.
Seneca.
CHART
Xll
DATE
RULERS OF JUDEA
HIGH PRIESTS
WRITINGS AND EVENTS IN JUDEA
CONTEMPORARY
EVENTS
59-61
62
61-63
64
65
66
66-68
67
68
69
70
75
79
81
85
90
95
96 98
98-100
Albinus.
Gessius Florus.
People revolt against Rome.
End of Jewish state.
. Departure of
Paul to Rome.
Ananus.
. . Third group of
Paul’s Epistles, Philippians, Colos- sians, Ephesians and Philemon.
Paul set free.
The Gnostics.
Matthias. Epistles of Peter, Jude, and that to the Hebrews, most probably between 64 and 69.
. Josephus Gover¬ nor of Galilee.
. Pastoral Epistles
of Paul (Fourth Group).
. Possible death
of Simon Peter.
. Paul’s second
imprisonment and death.
. _ Flight of Chris¬ tians to Pella.
. Destruction of
Temple and Jeru¬ salem by Titus.
. End of Sanhed¬ rin.
. . Rabbinic School
at Jamnia.
. Writings of Jo¬ sephus.
. Possible date of
Epistles of John.
Possible date of Gospel of John.
Probable date of Revelation of John.
Death of John and close of Apos¬ tolic time. To¬ wards close of this century 2 (4) Es- dras and Apoca¬ lypse of Baruch were doubtless written and also parts of Enoch and Sybilline Ora¬ cles. Here also be¬ long Epistle of Clement of Rome, and so-called Epis¬ tle of Barnabas.
Burning of Rome.
Persecution of Christians.
Romans driven from Jerusalem.
Vespasian in Galilee and Judea.
Death of Nero. Brief reigns of Galba, Otho, Vit- ellius.
Vespasian Em¬ peror.
Quintus Curtius.
Epictetus.
Pliny the Elder.
Titus Emperor.
Domitian Em¬ peror.
Cerinthus.
Ebionites,
Martial.
Juvenal.
Persecution of Christians under Domitian.
Tacitus.
Nerva Emperor. Trajan Emperor. Plutarch. Quintilian.
CONTENTS
PAGE
PREFACE .......... y
CHART OF INTERBIBLICAL AND NEW TESTAMENT TIMES . . vii
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY .... 25
BOOKS ABOUT BOOKS ON THE NEW TESTAMENT . . 25
BIBLE DICTIONARIES ....... 26
IMPORTANT EDITIONS OF THE ENGLISH NEW TESTAMENT . 27
CONCORDANCES ........ 27
BOOKS ON OLD TESTAMENT QUOTATIONS .... 28
INTRODUCTION TO THE NEW TESTAMENT ... 28
NEW TESTAMENT HISTORY AND TIMES .... 31
THEOLOGY OF THE NEW TESTAMENT .... 35
HERMENEUTICS, OR INTERPRETATION .... 36
EXTRA-CANONICAL EARLY CHRISTIAN LITERATURE . . 37
PART I: THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
(400 B. C. to B. C. 6 or 5) . . . . 43
BIBLIOGRAPHY . 43
THE OLD TESTAMENT APOCRYPHA AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA . 43
PHILO . . . 47
JOSEPHUS . 48
THE TALMUD ........ 49
THE TARGUMS . 52
HANDBOOKS ON THE INTERBIBLICAL PERIOD ... 52
LESSON I: IN THE PERSIAN PERIOD (B. C. 400- B. C. 331) . 53
LIST OF PERSIAN RULERS ...... 54
LIST OF HIGH PRIESTS DURING PERSIAN PERIOD OF THE
INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY ...... 54
SPECIAL BOOKS ON PERSIAN PERIOD .... 55
LESSON II : IN THE GREEK PERIOD (B. C. 331-167) 55
Alexander and the Ptolemies (B. C. 331-198) . 55
SPECIAL BOOKS ON ALEXANDER THE GREAT ... 56
BOOKS ON THE PTOLEMAIC ERA . 57
xiii
XIV
CONTENTS
PAGE
PART I: THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
(Continued)
BOOKS ON THE SEPTUAGINT ...... 57
Text . 57
Concordance and Grammar ..... 57
Special Books ....... 58
LIST OF PTOLEMAIC KINGS . 58
LESSON III: IN THE GREEK PERIOD (Cont’d), SELEUCID RULE . 59
FURTHER BOOKS ON ECCLESIASTICUS .... 60
LIST OF THE SELEUCID KINGS ..... 61
LIST OF JEWISH HIGH PRIESTS DURING THE GREEK PERIOD
TILL OFFICE PASSES TO THE MACCABEES ... 62
LESSON IV: FIRST LESSON IN THE MACCABEAN PERIOD (Beginning of the Maccabean Revolt, B. C- 167-166) . 62
BOOKS ON MACCABEAN PERIOD ..... 65
LESSON V: SECOND LESSON ON THE MACCA¬ BEAN PERIOD (Judas Maccabseus B. C. 166-161) . 65
SEVEN CHIEF CAMPAIGNS BY JUDAS .... 66
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JUDAS MACCABEUS ... 66
LESSON VI: THIRD LESSON ON THE MACCA¬ BEAN PERIOD (Jonathan Maccabseus, Simon Mac- cabseus and John Hyrcanus, B. C. 161-106) ... 67
LESSON VII: FOURTH LESSON ON THE MACCA¬ BEAN PERIOD (Decline of the Maccabean Dynasty and Beginning of Roman Period, B. C. 106-47) . . 68
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE ROMAN PERIOD .... 70
LESSON VIII: IN THE ROMAN PERIOD . . 70
SPECIAL BOOKS ON HEROD ...... 71
JEWISH LITERATURE OF THE INTERBIBLICAL AND NEW
TESTAMENT TIMES . . . . . . • 72
LESSON IX: IN THE ROMAN PERIOD ( Continued ) 73
LESSON X: IN THE ROMAN PERIOD ( Continued ) 75
LESSON XI: THE JEWISH PARTIES ... 76
PHARISEES, SADDUCEES, SCRIBES, ESSENES, HERODIANS,
ZEALOTS ......... 76
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JEWISH PARTIES .... 77
CONTENTS
PART I: THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY (Continued)
LESSON XII : THE JEWISH EXPECTATIONS CON¬ CERNING THE MESSIAH .
BOOKS ON THE MESSIANIC HOPE OF THE JEWS AND ESCHATOLOGY ........
LESSON XIII: A GLIMPSE OF THE WORLD INTO WHICH JESUS WAS BORN .
Literature Useful for the Purpose
PART II: THE LIFE OF CHRIST (B. C. 6 or 5 to A. D. 29 or 30) ....
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF IMPORTANT WORKS ON THE GOSPELS AND THE LIFE OF CHRIST .
i: THE GOSPELS ........
1. Introduction to the Four Gospels .
2. The Synoptic Problem .....
3. The Authorship and Character of the Fourth
Gospel ........
II I COMMENTARIES ON THE GOSPELS ....
1. Series on Entire New Testament .
(a) For English Readers .....
(b) For Greek Students .....
2. Commentaries on Matthew ....
(a) For English Students .....
(b) F"or Greek Students .....
3. Commentaries on Mark .....
(a) For English Students .....
(b) For Greek Students .....
4. Commentaries on Luke .....
(a) For English Students .....
(b) For Greek Students .....
5. Commentaries on John .....
(a) For English Students .....
(b) For Greek Students .....
Ill: HARMONIES OF THE GOSPELS .....
IV : LIFE OF CHRIST .......
1. Bibliographies and Criticism of Literature on
the Life of Christ .....
2. Introductory Problems .....
3. Exhaustive Treatises on the Life of Christ .
4. Handbooks .......
5. Very Radical Works .....
6. lesus Treated as a Paranoiac
7. The Historicity of Jesus ....
xv
PAGE
78
78
81
81
89
89
89
89
91
95
99
99 99
100
102
102
102
103
103
104
105
105
105
106 106
107
108 109
109
110 111 112
113
114 114
XVI
CONTENTS
PAGE
PART II: THE LIFE OF CHRIST (Continued)
8. The Jesus or Christ ( Jesus or Paul ) Contro¬
versy ...... 115
9. The Person of Christ ..... 116
10. Special Aspects ...... 120
11. The Miracles of Jesus ..... 122
12. The Parables of Jesus ..... 124
13. The Teaching of Jesus ..... 125
(a) Teaching as a Whole ..... 125
(b) The Father and the Holy Spirit . . . 127
(c) Christ’s Idea of Himself .... 127
(d) The Kingdom and Eschatology . . . 128
(e) Ethical and Social Problems . . . . 129
14. Lives of Christ for Children .... 130
15. Poems about Christ ..... 131
16. Romances ....... 131
17. Non-Scriptural Accounts of Jesus . . . 132
LESSON I: BEGINNINGS OF THE GOSPELS AND PREPARATION FOR THE BIRTH OF JESUS . 133
LESSON II: THE BIRTH OF JESUS . 135
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE VIRGIN BIRTH .... 136
OTHER BOOKS OF INTEREST ...... 136
LESSON III: THE LONG YEARS OF SILENCE . 137
SPECIAL BOOKS . 138
LESSON IV: JOHN THE BAPTIST .... 138
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JOHN THE BAPTIST .... 139
LESSON V: CHRISTS BAPTISM AND TEMPTA¬ TION . 141
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE TEMPTATION OF JESUS . . 142
LESSON VI: FROM BETHANY BEYOND JORDAN TO CAPERNAUM . 143
BOOKS ON THE TWO-WINE CONTROVERSY . . . 145
LESSON VII: THE EARLY MINISTRY IN JUDEA AND SAMARIA . 145
SPECIAL BOOKS ON SAMARITANS AND NICODEMUS . . 146
LESSON VIII: BEGINNING OF THE GALILEAN
MINISTRY . 146
SPECIAL BOOKS . ...... 148
LESSON IX: THE SABBATH CONTROVERSY . 148
BOOKS ON THE SABBATH QUESTION .... 149
BOOKS ON CHRIST AND THE OLD TESTAMENT . . . 149
CONTENTS
PART II: THE LIFE OF CHRIST (Continued)
LESSON X: THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE LORD’S PRAYER ....
BOOKS ON THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT
LESSON XI: GOING TO WORK WITH THE TWELVE .
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JESUS’ ALLUSION TO JONAH
LESSON XII: THE FIRST GREAT GROUP OF PARABLES . . .
LESSON XIII: REMAINDER OF THE BUSY DAY AND CLOSE OF GALILEAN CAMPAIGN .
SPECIAL BOOKS ON DEMONOLOGY .....
LESSON XIV: THE FIRST THREE WITHDRAW¬ ALS FROM GALILEE .
LESSON XV: THE FOURTH RETIREMENT .
LESSON XVI: THE CLOSE OF THE SEASON OF RETIREMENT .
LESSON XVII : THE GREAT CONFLICT IN JERU¬ SALEM AT THE FEAST OF TABERNACLES
LESSON XVIII: WITHDRAWAL FROM JERUSA¬ LEM INTO JUDEA AND RETURN TO FEAST OF DEDICATION .
LESSON XIX: FROM BETHANY BEYOND JOR¬ DAN TO THE RAISING OF LAZARUS AT BETHANY NEAR JERUSALEM ....
LESSON XX: THE LAST JOURNEY TO JERU¬ SALEM .
LESSON XXI: SUNDAY AND MONDAY OF THE LAST WEEK .
LESSON XXII: THE LAST DAY IN CHRIST’S PUBLIC MINISTRY .
WESSON XXIII: FROM THE DISCOURSE ON THE MOUNT OF OLIVES TO THE LAST PASSOVER MEAL .
LESSON XXIV: FROM THE LORD’S SUPPER TO THE AGONY IN THE GARDEN ....
SPECIAL BOOKS ON CHRIST’S FAREWELL DISCOURSE AND THE INTERCESSORY PRAYER .
xvii
PAGE
149
151
152
154
155
155
156 158
158
159
161
162
163
164
165
167
168
169
171
172
CONTENTS
xviii
PAGE
PART II: THE LIFE OF CHRIST (Continued)
LESSON XXV: THE ARREST AND TRIAL OF JESUS . 172
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE TRIAL OF JESUS . . . 174
LESSON XXVI : THE CRUCIFIXION ... 175
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE CRUCIFIXION .... 176
LESSON XXVII: THE RESURRECTION AND AS¬ CENSION . 178
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION . 180
PART III: THE ACTS AND THE EPIS¬ TLES (Probably A. D. 30 to A. D. go) . 185
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1: BOOKS ON THE APOSTOLIC PERIOD .... 185
L General History ...... 185
2. Culture of the Period ..... 185
3. Philosophy . . . 186
4. History of Religion and Morality . . . 188
5. The History of Apostolic Christianity . . 192
II : SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE LIFE AND TEACHING OF
PETER . 196
III: SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE LIFE AND TEACHING OF THE
APOSTLE JOHN . 197
IV : THE LIFE AND TEACHING OF JAMES . . . 198
V: LIFE AND TEACHING OF LUKE .... 199
VI : LIFE AND TEACHING OF PAUL .... 199
1. Life and Work ...... 200
2. The Epistles of Paul Treated as a Whole . 202
3. The Teachings of Paul ..... 203
VII : SPECIAL BOOKS ON ACTS . 205
1. Discussions ....... 205
2. Commentaries on the English Text . . 206
3. Commentaries on the Greek Text . . . 207
LESSON I: BEGINNINGS OF APOSTOLIC HIS¬ TORY (A. D. 29 or 30) . 208
SPECIAL BOOKS ABOUT THE HOLY SPIRIT . . . 209
LESSON II: THE YEARS OF WAITING IN JERU¬ SALEM (A. D. 30-4) . 210
LESSON III: THE YOUTH OF SAUL OF TARSUS 210
CONTENTS
xix
PAGE
PART III: THE ACTS AND THE EPIS¬ TLES (Continued)
LESSON IV: THE SCATTERED DISCIPLES AND THE OUTSIDE WORLD . 211
LESSON V: SAUL’S CONVERSION (About A. D. 35) 212
SPECIAL BOOKS ON SAUL’S CONVERSION .... 213
LESSON VI: THE YEARS OF TRANSITION (A. D.
36-46) . 213
LESSON VII: THE EPISTLE OF JAMES (A. D. 49) 214
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON JAMES . . . . 215
1. On the English Text ..... 215
2. On the Greek Text ...... 215
LESSON VIII: PAUL’S FIRST MISSIONARY JOUR¬ NEY (A. D. 48-49) 216
LESSON IX: THE CONFERENCE AT JERUSA¬ LEM (A. D. 49) . 217
LESSON X: FROM ANTIOCH TO TROAS (A. D. 49) 218
LESSON XI: PAUL AT PHILIPPI, THESSALONICA AND BERCEA (A. D. 49 or 50) . 218
LESSON XII: PAUL AT ATHENS (A. D. 49 or 50 . 219
SPECIAL BOOKS ON ATHENS . 219
LESSON XIII: PAUL AT CORINTH (A. D. 50-52) . 219
LESSON XIV: THE THESSALONIAN LETTERS AND RETURN TO ANTIOCH (A. D. 50 or 51) . 220
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON I AND II THESSALONIANS . 220
1. On the English Text ..... 220
2. On the Greek Text ...... 221
LESSON XV: PAUL AT EPHESUS (52-55 or 56) . 222
LESSON XVI: FIRST CORINTHIANS 1-7 (A. D. 55
or 56) . . 223
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON I CORINTHIANS . . . 223
1. On the English Text ..... 223
2. On the Greek Text ...... 224
LESSON XVII: FIRST CORINTHIANS 8-16 . . 225
XX
CONTENTS
PAGE
PART III: THE ACTS AND THE EPIS¬ TLES (Continued)
LESSON XVIII: FROM EPHESUS TO MACEDONIA AND II CORINTHIANS 1-7 (A. D. 55 or 56) . . 225
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON II CORINTHIANS ALONE . 225
1. On the English Text ..... 226
2. On the Greek Text ...... 226
LESSON XIX: II CORINTHIANS 8-13 (A. D. 55 or 56) . 226
LESSON XX: EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS (Probably A. D. 55 or 56) ...... 227
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON GALATIANS . . . 227
1. On the English Text ..... 227
2. On the Greek Text ...... 228
LESSON XXI: ROMANS 1-8 (A. D. 56 or 57) . . 229
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON ROMANS .... 229
1. On the English Text ..... 229
2. On the Greek Text ...... 230
LESSON XXII: ROMANS 9-16 . 231
LESSON XXIII: THE LAST JOURNEY TO JERU¬ SALEM (Spring of 56 or 57) ..... 231
LESSON XXIV: PAUL AT JERUSALEM THE LAST TIME (Pentecost of 56 or 57) ..... 231
LESSON XXV: PAUL A PRISONER AT C2ESAREA 56-58 or 57-59) ........ 232
LESSON XXVI: PAUL’S VOYAGE TO ROME (Au¬
tumn of 58 or 59 to Spring of 59 or 60) . . . 232
LESSON XXVII : PAUL IN ROME AND THE LET¬ TER TO THE PHILIPPIANS (A. D. 60-2 or 61-3) . 233
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON PHILIPPIANS . . . 234
1. On the English Text ..... 234
2. On the Greek Text ...... 234
LESSON XXVIII: PHILEMON AND COLOSSIANS (A. D. 62 or 63) . 235
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON PHILEMON AND COLOSSIANS 235
1. On the English Text ..... 235
2. On the Greek Text ...... 236
LESSON XXIX: EPHESIANS (A. D. 62 or 63) . . 236
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON EPHESIANS . . . 237
1. On the English Text ..... 237
2. On the Greek Text . 237
CONTENTS xxi
PAGE
PART Ills THE ACTS AND THE EPIS¬ TLES (Continued)
LESSON XXX: RELEASE OF PAUL AND I TIM¬ OTHY (Probably 63 to 66 or 67) . . . . 238
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON PASTORAL EPISTLES . . 239
1. On the English Text ..... 239
2. On the Greek Text ...... 240
LESSON XXXI: THE LAST YEAR OF PAUL’S LIFE (Autumn of 67 till Summer of 68) .... 241
LESSON XXXII: I PETER (About A. D. 65) . . 242
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON EPISTLES OF PETER AND JUDE
1. On the English Text ..... 242
2. On the Greek Text ...... 242
LESSON XXXIII: JUDE AND II PETER (About A.D. 66-67) . 244
LESSON XXXIV: HEBREWS 1-7 (About A. D. 69) . 244
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON HEBREWS .... 244
1. On the Greek Text ...... 245
LESSON XXXV: HEBREWS 8-13 .... 246
LESSON XXXVI: THE EPISTLES OF JOHN (Per¬ haps A. D. 85-90) . 247
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON THE EPISTLES OF JOHN . 247
1. On the English Text ..... 247
2. On the Greek Text ..... 248
PART IV: THE REVELATION OF JOHN
(Probably about A. D. 95) . . 251
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE REVELATION . . . .251
1. On the English Text ..... 251
2. On the Greek Text ..... 253
LESSON I: REVELATION 1-3 . 254
LESSON II: REVELATION 4-11 . 257
LESSON III: REVELATION 12: 1-19: 10 . 260
I : PRETERIST THEORIES ...... 260
Objections ........ 261
II : FUTURIST THEORIES ...... 263
III: HISTORICAL THEORIES ...... 264
Objections ........ 265
Two Great Difficulties ..... 2 66
LESSON IV: REVELATION 19: 11-22:21 . 271
i: DIFFERENT THEORIES ABOUT THE MILLENNIUM . 271
II : TIME OF BEGINNING . 274
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
BOOKS ABOUT BOOKS ON THE NEW TESTAMENT
Briggs — Theological Encyclopaedia.
Bruckner — Theologischer Jahresbericht : Das Neue Testament (published annually).
Jones, M. — The New Testament in the Twentieth Cen¬ tury (1914).
Moffatt — An Introduction to the Literature of the New Testament (1911. Third Ed., 1920).
Schaff — Theological Propaedeutic (1893).
Schuerer — History of the Jewish People in Time of Christ (has exhaustive lists at beginning of chapters). Thayer — Books and Their Use (1903).
Vincent — Student’s New Testament Handbook (1893). Votaw and Bradley — Books for New Testament Study (1901).
Votaw — Books for New Testament Study (Biblical World for October, 1905, and May, 1911).
Weidner — Theological Encyclopaedia (1889).
Windisch — Englisch - Amerikanische Literatur zum Neuen Testament in den Jahren 1914 bis 1920 (Zeitschrift fur die neut. Wiss. 1921 Heft 1-3). Windisch — Literature on the New Testament, 1914-1920 (Continental Europe). Harvard Theol. Review, April, 1922.
25
26 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
BIBLE DICTIONARIES
Buckland — Universal Bible Dictionary (1914).
Cheyne — Encyclopaedia Biblica. Four volumes (1899- 1903).
Davis — A Dictionary of the Bible. One volume (second edition 1903).
Easton — Illustrated Bible Dictionary. One volume (1893).
Guthe — Kurzes Bibelworterbuch. One volume (1903).
Hastings — A Dictionary of the Bible. Five volumes (1898-1904).
Hastings — A Dictionary of the Bible. One volume (1909).
Hastings — A Dictionary of Christ and the Gospels. Two volumes (1906-1908).
Hastings — Dictionary of the Apostolic Church. Two volumes (1916-1918).
Hastings — Encyclopaedia of Religion and Ethics. Twelve volumes (1908-1922).
Hauck — Realencyklopadie fur protestantische Theologie und Kirche. 3 Aufl. Twenty-two volumes (1896- 1909).
Jackson — New Schaff-Herzog Encyclopaedia of Re¬ ligious Knowledge. Thirteen volumes (1908-1913).
Jacobus — A Standard Bible Dictionary. One volume (1909). New ed. in press.
Mathews and Smith — A Dictionary of Religion and Ethics (1921).
Orr — International Standard Bible Encyclopaedia. Five volumes (1915).
Smith — A Dictionary of the Bible. Four volumes (1888). Revised A— J, 1893.
Smith — A Dictionary of the Bible. One volume (1902, reprint) .
Singer — The Jewish Encyclopaedia. Twelve volumes (1901-6).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
27
The Temple Bible Dictionary. One volume (1910). Wright — Illustrated Bible Treasury (1896).
IMPORTANT EDITIONS OF THE ENGLISH NEW TESTAMENT
Besides standard versions of the whole Bible (the King James’ or Authorized Version, the 1911 Bible, which is the Authorized Version slightly altered, the Canterbury Revision, the American Standard Version) and special editions of the English Bible (like the Cross Reference Bible, the Scofield Reference Bible, the Variorum Teach¬ ers’ Bible, the Temple Bible, the Century Bible, the Bible for Home and School, Messages of the Bible, the Modern Reader’s Bible), there are excellent translations of the New Testament (like the Bible Union Version, Moffatt’s Historical New Testament and also his New Translation of the New Testament and his Parallel New Testament, Weymouth’s Modern Speech New Testament, the Twen¬ tieth Century New Testament, Robertson’s Student’s Chronological New Testament, Goodspeed’s American Vernacular, etc.) Of interest also is The New Testa¬ ment in Braid Scots by W. W. Smith (1901) and Courtney’s The Literary Man’s New Testament (1914).
CONCORDANCES
Cruden — Complete Concordance (1885).
Gillespie — Englishman’s Greek Concordance (1885). Hatch and Redpath — Concordance to the Septuagint. Six volumes (1892-6). Supplement on Proper Names (1900).
Hazard — Complete Concordance to the American Stand¬ ard Bible (1922).
Moulton and Geden — Concordance to the Greek Testa¬ ment (1897).
Strong — Exhaustive Concordance to the Bible (1894). Strong — Student’s Concordance and Revised Version (1882).
28 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Thoms — Concordance to the Revised Version of the New Testament (1883).
Young — Analytical Concordance to the Bible. Seventh edition (1893).
Walker — Comprehensive Concordance to the Bible (1894).
BOOKS ON OLD TESTAMENT QUOTATIONS
Bartlet and Others — New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers (1905).
Boehl — Alttestamentliche Citate im Neuen Testament (1878).
Dittmar — Vetus Testamentum in Novo (1899).
Gough — New Testament Quotations (compared with Hebrew and LXX, 1855).
Huhn — -Die Alttestamentliche Citate, etc. (1900).
Johnson — The Quotations of the New Testament from the Old (1896).
McNeile — Our Lord’s Use of the Old Testament (Cam¬ bridge Biblical Essays, 1909).
McFarland — Jesus and the Prophets (1905).
Scott — New Testament Quotations.
Taylor, C. — The Gospel in the Law (1869).
Toy — Quotations in the New Testament (1884).
Turpie — The Old Testament in the New (1868).
Vollmer — Die Alttestamentlichen Citate bei Paulus (1895).
introduction to the new testament
Allen and Grensted — Introduction to the Books of the New Testament (1913).
Bacon — The Making of the New Testament.
Bacon— -An Introduction to the New Testament (1900).
Balmforth — The New Testament in the Light of the Higher Criticism (1904).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY 29
Barth — Einleitung in das Neue Testament (1908). 5
Aufl. (1920.)
Belzer — Einleitung in das Neue Testament. Second edi¬ tion (1902).
Bleek — Einleitung in das Neue Testament. 4 Aufl. (1886).
Clemen — Die Enstehung des Neuen Testament (1906). 2 Aufl. (1919).
Cobern — The New Archaeological Discoveries and Their Bearing on the New Testament. Fifth edition (1921).
Conybeare — History of the New Testament Criticism (1910).
Cruttwell — Literary History of Early Christianity (1893).
Davidson, S. — Introduction to the New Testament. Third edition (1894).
Dods— Introduction to the New Testament (1894).
Feine — Einleitung in das Neue Testament. 2 Aufl. (1918).
Gardner, P. — A Historic View of the New Testament (1901).
Gloag — Introduction to the New Testament. Four volumes (1879).
Godet — Introduction to the New Testament. (Part I., 1894; Part II., Div. i., 1899).
Goodspeed — The Story of the New Testament (1915). Gregory, C. R. — Einleitung in das Neue Testament 1909).
Harnack — History of Early Christian Literature until Eusebius (1897).
Heinrici — Der literarische Charickter d. Neut. Schriften (1908).
Holtzman, H. J. — Lehrbuch der historisch-kritischen Einleitung in das Neue Testament. 3 Aufl. (1892). Jacquier — Histoire des Livres du Nouveau Testament. Four tomes (1903-8).
30 SYLLABUS FOE NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
w
Jacquier — Etudes de Critique et de Philologie du Nouveau Testament (1920).
Jones, M. — The New Testament in the Twentieth Cen¬ tury (1914).
Julicher — An Introduction to the New Testament (1904).
Kerr — Introduction to New Testament Study (1892).
Knopf — Einfiihrung in das Neue Testament (1919).
Knowling — Literary Criticism of the New Testament (1908).
McClymont — The New Testament and Its Writers (1893).
McClymont — History and Results of New Testament Criticism (1913).
Milligan — The New Testament Documents. Their Origin and Early History (1913).
Moffatt — The Historical New Testament (1901).
Moffatt— -An Introduction to the Literature of the New Testament (1911 and 1920).
Moffatt — The Approach to the New Testament (1921).
Nash — Higher Criticism of the New Testament (1903).
Peake — Critical Introduction to the New Testament (1910).
Ramsay — The Bearing of Recent Discovery on the Trust¬ worthiness of the New Testament (1915).
Ramsay — The First Christian Century (1911).
Robertson, J. A. — The Hidden Romance of the New Testament (1920).
Salmon — Introduction to the New Testament (1892).
Soden, H. von — The History of Early Christian Litera¬ ture (1906).
Strong, A. H. — Popular Lectures on the Books of the New Testament (1914).
Symes — The Evolution of the New Testament (1921).
Weiss, B. — A Manual of Introduction to the New Testa¬ ment. Two volumes (1889). Dritte Aufl. (Berlin, 1897).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
31
Wrede — The Origin of the New Testament (1909). Zahn — An Introduction to the New Testament. Three volumes (1909).
(The above list includes only the more important of the comparatively recent books and does not include books on special problems like the synoptic question — only the New Testament as a whole— and does not include books on the canon, the geography of Palestine and customs of the people, New Testament Archaeology, which are treated in the class in Biblical Introduction. New Testament Criticism, like Old Testament Criticism is formally taught in the class in Biblical Introduction. For books on the language of the New Testament and the text of the New Testament, students are referred to my Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Historical Research and the books on New Testament Textual Criticism.)
NEW TESTAMENT HISTORY AND TIMES
(Books Covering Aspects of the Whole Period.)
Abbott — Society and Politics in Ancient Rome (1909). Adam — Religious Teachers of Greece (1908).
Angus — Environment of Early Christianity (1915). Arnold — The Roman System of Provincial Administra¬ tion (1906).
Bentwich — Hellenism (1919).
Bergmann — Jiidische Apologetik im neutestamentlichen Zeitalter (1908).
Botsford — Ancient History.
Botsford — History of Greece.
Botsford — History of Rome.
Bousset — Die Religion des Judenthums im neutestament¬ lichen Zeitalter. 2 Aufl. (1906).
Breasted — Ancient Times: A History of the Ancient World (1918).
32 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Breed — Preparation of the World for Christ. Second edition (1893).
Buchler — Types of Palestinian Piety (1922).
Bury — History of the Roman Empire from B. C. 28 to A. D. 180 (1893).
Case — The Evolution of Early Christianity (1914).
Clemen — Primitive Christianity and Its Non-Jewish Sources (1912).
Cornill — History of the People of Israel (1898).
Deissmann — Light From the Ancient East (1910).
Dewick — Primitive Christian Eschatology (1912).
Dill — Roman Society From Nero to Marcus Aurelius (1905).
Dollinger — The Gentile and the Jew. Two volumes (1906).
Edersheim — History of the Jewish Nation (1885).
Edersheim — Sketches of Jewish Social Life (1876).
Ewald — History of Israel. Eight volumes (1876-86).
Farrar — Early Days of Christianity (1882).
Farrer — Paganism and Christianity (1891).
Felten — Neutestamentliche Zeitgeschichte. Two vol¬ umes (1910).
Ferrero — The Greatness and Decline of Rome. Five volumes (1907-9).
Ferrero — Characters and Events of Roman History (1909).
Fisher — Beginnings of Christianity. Second edition (1911).
Foakes — Jackson and Kirsopp Lake — The Beginnings of Christianity (1921- ).
Friedlander — Die religiosen Bewegungen innerhalb des Judentums in Zeitalter Jesu (1905).
Friedlander — Roman Life and Manners under the Early Empire. Three volumes (1909-10).
Glover — Conflict of Religions within the Roman Empire
(1911).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY 3S
Glover — Progress in Religion to the Christian Era (1922).
Grant — The Peasantry of Palestine (1907).
Gratz — Geschichte der Juden. 5 Aufl. (1906).
Hall — Historical Setting of the Early Gospel (1912).
Hardy — Christianity and the Roman Government (1894).
Harnack — Mission and Expansion of Christianity in the First Three Centuries. Two volumes (1908).
Hausrath — History of New Testament Times. Four volumes (1878-95).
Herford — Pharisaism (1912).
Hollmann — The Jewish Religion in the Time of Jesus (1909).
Holtzmann, O. — Neutestamentliche Zeitgeschichte (1895). 2 Aufl. (1906).
Inge — Society in Rome Under the Caesars (1894).
Jeremias — Babylonisch im Neuen Testament (1904).
Kaerst — Geschichte des hellenistischen Zeitalters. Two volumes (1901-9).
Kruger — Hellenismus und Judentum im neutestament- lichen Zeitalter (1908).
Latimer — Judea From Cyrus to Titus (1899).
Ledrain — Histoire d’lsrael (1892).
Livingston — The Legacy of Greece (1922).
Mackie — Bible Manners and Customs (1898).
Maclear — Class Book of New Testament History (1890).
Mahaffy — Survey of Greek Civilization (1896).
Mahaffy — The Silver Age of the Greek World (1906).
Mathews — The History of New Testament Times in Palestine. Second edition (1910).
Mommsen — History of Rome. Five volumes (1894).
Mommsen — The Provinces of the Roman Empire from Caesar to Diocletian. Two volumes (1909).
Monroe — Source Book of the History of Education for the Greeks and Romans (1902).
34> SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Morrison — -The Jews Under Roman Rule. Fourth edi¬ tion (1899).
Orr — Neglected Factors in the Study of the Early Prog¬ ress of Christianity (1899).
Ottley — Short History of the Hebrews in the Roman Period (1900).
Oesterley and Box — The Religion and Worship of the Synagogue (1907).
Pfleiderer — Primitive Christianity: Its Writings and Teachings in Their Historical Connections. Three volumes (1906-10).
Pressense — The Ancient World and Christianity.
Radin — The Jews among the Greeks and the Romans (1915).
Rall — New Testament History (1914).
Ramsay, W. M. — The Church in the Roman Empire (1893).
Ramsay, W. M. — Roads and Travel in the New Testa¬ ment (article in Hastings D. B., Volume V.)
Ramsay — The Bearing of Recent Discovery on the Trust¬ worthiness of the New Testament (1915).
Reitzenstein — Die hellenistichen Mysterienreligionen.
Riggs — History of the Jewish People in the Maccabean and Roman Periods (1900).
Robertson, A. T. — Studies in the New Testament (1915).
Schurer — The Jewish People in the Time of Christ. Five volumes (1891).
Schwalm — La vie privee du peuple juif a l’epoque de Jesus Christ (1910).
Smith, George Adam — Historical Geography of the Holy Land. Fourteenth edition, two volumes (1908).
Stapfer — Palestine in the Time of Christ. Third edition (1885).
Stobart — The Glory That Was Greece (1911).
Stobart — The Grandeur That Was Rome (1912).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
35
Strack und Billerbeck — Kommentar zum Neuen Tes¬ tament aus Talmud und Midrasch (1922). Streatfield — Preparing the Way (1919).
Trumbull — Studies in Oriental Social Life (1907). Tucker — Life in the Roman World of Nero and St. Paul (1910).
Uhlhorn — Conflict of Christianity with Heathenism (1879).
Wade — New Testament History (1922).
Wendland — Die hellenistisch-romische Kultur in ihren Beziehungen zu Judentum und Christentum. 3 Aufl. (1912).
Wenley — Preparation for Christianity in the Ancient World (1898).
Wernle — Beginnings of Christianity. Two volumes (1903-4).
theology of the new testament
(Merely a Few of the Leading Books on the
Whole Field.)
Alexander — System of Biblical Theology (1888). Bernard — Progress of Doctrine in the New Testament (1867).
Beyschlag — Theology of the New Testament. Two volumes (1895).
Bovon — Theologie du Nouveau Testament. Two vol¬ umes (1893-4).
Bruce — The Kingdom of God (1893).
Cone — The Gospel and Its Earliest Interpretations. Sec¬ ond edition (1894).
Estes — Theology of New Testament (1900).
Fairbairn — Studies in Religion and Theology (1910). Feine — Theologie des Neuen Testaments (1910). 3
Aufl. (1919).
Fletcher — Psychology of the New Testament.
Gould — Biblical Theology of the New Testament (1900).
36 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Holtzmann, H. J. — Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen Theologie. Two volumes (1897).
Nairne — The Faith of the New Testament (1920). Schlatter— Theologie des Neuen Testaments. Two volumes (1909-10).
Stevens — The Theology of the New Testament (1899). Weinel — Biblische Theologie des Neuen Testaments. Die Religion Jesu und der Urchristentums. 3 Aufl. (1921).
Weiss, B. — Biblical Theology of the New Testament.
Two volumes (1888-9). 6 Aufl. (1895).
Weiss, B. — The Religion of the New Testament (1904). Wernle- — Beginnings of Christianity. Two volumes (1903-4).
Wibrich — Juden und Griechen.
HERMENEUTICS, OR INTERPRETATION
Barnes — A Companion to Biblical Studies (1916). Briggs — A General Introduction to the Study of Holy Scripture (1899).
Carpenter — The Bible in the Nineteenth Century (1903).
Cave — Introduction to Theology and Its Literature (1896).
Clarke — The Use of the Scriptures in Theology (1905). Clemen — Religionsgeschichtliche Erklarung des Neuen Testaments (1909).
Dods — The Bible: Its Origin and Nature (1905).
Eysinga — Die hollandische radikale Kritik des Neuen Testaments (1912).
Farrar — The History of Interpretation (1886). Farrar— The Messages of the Books (1885).
Gilbert — A Short History of the Interpretation of the Bible (1908).
Gunkel — Zum religionsgeschichtlichen Verstandnis des Neuen Testaments (1903).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY 37
Heffern — Apology and Polemic in the New Testament (1922).
Immer — Hermeneutics of the New Testament. Third edition (1890).
Lockhart — Principles of Interpretation (1900).
Machlachlan — The New Testament in the Light of Modern Knowledge.
Milligan — The Expository Value of the Revised Ver¬ sion (1916).
Moulton, J. H. — From Egyptian Rubbish Heaps (1916).
Moulton, R. G. — Literary Interpretation of the Bible (1899).
Nash — History of the Higher Criticism of the New Testament (1903).
Peake — The Bible in the Twentieth Century (1910).
Sanday — The Oracles of God. Third edition (1891).
Selwyn — The Oracles of the New Testament (1911).
Scott, E. F. — The Apologetic of the New Testament (1907).
Scott, E. F. — New Testament Study (1922).
Selleck — The New Appreciation of the Bible (1907).
Smith, H. P. — Biblical Interpretation (1922).
Stoddard — The New Testament in Life and Literature (1914).
Strong — Popular Lectures on the Books of the New Testament (1914).
Terry — Biblical Hermeneutics. Third edition (1890).
Torrey — How to Study the Bible (1905).
Turner — New Testament Study (1921).
Schweitzer — The Quest of the Historical Jesus (1910).
Willett and Campbell — The Teachings of the Books (1899).
EXTRA-CANONICAL EARLY CHRISTIAN LITERATURE
Abbott — Light on the Gospel from an Ancient Poet (1912).
38 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Bardenhewer — Patrologie. Third edition (1910).
Bartlet and Other Writers — The New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers (1905).
Cruttwell — A Literary History of Early Christianity. Two volumes (1893).
Donahoo— Apocryphal and Legendary Life of Christ (1903).
Funk — Patres Apostolici. Second edition (1901).
Gebhardt, Harnack and Zahn — Patrum Apostoli- corum Opera. Fifth Edition (1906).
Giles — Codex Apocryphus Novi Testamenti. Two vol¬ umes (1852).
Goodspeed — Index Patristicus (1907).
Grenfell and Hunt — Logia of Jesus (1897).
Grenfell and Hunt — New Sayings of Jesus (1904).
Griffenhoofe — The Unwritten Sayings of Christ (1903).
Handmann — Das Hebraer Evangelium (1888).
Harnack — Geschichte der altchristlichen Literatur bis Eusebius. Two volumes (1893-1904) .
Harnack und Fleming — Ein jiidisch-christliches Psalm- enbuch aus dem ersten Jahnhundert (1910).
Harris — The Newly-Recovered Gospel of St. Peter (1893).
Harris — The Odes and Psalms of Solomon (1909).
Hase — New Testament Parallels in Buddhistic Literature (1907).
Hennecke — Handbuch zu den Neutestamentlichen Apokryphen (1904).
Hill— The Earliest Life of Christ Ever Compiled from the Four Gospels, Being the Diatessaron of Tatian (1894).
Hone— Apocryphal New Testament (1820).
Horder — Newly Found Words of Jesus (1905).
Klein — Die alteste Christliche Kateschismus und die jiidische Propaganda-Literatur (1909).
Knopf — Das nachapostolische Zeitalter (1905).
GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY 39
Kruger — History of Early Christian Literature in the First Three Centuries (1897).
Lightfoot — The Apostolic Fathers. Three volumes (1885-90).
Lock and Sanday — Two Lectures on the Sayings of Jesus (1897).
Nicholson — The Gospel According to the Hebrews.
Orr — The New Testament Apocryphal Writings (1904).
Pick — The Extra-Canonical Life of Christ (1903).
Pick — Paralipomena : Remains of Gospels and Sayings of Christ (1908).
Pick — Apocryphal Acts of Paul, Peter, John, Andrew and Thomas (1909).
Porter — Messages of the Apocalyptical Writers.
Preuschen — Antilegomena : Die Reste der ausserkanon- ischer Evangelien und urchristlichen Ueberliefer- ungen. 2 Aufl. (1905).
Resch — Aussercanonische Paralleltexte zu den Evange¬ lien (1893).
Resch — Agrapha. 2 Aufl. (1906).
Ropes — Die Spriiche Jesu die in den kanonischen Evan¬ gelien nicht iiberliefert sind (1896).
Schaff, P. — The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles. Third edition (1890).
Schlecht — Doctrina XII Apostolorum (1901).
Swete — The Apocryphal Gospel of St. Peter (1893).
Swete — Patristic Study (1902).
Taylor, C. — The Oxyrhynchus Logia and the Apocryphal Gospels (1899).
Taylor, C. — The Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Tesus Found in 1903 (1905).
Walker — English Translation of the Apocrypha of the New Testament (Volume VIII Ante Nicene Fathers).
White, Evelyn — The Sayings of Jesus from Oxyrhyn¬ chus (1922).
Zahn — Tatian’s Diatessaron (1881).
PART I: THE INTERBIBLICAL
HISTORY
(400 B. C. to B, C. 6 or 5)
PART I: THE INTERBIBLICAL
HISTORY
(400 B. C. to B. C. 6 or 5.)
The text-books used in connection with this part of the Syllabus are Josephus, the Apocrypha of the Old Testa¬ ment, and the Pseudepigrapha. The picture is drawn from the original sources. Free use of the best books on the period is advised, and such books are pointed out at the proper place. Copious lectures are given with each lesson, showing the inner development of the history. A knowledge of ancient history is assumed in this study of the interbiblical history of the Jews. One is supposed to have some acquaintance with the outstanding features in the history of Egypt, Assyria, Babylonia, Greece and Rome as well as of the Old Testament. A selected bibli¬ ography is given.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
THE OLD TESTAMENT APOCRYPHA AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA
Andre — Les Apocryphes de Tancien Testament (1903).
Andrews — Apocryphal Books of the Old and New Testa¬ ments (1908).
Bagster and Sons— The Apocrypha. Including III and IV Maccabees.
Ball — Ecclestiastical or Deutero-canonical Books of the Old Testament (1892).
Bensley and James — Fourth Esdras (1895).
Berrymann — Judische Apocalyptik im neutestament- lichen Zeitalter (1908).
43
44 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Bissell — The Apocrypha of the Old Testament (Lange Comm.) (1890).
Bonwetsch— Das slavishe Henochbuch (1896).
Bousset — Die jiidische Apocalyptik (1903).
Bousset — Die Religion des Judentums im neutestament- lichen Zeitalter (1903).
Box — The Ezra-Apocalypse (1912).
Burkitt — Jewish and Christian Apocalypses (1914).
Butt weiser— Outline of the Neo-Hebraic Apocalyptic Literature (1901).
Charles — Eschatology (1899).
Charles — The Book of Enoch. Second edition (1912).
Charles — The Apocalypse of Baruch (1896).
Charles — The Assumption of Moses (1897).
Charles — The Ascension of Isaiah (1900).
Charles — The Book of Jubilees (1902).
Charles — The Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs (1908).
Charles — Apocrypha and Pseudepigrapha of the Old Testament. Two volumes (1913).
Charles — Religious Development Between the Old and the New Testaments (1914).
Charles — A Critical History of the Doctrine of the Future Life in Israel, in Judaism and in Christianity.
Chowlson — Beitrage zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des Judenthums (1910).
Churton — The Uncanonical and Apocryphal Books.
Churton and Others — The Apocryphal Books. With brief commentary (1880).
Cook — The Fathers of Jesus (1886).
Conrad — Die religiosen und sittlichen Anschauungen der alttestamentlichen Apokryphen und Pseudepigraphen (1907).
Daubney — The Use of the Apocrypha in the Christian Church (1900).
Daubney — The Three Additions to Daniel (1906).
Danziger — Jewish Forerunners of Jesus (1904).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
45
Deane — The Book of Wisdom (1881).
Deane — Pseudepigrapha (1891).
Duff — I and II Esdras.
Fairweather and Black — The First Book of Macca¬ bees (1897).
Fairweather — I and II Maccabees.
Fritzsche und Grimm — Kurzgefasstes exegetisches Handbuch zu den Apokryphen des A. T. Three volumes (1851-9).
Geffcken — Die Oracula sibyllina (1902).
Geffcken — Komposition und Entstehungszeit der Orac¬ ula sibyllina (1902).
Goodrick — The Book of Wisdom (1913).
Gregg — The Wisdom of Solomon.
Gressmann — Israelitische judische Eschatologie (1905).
Harris — Odes and Psalms of Solomon (1910).
Hart — Ecclesiasticus in Greek (1909).
Harwell — The Principal Versions of Baruch (1915).
Hollmann — The Jewish Religion in the Time of Jesus (1909).
Holscher — Kanonisch und Apokryph (1905).
Holtzmann — Die judische Schriftgelehrsamkeit zur Zeit Jesu (1901).
Hughes — Ethics of Jewish Apocryphal Literature (1910).
Issaverdens — The Uncanonical Writings of the Old Testament.
Kabisch — Das Vierte Buch Ezra (1889).
Kautzsch — Die Apokryphen und Pseudepigraphen des A. T. Two volumes (1900).
Keil — Kommentar fiber die Bucher der Makkabaer (1875).
Martin — Le Livre d’Henoch (1907).
Montefiore — The Wisdom of Solomon (1887).
Montefiore — Aspects of Judaism (1895).
Moore — Judaism at the Beginning of the Christian Era
(1916).
46 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Morfill and Charles — The Book of the Secrets of Enoch (1896).
Nelson’s Sons — Old Testament Apocrypha. Revised English Version (1895).
Oesterley — Ecclesiasticus (1912).
Oesterley — The Religion and Worship of the Synagogue (1907).
Oesterley — The Books of the Apocrypha (1914).
Oesterley — Doctrinal Teaching of the Apocrypha (1914).
Oxford University Press — The Apocrypha. Revised (1896).
Philippi — Das Buch Henoch (1868).
Ryle and James — Psalms of the Pharisees (1891).
Sayce — Tobit and the Babylonian Apocryphal Writings.
Schechter — Studies in Judaism (1908).
Schmidt — Ecclesiasticus.
Schodde — Book of Jubilees.
Sedgwick — The Story of the Apocrypha.
Smend — Die Weisheit des Jesus Sirach. Two volumes (1906).
Snell — The Value of the Apocrypha.
Stevenson — Wisdom and the Jewish Apocryphal Writ¬ ings (1903).
Swete — Greek Text of the Apocrypha. Old Testament in Greek. Three volumes (1895-1907).
Swete — An Introduction to the Old Testament in Greek. Revised edition by Ottley (1914).
Terry — The Sibylline Oracles (1899).
Thackeray — The Septuagint and Jewish Worship (1921).
Thomson — -Books which Influenced Our Lord.
Vaganay — Le Probleme eschat. dans le IV Livre d’Esdras (1907).
Violet — Die Ezra-Apokalypse. Teil I (1910).
Viteau and Martin— Les Psaumes de Salomon (1910).
Voltz — Judische Eschatologie.
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
47
Volkmar — Einleitung in die Apokryphen.
Wace — Apocrypha. With Commentary. Two volumes (1888).
Wahl — Clavis librorum veteris testamenti apocryphorum philologica (1853).
Westcott — Introduction to the Four Gospels (1875). Winter und Wunsche — Die judische Literatur seit Abschluss des Canon.
Zockler — Apokryphen.
Singer — The Tewish Encyclopaedia. Twelve volumes (1901-6).
PHILO
Aall — Der Logos (1899).
Bentwich — Philo-Judaeus of Alexandria (1910).
Brehier — Les idees philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie (1908).
Bucher — Philonische studien.
Cohn — Einteilung und Chronologie der Schriften Philos.
Cohn and Wendland — Philonis Alexandrini Opera quae supersunt. Greek text (1896).
Conybeare — Philo about the Contemplative Life (1895).
Delaunay — Philo d’Alexandrie. Second edition (1870).
Drummond — Philo Judaeus: or, The Jewish-Alexandrian Philosophy in Its Development and Completion. Two volumes (1888).
Frankel — Ueber den Einfluss der palastinenischen Exe- gese auf die Alexandrinische Hermeneutik.
Gfrorer — Philo und die Alexandrinische Theosophie (1831).
Guthrie — The Message of Philo-Tudaeus of Alexandria (1909).
Guyot — Les reminiscences de Philon ches Plotin (1906).
Herriot — Philon le Juif (1898).
James — Biblical Antiquities of Philo (1917).
Kennedy — Philo’s Contribution to Religion (1919).
48 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Kruger — Philo und Josephus als Apologeten des Juden- tums (1906).
Nairne — The Alexandrine Gospel (1917).
Paris (Mangey) — Edition of Philo’s Works in the Greek Text (1852).
Reville— Le Logos d’apres Philon (1877).
Ritter — Philo und die Halacha (1879).
Ryle — Philo and Holy Scripture.
Siegfried- — Philo von Alexandria (1875).
Tauchnitz — Edition of the Greek Text.
Windisch — Die Frommigheit Philos und ihre Bedeutung f fir das Christentum (1909).
Yonge — Philo Judaeus. Complete works. Four volumes in Bohn Library 1854-5. One volume Macmillan, same date.
See also various works on Greek philosophy and the
articles on Philo in dictionaries, cyclopaedias and quar¬ terlies, in particular Singer, The Jewish Encyclopaedia.
JOSEPHUS
Bentwich — Josephus (1914).
Berendts — Die Zeugnisse von Christentum im Slavischen de Bello Judaico des Josephus (1906).
Bloch — Die Quellen des Flavius Josephus (1879).
Boettger — Topographisch-historisches Lexicon zu den Schriften des Flavius Josephus (1879).
Destinon — Die Chronologie des Josephus (1880).
Destinon — Die Quellen des Josephus (1882).
Duschak — Josephus und die Tradition (1864).
Holscher — Die Quellen des Josephus (1904).
Krenkel — Josephus und Lukas (1894).
Kruger — Philo und Josephus als Apologeten des Juden- tums (1906).
Laqueur — Der judische Historiker Flavius Josephus (1920).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 49
Margoliouth — Whiston’s Translation of Josephus. Edited with notes (1906).
Muller — Des Flavius Josephus Schrift gegen den Apion (1877).
Niese — Flavii Josephi Opera cum apparatu critico. Greek text. Seven volumes (1887-95).
Niese — Flavii Josephi Opera. Editio Minor. Six vol¬ umes.
Nussbaum — Observationen in Flavius Josephus (1875).
Olitzki — Flavius Josephus und die Halacha (1885).
Schlatter — Die hebraischen Namen bei Josephus (1913).
Schmidt, W. — De Flavii Josephi elocutione (1894).
Shilleto — Whiston’s Translation Revised. Five vol¬ umes (1889-90).
Traill — J osephus.
Whiston — Standard Translation.
THE TALMUD
Abrahams — Studies in Pharisaism (1917).
Abelson — Jewish Mysticism (1912).
Abelson — The Immanence of God in Rabbinic Litera¬ ture (1912).
Baeck — Das Wesen des Judenthums (1905). 2 Aufl.
(1922).
Barclay — The Talmud (1878).
Bennett — The Mishna as Illustrating the Gospel (1912).
Bergmann — Jiidische Apologetik im neutestamentlichen Zeitalter (1908).
Bernfeld — Das Talmud : seine Bedeutung und seine Geschichte.
Bishoff — Jesus und die Rabbinen (1905).
Bohl — Forschungen nach einer Volksbibel zur Zeit Jesu.
Bousset — Die Religion des Judentums in neutestament¬ lichen Zeitalter (1903).
50 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Bousset — Jesu Predigt in ihren Gegensatz zum Juden- tum (1892).
Braunschweiger-— Die Lehrer der Mischnah (1890). Brody — Anthologia Hebraica (1922).
Buchler — Das galilaische ’Am-ha-’Aretz (1906). Buxtorf — Lexicon Chaldaicum Talmudicum et Rabbini- cum (1640).
Cook — The Fathers of Jesus (1886).
Danziger — Jewish Forerunners of Jesus (1904). Delitzsch — Hillel and Jesus (1867).
Delitzsch — Talmudische Studien.
Duschak — Die Moral der Evangelien und des Talmud (1877).
Friebig — Talmud und Theologie (1903).
Friedlander — Rabbinic Philosophy and Ethics (1912). Friedlander — Die religiosen Bewegungen innerhalb des Judentums im Zeitalter Jesu (1905).
Geiger — Das Judenthum und seine Geschichte. Goldschmidt — Der Babylonische Talmud (1897). Halper — Post-Biblical Hebrew Literature (1921). Hamburger — Real-Encyclopadie fur Bibel und Talmud (1883).
Herford — Christianity in Talmud and Midrash (1903). Herford — Pharisaism (1912).
Hershon — -The Treasures of the Talmud.
Kohler — Grundriss einer systematischen Theologie des Judentums auf geschichtliche Grundlage (1910). Laible — Jesus Christus im Talmud (1900).
Lightfoot, J. — Horse Hebraicse et Talmudicse in 4 Evan- gelia (1663-1678).
Mielzinier — Introduction to the Talmud. Second edi¬ tion (1903).
Montefiore — Aspects of Judaism (1895).
Montefiore — The Religious Teaching of Jesus (1910). Montefiore — Judaism and St. Paul (1915).
Nicolas — Les doctrines religieuses des Juifs pendant les deux siecles anterieures a l’ere chretienne (1860).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
51
Oesterley — Religion and Worship of the Synagogue (1907).
Peters — Wit and Wisdom of the Talmud (1900).
Pick — What is the Talmud? (1887).
Pick — Jesus and the Talmud (1913).
Pick — The Cabala: Its Influence on Christianity and Judaism (1913).
Rabbinowicz — Kritische Uebersicht der Gesammt und Einzelausgabe des Babylonischen Talmuds seit 1484. Twenty-six volumes (1880-6).
Ragsport — Tales and Maxims from the Talmud (1910).
Raphall — The Mishna.
Reizenstein, Jenmi — Rabbinic Wisdom (1921).
Robertson, A. T. — The Pharisees and Jesus (1920).
Robinson — The Evangelists and the Mishna (1859).
Rodkinson — English Translation of the Babylonian Tal¬ mud (1898).
Schechter — Studies in Judaism (1908).
Schechter — Some Aspects of Rabbinic Theology (1909).
Schottgen — Horae Hebraicae et Talmudicae (1733).
Schwab — Le Talmud de Jerusalem (1871).
Stapfer — Les idees religieuses en Palestine a l’epoque de Jesus Christ (1878).
Strack — Einleitung in den Talmud. 4 Aufl. (1908).
Strack — Jesus, die Haretiker und die Christen nach den altesten Aufgaben (1910).
Strack und Billerbeck — Kommentar zum Neuen Testament aus Talmud und Midrasch (1922).
Surenhusius — Mishnah.
Taylor, C. — Sayings of the Jewish Fathers (1897). Ap¬ pendix (1900).
Thein — Der Talmud.
Tauchuma — Midrash.
Weber — Die Lehre des Talmud (1880).
Weber — Judische Theologie auf Grund des Talmud und
52 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
verwandter Schriften gemeinfasslich dargestellt. 2 Aufl. (1897).
Wetstein— Novum Testamentum Graecum.
Wunsche— Der Jerusalemische Talmud.
Wunsche — Bibliotheca Rabbinica.
See in particular: Singer— The Jewish Encyclopaedia.
THE TARGUMS
For the various Targums (Jerusalem, Jonathan, Joseph, Onkelos) see
Berliner — Targum Onkelos.
Duschak — -Der Moral der Evangelien und des Talmud. Frankel — Targum der Propheten.
Singer — Onkelos und seine Verhaltnis zur Halacha. Singer — The Jewish Encyclopaedia.
HANDBOOKS ON THE INTERBIBLICAL PERIOD
Bevan — Jerusalem Under the High Priests (1904). Cheyne — -Religious Life After the Exile.
Conder — The Hebrew Tragedy (1900).
Fairweather — From the Exile to the Advent (1895). Fairweather — The Background of the Gospels (1909). Garner — -Connection of Sacred History (1880).
Grant — Between the Testaments (1908).
Gregg — Between the Testaments (1908).
Hunter — After the Exile. Two volumes (1890). Huntington — Palestine and Its Transformation (1911). Kent — Makers and Teachers of Judaism (1911).
Kruger — Hellenismus und Judentum im neutestament- lichen Zeitalter (1908).
Latimer— -Judea from Cyrus to Titus (1899). Maclear— Class Book of New Testament History (1890).
Madden— Coins of the Jews (1881).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
53
Mathews — A History of New Testament Times in Palestine. Second edition (1910).
Morrison — The Jews Under Roman Rule. Fourth edi¬ tion (1899).
Ottley — A Short History of the Hebrews to the Roman Period (1901).
Paulus — Les Juifs avant le Messie (1905).
Prideaux — Connection Between the Old and the New Testaments. Two volumes (1858).
Rae — Connection Between the Old and the New Testa¬ ments (1904).
Raphall — Post-Biblical History of the Hebrews (1886). Redford — Four Centuries of Silence (1885).
Riggs — History of the Jewish People in the Maccabean and the Roman Periods (1900).
Schlatter — Israels Geschichte von Alexander dem Grosse bis Hadrian (1901).
Schurer — The Jewish People in the Time of Christ. Five volumes (1891).
Skinner — Historical Connection Between the Old and the New Testaments.
Smith, George Adam — Jerusalem from the Earliest Times to A. D. 70. Two volumes (1908).
Toy — Judaism and Christianity (1890).
Waddy-Moss — From Malachi to Matthew (1899).
Wise — History of the Hebrew Second Commonwealth (1880).
LESSON I: IN THE PERSIAN PERIOD (B. C. 400-B. C. 331.)
1. Periods of the Interbiblical History:
(a) Persian Period, B. C. 536 to B. C. 331 ; beginning
of Interbiblical History uncertain, about B. C. 400.
(b) Greek Period, B. C. 331 to B. C. 167.
54 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
(c) Maccabean Period, B. C. 167 to B. C. 63.
(d) Roman Period, B. C. 63 to B. C. 5, when Jesus
was born. The Roman rule continued till A. D. 70, when the nation of the Jews perished with the destruction of Jerusalem.
For a full treatment of the sources of our knowledge of the Interbiblical History and the literature thereon see Schurer — History of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus, Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 1-166.
2. The Jews still under Persian Rule, down to B. C. 331.
Read Josephus’ Antiquities, Book XI., chapter vii. General contents of each of the four works of Jose¬ phus (War, Antiquities, Life, Against Apion). Note especially sketch of his own life. Name the books in the Apocrypha. Read the Book of Tobit (Apocrypha) .
See further on Tobit, Schurer — History of the Jew¬ ish People, Div. II., Vol. III., pp. 37-44.
LIST OF PERSIAN RULERS
Cyrus, B. C. 536-529.
Cambyses, B. C. 529-522.
Darius Hystaspis, B. C. 522-486.
Xerxes, B. C. 486-465.
Artaxerxes, B. C. 465-425.
Xerxes II., B. C., 425.
Darius Nothus, B. C. 425-405.
Artaxerxes Mnemon, B. C. 405-359.
Ochus, B. C. 359-338.
Arses, B. C. 338-336.
Darius, B. C. 336-331.
LIST OF HIGH PRIESTS DURING PERSIAN PERIOD OF THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
Eliashib (time of Nehemiah, B. C. 445). Exact years not known. A Sanballat in time of Nehemiah.
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
55
Joiada. Exact years not known.
Jonathan, B. C. 405-359.
Jaddua, B. C. 359-331. Latest name in Old Testament (Neh. 12: Ilf.). Close of Old Testament canon and history. A Sanballat in Josephus in time of Jaddua.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON PERSIAN PERIOD
Benjamin — Persia (Story of Nations Series, 1888). Budge — Babylonian Life and History (1888).
Cox — The Greeks and the Persians (1876).
Kent — The Babylonian, Persian and Greek Periods (1899).
Ragozin — Media (Story of the Nations Series, 1887). Ragozin — Chaldsea (Story of the Nations Series, 1886). Stave — Ueber den Einfluss des Parsismus auf den Judenthum.
Cf. also Goodspeed — History of Ancient World; Meyer — Ancient History; Rawlinson — Ancient Mon¬ archies; Sayce — Ancient Empires.
LESSON II : IN THE GREEK PERIOD (B. C. 331-167)
Alexander and the Ptolemies (B. C. 331-198)
1. Three divisions:
(a) The reign of Alexander over the Jews B. C. 331-323. Alexander was recognized B. C. 336 as king by the Congress at Corinth. Reigned in all twelve years and eight months.
(b) Under the Ptolemies, B. C. 320-198. Interval of
three years after the death of Alexander before Ptolemy Soter conquered Jerusalem.
(c) Under the Seleucid Kings, B. C. 198-167. Seleu-
56 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
cid line from Seleucus Nicator. Seleucid Era began in Syria, B. C. 312.
2. The Jews under Alexander:
Josephus, Antiquities, Book XI., ch. viii. Cf. Dan. 8 and 1 1 : 2-4.
3. The Jews under the Ptolemies:
Origin of the Septuagint — Josephus, Antiquities, Book XII., ch. i., 1-iii, 2 (skipping sections 8-10 in ch. ii.) For further study consult Wheeler’s Alexander the Great and some Bible dictionary on the subject of the Septuagint and Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. III., pp. 159-195.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON ALEXANDER THE GREAT
Arrian — Anabasis of Alexander.
Church — A Young Macedonian in the Service of Alex¬ ander.
Curteis — Rise of the Macedonian Empire (1879). Curtius — Life of Alexander.
Droysen — Geschichte Alexanders des Grosses (1880). Droysen— Geschichte des Hellenismus. Second edition (1870).
Hogarth — -Philip and Alexander (1897).
Mahaffy-— The Story of Alexander’s Empire (1899). Mahaffy- — Progress of Hellenism in Alexander’s Em¬ pire (1905).
Mahaffy — Greek Life and Thought from Alexander to the Roman Conquest (1887).
Muller — Scriptores rerum Alexandri Magni (1877). Plutarch — Sketch of Alexander in his “Lives.” Schreiber— Studien uber das Bildness des Grossen Alex¬ anders.
Wallis-Bridge — Life and Exploits of Alexander (1896).
Wendland — Die hellenistisch-Romische Kultur. 3 Aufl. (1912).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
57
Wheeler — Alexander the Great (1900).
Williams — Life of Alexander the Great.
See also Botsford— -History of Greece ; Bury — History of Greece ; Gulick — Life of the Ancient Greeks ; Grote, Myers, etc.
BOOKS ON THE PTOLEMAIC ERA
Bouche-Leclerq— Histoire des Lagides. Four volumes (1903-7).
Hultsch — Die ptolemaischen Miinz-und Rechnungs- wiiste.
Mahaffy — The Empire of the Ptolemies (1895). Mahaffy — History of Egypt Under Ptolemaic Dynasty (1899).
Meyer — Das Heerwesen der Ptolemaer und Romer in Aegypten (1900).
Milne— History of Egypt Under Roman Rule (1890). Steiner — Der Fiskus der Ptolemaer (1913).
Strack — Die Dynastie der Ptolemaer (1897).
See the various histories of Egypt : Breasted — History of the Ancient Egyptians ; Petrie — History of Egypt, etc.
BOOKS ON THE SEPTUAGINT
Text
Swete — The Old Testament in Greek. Three volumes. Second edition (1899).
The fuller Cambridge edition of the Greek text is now appearing.
Concordance and Grammar Hatch and Redpath (1896).
Helbing — Grammatik der Septuaginta. Laut-und Wort- lehre (1907).
58 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Thackeray — A Grammar of the Old Testament in Greek. Vol. I. (1909).
Special Books
Churton — The Influence of the Septuagint upon the Progress of Christianity (1861).
Deissmann— Bible Studies (1901).
Hatch — Essays in Biblical Greek (1892).
Kennedy — Sources of New Testament Greek (1895). Ottley — Handbook to the Septuagint (1920).
Swete — Introduction to the Old Testament in Greek. Second edition (1914).
LIST OF PTOLEMAIC KINGS (EGYPTIAN CAPITAL AT
ALEXANDRIA)
Ptolemy Soter, B. C. 323-285.
Ptolemy Philadelphus, 285-247 (translation of the LXX begun).
Ptolemy Euergetes I., B. C. 247-222.
Ptolemy Philopator, B. C. 222-205.
Ptolemy Epiphanes, B. C. 205-181.
Ptolemy Philometor, B. C. 181-146.
Ptolemy Euergetes II., B. C. 170-116 (jointly with Physcon, or Ptolemy Philometor, till B. C. 146). Ptolemy Lathyrus, B. C. 116-107.
Ptolemies Alexander and Cleopatra, B. C. 107-80. Ptolemy Auletes, B. C. 80-51 (exiled for three years). Ptolemies Dionysius and Cleopatra, B. C. 51-30. (Death of Antony and Cleopatra. Under Roman domination.)
LESSON III: IN THE GREEK PERIOD (Cont.) :
SELEUCID RULE
1. The Jews under the Greek (Seleucid) Kings of An¬ tioch (B. C. 198-167) :
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
59
Jos., Ant., Book XII., ch. iii., 3 — ch. iv., 5, 10 and 11. Important dates here : Antiochus the Great was beaten by Ptolemy Philopator at Raphia (near Gaza) in B. C. 217. Antiochus takes Jerusalem B. C. 203. Scopas, general of Ptolemy Epiphanes, got back Judea in B. C. 199, but Antiochus the Great defeated Scopas at Panium in B. C. 198, and recovered Jerusalem and Judea, for some time a football between Egypt and Syria. One hundred and twenty-two years of Ptolemaic rule are now over. The Romans conquered Antiochus the Great in B. C. 190, near Magnesia (close to Ephesus). Downfall of Hannibal came also. Antiochus lost all of Asia Minor west of the Taurus Mountains. The Romans thus gained a foothold in Asia. III. Macca¬ bees, of uncertain date, either first century A. D. or B. C., is a rhetorical account of a visit of Ptolemy Philopator to Jerusalem and of his persecution of the Jews of Alexandria. The book has no histo¬ rical value, but is worth looking at as a story simply.
2. Wisdom of the Son of Sirach (Ecclesiasticus).
Read, besides Prologue, especially chapters 1, 2, 24-26,
38 and 39, 44-51. Observe teachings as to women, physicians, scribes, immortality, Messiah ( ?). Your estimate of the book. Sayings that strike you.
3. Date of the Original and of the Translation.
(a) Original work was after Simon the High Priest, the Son of Onias (ch. 50: 1). Two men of this title, both sons of an Onias (Simon I. and Simon II.). One of them died B. C. 287 and the other 198. The newly-discovered Hebrew text is fairly good Biblical Hebrew, reenforc¬ ing argument for early date, if a genuine orig¬ inal text. An enormous Ecclesiasticus litera¬ ture has appeared since the discovery of this Hebrew text. See list in Presbyterian and Re-
60 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
formed Review for July, 1900, in article by Robert Dick Wilson. It was written after one of these dates (287 or 198), and most likely the first one. How long after the first it was writ¬ ten is not known.
(b) Original work was before the Maccabean strug¬
gle, B. C. 167. It does not mention the Macca¬ bees in the list of worthies (chs. 44-50), and stops with Simon; so between 287 and 167 B. C.
(c) Translator into Greek says in the Prologue that
he came to Egypt in the thirty-eighth year of Ptolemy Euergetes. Here again we are in doubt, for two Ptolemies had this name. But only the second (170-116) reigned that long, in conjunction with Philometor. However, it is possible that the translator means to say in his own thirty-eighth year under (epi) Euer¬ getes. Either is possible. Still the second Ptolemy has the best of the argument. Cf. 1 Macc. 13:42; 14:27, for similar use of epi. If so, then he made this trip 132 B. C. He stayed there some time and translated the book about B. C. 130. But it was originally written in Hebrew by his grandfather, Jesus. Possibly the original work was written between B. C. 250 and 170. But, whether written during the Ptolemaic or the Seleucid period, it is a picture of Jewish life and doctrine in Palestine.
See further Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. III., pp. 23-32.
FURTHER BOOKS ON ECCLESIASTICUS
Cowley and Neubauer — -The Original Hebrew of a Portion of Ecclesiasticus.
Genung — The Hebrew Literature of Wisdom (1906).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
61
Hart — Ecclesiasticus in Greek (1909).
Kent — The Wise Men of Israel and their Proverbs. Oesterley — The Wisdom of Jesus the Son of Sirach or Ecclesiasticus (1912).
Root — The Profit of the Many.
Sanders — Messages of the Sages (1915).
Schecter and Taylor — The Wisdom of Ben-Sira.
LIST OF THE SELEUCID KINGS (SYRIAN CAPITAL AT
ANTIOCH)
Seleucus Nicator, 312-280.
Antiochus Soter, 280-261.
Antiochus Theos, 261-246.
Seleucus Callinicus, 246-226.
Seleucus Ceraunus, 226-223.
* Antiochus the Great, 223-187. Cf. Hannibal and the Scipios.
Seleucus Philopator, 187-175.
Antiochus Epiphanes, 175-164.
Antiochus Eupator, 164-162.
Demetrius Soter, 162-150.
Alexander Balas, 150-145.
Demetrius Nicator, 145-138, first reign.
Antiochus Sidetes VI., 138-128, Tryphon as guard¬ ian.
Demetrius Nicator, 128-125, second reign.
Seleucus V. succeeded to the throne, but was murdered directly.
Antiochus Grypus, 125-113.
Antiochus Cyzicenus, 113-95.
During 111-96 Antiochus Grypus wrested part of Syria away from Cyzicenus.
Antiochus Eusebes, 95-83, throne not secure.
Tigranes, 83-69.
* Two lines of descent, hence from Antiochus’s sons that are very confusing.
62 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Antiochus Asiaticus, 69-65. Pompey then makes Syria a Roman province.
Cf. Bevan— The House of Seleucus (two volumes, 1902).
Bouche-Leclerq — Histoire des Seleucidse (1913). Gardner — The Seleucid Kings of Syria (1878).
LIST OF JEWISH HIGH PRIESTS DURING THE GREEK PERIOD TILL OFFICE PASSES TO THE MACCABEES
Onias I., B. C. 331-299.
Simon I., the Just, B. C. 299-287. Time of the so- called Great Synagogue.
Eleazar, B. C. 287-266. (Reputed translation of the LXX. begun.)
Manasseh, B. C. 266-240.
Onias II., B. C. 240-227.
Simon II., B. C. 226-198.
Onias III., B. C. 198-175.
Jason, B. C. 175-172.
Menelaus, B. C. 172-162.
Alcimus, B. C. 162-160.
Vacant for seven years, till 153, when Jonathan Macca- bseus was made High Priest by Alexander Balas.
See further on Jewish priesthood and temple worship, Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. I., pp. 207-305.
LESSON IV: FIRST LESSON IN THE MACCABEAN PERIOD
(Beginning of the Maccabean Revolt, B. C. 167-166)
I. Macc., chs. i., ii. ; II. Macc. chs. iv.-vii. ; Josephus, Ant., Book XII., ch. v., 5. Cf . Dan. viii., 20-26 ; and ch. xi. The first part of the lesson is really in the Seleucid era, but is preparatory to the uprising. Four lessons on
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
63
this Period. Josephus and the two Maccabean books here overlap and supplement each other. Group the events around the following outline. There were undoubtedly four expeditions of Antiochus Epiphanes against Egypt, though it is difficult to divide accurately the accounts in Josephus and I. and II. Macc. But a working hypothesis is presented in the Outline.
1. Antiochus Epiphanes and his efforts to Hellenize the
Jews. Maneuvers of Jason and Menelaus. B. C. 175-172. I. Macc. i., 1-15; II. Macc. iv.
2. Antiochus going against Egypt and defeating the
Egyptians at Pelusium. B. C. 171. I. Macc. i., 16- 18.
3. In B. C. 170 he makes a second expedition against
Egypt. Outcome and why. Effect on Jerusalem. I. Macc. i., 19-28; II. Macc. v., 1-23. II. Macc. con¬ fuses to some extent the events of the second and fourth expeditions.
4. In B. C. 169 Antiochus makes a third expedition
against Egypt. Reason for failure. Cf. Livy xiv., 11 ; Polybius xxix., 10 and 11. The Jews in Alex¬ andria forced Antiochus Epiphanes to retire from Alexandria. They had heard of his conduct at Jeru¬ salem the year before and were ready to help drive him away from Alexandria.
5. In B. C. 168 he makes his fourth expedition against
Egypt. Reason for failure, and his subsequent con¬ duct towards Jerusalem. I. Macc. i., 29-64; II. Macc. v., 24-26; Dan. viii., 20-26, and ix., 27; xi., 21-45 ; cf . Livy xlv., 12.
6. Mission of Athenseus to Jerusalem to carry out the
decree of Antiochus, and the way he was received. Eleazar, the mother and her seven sons. II. Macc. vi. and vii.
7. Behavior of the Samaritans in this crisis. Jos., Ant.,
Book XII., ch. v., 5.
HOUSE OF HASMONEANS (MACCABEES)
64 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
xU
aM
H
' X
X O
to
M-
u it q
_ N
^ CO
W vo
rH
w
|
X o |
• X |
X X |
|
g |
o |
X |
|
to ~ |
-s- |
- X |
|
X |
►H |
a |
|
w |
in |
o 1—1 |
u
w
K
vo
r*H
1
E/1
<
1-H
a
H
-X-
H
H
X
§
u
M
Y“H
VO
in • •<"d Q _ ^ w
^ 3 «
aJ
u
o
aJ
o«
Svn'
to
>t
s
w
o
H
Ph
x
w
H
a
o
U
<
Q
am
. H ■*£ ir> H ro
C/2
•U
X . X rq
x
-Wvo O f-1
m
gu <; • -upq-
X
K2
a
o
U
2*ri
_|lO ►3 to P — »i — i
X
-o
C/2
. X o c/2
w
S
o .
O'
o • X'O <
X
w
>4
<J
c/i
P>
»3
a, 5
X'-'
< •
•-»w
N — ✓
oo
x
w
q„4
z^
X
X
w
hJ
<
WU
3 PQ a
" M OV O M- H
M rr4
►H “
<
to .
PO X . ocq
£«
<<rd
X CQ
"g«o
h°
z
<',d
« . 3°
- *o
K^
x'0
a
o
X rj Q
Z W X
- X ON W
►4 .
<-73
gpq
■ x
oo
CM
X w
t4
H
X
(4
X
O
w
a
H . _x«
w
ffiOv
CM
W
X
§
X
t-H
X
X
X, >•
wU
g •
Xn X
m
3u
Sb
_ o
H
w
»=-* • XT3
C
X
X
lo
S«
►4
to
u
J? .
3«
- ^ *o
l-t
P$
<
X W
geo
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
65
8. Behavior of Mattathias and his five sons, and the cleavage between the Asideans and the Apostates. B. C. 167 and 166. I. Macc. ii. ; II. Macc. v., 27. For further discussion see Schurer — History of Jew¬ ish People, Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 169-218; Div. II., Vol. I., pp. 1-56.
BOOKS ON MACCABEAN PERIOD
Bost — L’epoque des Machabees (1862).
Curtiss — The Name Maccabee (1876).
De Saulcy — Histoire des Machabees, ou princes de la dynastie asmoneenne ( 1880) .
Fairweather — The Maccabees (1903).
Henderson — The Age of the Maccabees (1907).
Jost — History of the Jew from the Maccabees to th° Present Day (1848).
Niese — Die beiden Makkabaer-bucher (1901).
Riggs— -The Maccabean and Roman Periods (1900). Rossmann — Die Makkabaische Erhebung (1860). Streane — The Age of the Maccabees (1898).
From this point throughout till the close of the first century A. D., Schurer’s five volumes on the History of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ can be consulted with great profit for the history, ideas and cus¬ toms of the Jews. See also the various books on Jewish history and the handbooks on the Interbiblical Period.
LESSON V: SECOND LESSON ON THE MACCABEAN PERIOD
(Judas Maccabseus B. C. 166-161)
I. Macc. iii., 1 — ix., 22. Same subject treated in II. Macc. viii.-xv., and Jos., Ant., Bk. XII., chs. vii.-xi., to which reference can be made if desired.
66 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
SEVEN CHIEF CAMPAIGNS BY JUDAS
1. Against Apollonius. I. Macc. iii., 10-12, verses 1-9
opening eulogy on Judas. Place of battle not known. B. C. 166.
2. Against Seron. I. Macc. iii., 13-37. Battle of Beth-
horon. B. C. 166.
3. Against the three generals of Lysias, viz., Ptolemy,
Nicanor and Gorgias. I. Macc. iii., 38 — iv., 25. Battle of Emmaus. B. C. 165.
4. Against Lysias himself. I. Macc. iv., 26-61. Battle
of Bethsura. B. C. 164.
5. Against neighboring enemies, viz., Idumeans, Am¬
monites, Galileans, Gileadites (numerous battles, Bosor, Raphon, Carnain, Ephron, etc.), Idumeans again, Philistines, the tower in Jerusalem. I. Macc. v., 1 — vi., 27. B. C. 163. Merely glance at head¬ ings in this section.
6. Against the young King Antiochus. Defeat of Judas
at Bsethzacharias (near Bethsura). I. Macc. vi., 28— vii, 4. B. C. 162.
7. Against Demetrius’ generals, viz., Bacchides, Nicanor
and Bacchides again. Battles of Capharsalama, Adora (Bethhoron), and Eleasa (near Ashdod). Intrigues of Alcimus, the High Priest. Judas’ ap¬ peal to the Romans. His death. B. C. 161. I. Macc. vii., 5— ix., 22.
See further Schurer— History, etc., Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 219-233.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JUDAS MACCABEUS
Conder— Judas Maccabseus and the Jewish War of In¬ dependence (1894).
Church — Judas, the Hammer, A romance.
Curtiss — The Name Maccabee (1877).
Longfellow — Judas Maccabseus.
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 67
Ludlow — Deborah — A Tale of the Times of Judas Mac¬ cabseus (1900).
Weiss — Judas Maccabseus.
LESSON VI: THIRD LESSON ON THE MACCABEAN PERIOD
(Jonathan Maccabseus, Simon Maccabseus, and John Hyrcanus, B. C. 161-106)
1. Jonathan Maccabseus, B. C. 161-143. I. Macc. ix.,
23 — xii., 53.
(a) Jonathan succeeding to the rule and struggle with
Bacchides. I. Macc. ix., 23-57.
(b) Apostate Hellenizers appeal to Bacchides, and the
truce with Jonathan. I. Macc. ix., 58-73.
(c) Overtures to Jonathan by contesting Syrian
Kings, Alexander Balas and Demetrius Soter, and his policy. Made High Priest. I. Macc. x., 1-47.
(d) Jonathan keeping on good terms with Alexander
and then with young Demetrius Nicator, know¬ ing whose side to take, like a politician. Merely note this point in I. Macc. x., 48 — xi., 37 without careful reading.
(e) Jonathan again changing sides from Demetrius
to young Antiochus, useful to both, and why Tryphon seizes Jonathan. Merely note this fact in I. Macc. xi., 38 — xii., 53 without care¬ ful reading.
2. Simon Maccabseus, B. C. 143-135. I. Macc., chs. xiii.-
xvi.
(a) Simon’s effort to rescue Jonathan. I. Macc. xiii.,
1-32.
(b) Simon taking sides with Demetrius, and peace at
last. B. C. 142. Year 1 of Jewish Independ¬ ence. I. Macc. xiii., 33-42.
68 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
(c) Simon at last takes the tower in Jerusalem. I.
Macc. xiii., 43-53.
(d) Demetrius’ eastern campaign and rising of Anti-
ochus VI against him, and Antiochus’ insult to Simon’s offer to help. Only note this fact in I. Macc. xiv., 1 — xvi., 10.
(e) Ignoble death of Simon. I. Macc. xvi., 11-22.
3. John Hyrcanus (John Hyrcanus I.), B. C. 135-106.
Jos., Ant., Book XIII., chs. viii.-x. Chief points :
(a) Ousting Ptolemy from Dagon, near Jericho. Jos.
• • • -f
Vlll., 1.
(b) Hyrcanus besieged in Jerusalem and outcome.
Jos. viii., 2 and 3.
(c) Conduct of Hyrcanus in Jerusalem and towards
the Parthians. Jos. viii., 4.
(d) Hyrcanus attacking Samaritans (destroying their
temple) and Idumeans. Jos. ix., 1 and 2.
(e) Taking advantage of Syrian troubles, and Jews
growing rich. Merely note this fact in Jos. ix., 3 — x., 4.
(f) Hyrcanus deserting the Pharisees for the Sad-
ducees. Jos. x., 5-7.
Cf. Werner- — Johann Hyrkan (1877), and see further Schurer — History, etc., Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 234-290.
LESSON VII: FOURTH LESSON ON THE MACCABEAN PERIOD
(Decline of the Maccabean Dynasty and Beginning of Roman Period, B. C. 106-47)
Jos., Ant., Book XIII., ch. xi., 1— Book XIV., ch. viii., 5.
1. John Hyrcanus’ two sons (Aristobulus and Alexander lannseus) and their wife (Salome Alexandra). B. C. 106-69.
(a) Aristobulus’ brief and revolutionary reign (calls
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 69
himself King), B. C. 106. Jos., Book XIII., ch. xi.
(b) Alexander Jannaeus succeeds to rule and wife of
his brother, and extends rule widely. Dealing with Pharisees and general character. B. C. 105-78. Merely note these facts in Jos., Book
XIII. , chs. xii.-xv.
(c) Reign of Salome Alexandra and her alliance with
the Pharisees, B. C. 78-69. Merely note this fact in Josephus, Book XIII., ch. xvi.
2. Alexander Jannaeus’ two sons, Hyrcanus (John Hyr-
canus II.) and Aristobulus (Aristobulus II.) B. C. 69-63.
.(a) Character of the two sons and their compromise. Jos., Book XIII., ch. xvi., 1-2; Book XIV., ch. i., 1-2.
'(b) Antipater on the scene, and his schemes. Jos., Book XIV., ch. i., 3 — ch. ii., 2.
(c) Pompey steps in and captures Jerusalem and set¬ tles things. Josephus, Book XIV., ch. ii., 3 — ch. iv., 5.
3. Under the Romans. What Gabinius, Crassus and
Caesar did to the Jews, B. C. 63-47. The First Tri¬ umvirate (Pompey, Caesar, Crassus).
(a) Gabinius making a sort of aristocratic rule for
the Jews, and Antipater watching his chances, B. C. 57. Merely note this fact in Jos., Book
XIV. , chs. v. and vi.
(b) Crassus plundering Jerusalem, B. C. 54. Tos.,
Book XIV., ch. vii.
(c) Caesar siding against Hyrcanus, and Antipater,
gaining Caesar’s favor in Egypt, saves the day for Hyrcanus. Antipater given office under Hyrcanus, sort of Prime Minister (Procura¬ tor), who was called Ethnarch as well as High Priest, B. C. 47. Battle of Pharsalia, B. C. 48. Jos., Book XIV., ch. viii.
70 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
See further, Schurer — History, etc., Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 291-382.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE ROMAN PERIOD
Arnold — History of the Later Roman Commonwealth.
New edition (1906).
Botsford — History of Rome.
Bury — -Student’s Roman Empire.
Capes — The Early Empire (1877).
Champagny — Rome et la Judee. 2 vols. (1862). Ferrero — Greatness and Decline of Rome. Five volumes (1907).
Ferrero — Characters and Events of Roman History (1908).
Ferrero — The Women of the Caesars.
Firth — Augustus Caesar (1903).
Fowler — Julius Caesar.
Gardthausen — Augustus und seine Zeit (1904).
Jones — The Story of the Roman Empire (1908).
Long — Decline of the Roman Republic (1874). Mahaffy — The Greek World Under Roman Sway. Merivale — The Fall of the Roman Republic (1853). Merivale — The Roman Triumvirates (1878).
Milne — The History of Egypt Under Roman Rule (1898).
Morrison — The Jews Under Roman Rule (1890). Ottley — Short History of the Hebrews in the Roman Period (1900).
Scott — Portraitures of Julius Caesar (1903).
SCHNECKENBURGER - Augustus ( 1903 ) .
Seech — Kaiser Augustus (1902).
LESSON VIII : IN THE ROMAN PERIOD
Three lessons on Herod ; born B. C. 74 and died B. C. 4. Son of Antipater, the Idumean. First lesson, The Early
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 71
Years of Herod, B. C. 47-37. Jos., Ant., Bk. XIV., chs. ix., xi., — xvi. (skipping x.).
1. Herod as governor of Galilee. Jos. XIV., ix.
2. Antipater helping Caesar, whose death (B. C. 44) puts
Herod on Cassius’ side against the Second Trium¬ virate (Octavius, Antonius, Lepidus). Merely note this fact in Jos. XIV., xi.
3. Herod driving out Antigonus and betrothing Mari-
amne. Jos. XIV., xii., 1.
4. After battle of Philippi (B. C. 42) Antony gets the
East, whereupon Herod gets his favor and takes the rule away from Hyrcanus. Herod Tetrarch and Judea now a Roman Province. B. C. 41. Jos. XIV., xii., 2 and xiii., 1 and 2.
5. Parthians come and establish Antigonus, and Herod’s
flight. Jos. XIV., xiii., 3-10.
6. Herod’s effort to regain his rule and surprising success
in Rome. Even appointed King in B. C. 40. Jos. XIV., xiv.
7. Winning his crown by B. C. 37. Merely note this fact
in Jos. XIV., xv. and xvi. Final downfall of the Hasmonean House.
Look over the Book of Wisdom of Solomon as prepara¬ tion for lectures on Jewish Alexandrian Philosophy.
See further on Herod, Schurer — History, etc., Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 383-399.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON HEROD
Amelie Rives — Herod and Mariamne (Lippincott, Sept., 1888).
Farrar — The Herods (1900).
Ferguson — The Family of the Herods (1902).
Stephen Phillips — Herod (1900).
Vickers — The History of Herod (1885).
72 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
JEWISH LITERATURE OF THE INTERBIBLICAL AND NEW
TESTAMENT TIMES
(Outside of the New Testament)
Two centuries of literary activity, Jerusalem and Alex¬ andria. In two languages, Hebrew (or Aramaic) and Greek. Some has doubtless perished, much that remains is insipid, marking a distinct decline from the great prophetical times closing with Malachi.
See chart for probable or possible dates of these books, a very uncertain matter in most cases.
1. Histories: I., II. and III. Maccabees belong to this
time. I. Macc. is a noble book. II. and III. Macc. are florid and fanciful. Josephus comes at the close of the New Testament times.
2. Romances: Tobit and Judith.
Apocryphal additions to the Old Testament: To Esther in the Septuagint, not in Hebrew. To Daniel there are added in the Septuagint the Prayer of Azarias and the Song of the Three Children, Susannah, Bel and the Dragon. The Septuagint gives the Prayer of Manassas and the Epistle of Jeremias as genuine works, but both are doubtless spurious. I. Esdras, though used by Josephus as a genuine work, cannot be so maintained. It is a reworking of Ezra and II. Chron. before the time of Christ.
3. Philosophical works : Wisdom of the son of Sirach,
Aristobulus, Wisdom of Solomon, IV. Maccabees, Philo.
4. Apocalyptic writings : Book of Enoch (parts of, cer¬
tainly), Book of the Secrets of Enoch, Sybilline Oracles, Apocalypse of Baruch, Assumption of Moses, Ascension of Isaiah, Psalter of Solomon, Book of Jubilees, II. Esdras, Testament of the Twelve Patriarchs (parts of, certainly). These last
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
73
and some of the others are called pseudepigraphic works, written under the name of some worthy of older times.
See previous bibliography for the Old Testament Apocrypha and Pseudepigrapha. In particular, for Palestinian Jewish Literature see Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. III., pp. 1-155, and for Grseco-Jewish Literature pp. 157-320.
LESSON IX: IN THE ROMAN PERIOD
( Continued )
Second lesson, Herod’s Prosperous Reign B. C. 37- 19. Jos., Ant., Book XV.
1. Herod’s dealing with the Sanhedrin. Ch. i.
2. Fate of Antigonus and Hyrcanus. Ch. i., 2 — ii., 4.
3. Herod and his mother-in-law, Alexandra, struggle
against each other for the favor of Cleopatra and Antony. Death of Mariamne’s brother, Aristobulus. Plots and counterplots. Joseph’s charge and jeal¬ ousies and hatred (Salome and Cyprus, Alexandra and Mariamne). Merely sketch ch. ii., 5 — iii., 9.
4. Cleopatra’s influence over Antony and Herod. Merely
note this point in ch. iv.
5. Issue between Antony and Octavius, and battle of
Actium, B. C. 31 ; Herod not allowed to help An¬ tony. Merely note this point in ch. v.
6. Winning Octavius’ favor and losing Mariamne’s love.
Death of Hyrcanus, Mariamne, Alexandra and sons of Baba. Merely sketch chs. vi. and vii.
7. Herod as a builder of cities, and theaters even in Jeru¬
salem. Trophies to Augustus (cf. Antiochus Epiphanes). The Hellenizing influence of Herod. Simply note this point in chs. viii. and ix.
8. Herod educating his sons by Mariamne (Alexander
and Aristobulus) in Rome. Currying favor of
HERODIAN FAMILY (Only through N. T. Times)
Antipas.
74 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
03
&
Pi
Ph
u
a
w
H
<
Cl,
k-H
H
&
<
u
m
rt-
ro
*0
O
<U
.U.2
a . u pmM 3 w 3
C/2 00
*5 S'
C/3
O
jU w . < 03
03 ^
M
03, i
<U « . O 03 « M
“S-
PH-d
w
S
o
- G
c
C/2
oi
u
>
03
15
G
G
4-k
ll
O
a
S
02
O
5
02
>
• H
P
;B
43
CM
u
rj-r5
^ G • £ °2 m3 • I °- $Ji
W ■*-“ Pi <4_,
O o
w h w u
H <u
T3 Q Vh
2 3
W
03
U
nd
<L>
*£3
Ph .
c n
~ <D
in <j
03 <D
13 ^
Ph o
CL> £
U +-»
a;
< 3
- eu g H <y
o
3 co
^ -2
O aJ-5
• rt 42 G
PM u M J
“3H GM
»-H k -4-> .
hj ^ w Ph °’G) •
a
C3
aJ
<L>
H
tj-
co
• S3 W a3 CJ -M
< *s
W rt- H g
a}
<
o
^ Jh QJ
m
S3
o
»!
aco
Sm-,
- < o
M -
< £
bo
G
G
P
<M
>+-i
. O
Ph
J p, ,
2 CP 02 K^O 03 •• CU 03l~2O
r °2i| “ S GP u •£
2 -i-> . 2 G
S SSffig ffip
tfi
G . -§«* h-i
03 •
S m . -M gj '.-Pi t“< ■*-">
Ph O •• 9-
Vh'O^ 03 ■‘G 12 W
G J3 2
G V ^ -
"2'H’GhG rt 3 c ° PO _g P3K
2 1,3
« M-H 3
W °G
WjOhhH^ W
|g ^
es^G
4H D|_]H
an C/2 ^
H w
rt
_r <u
<u £
.'G a « Ga^j
G •“'H pq
5 1+4 T3 ' " w 0
” G ^ G 4_) u o
b
< S
-G
03 G
5^
, £ W.G c/2
u
M
02 P
CM a; <D
T3*9
I s
-W 9'
<
HH
Pi
<
Pi r ;
w U o
-§PH
s>
G . •etJ-O
;
|
. |
1) G |
|
|
u |
> m |
|
|
<g.2 |
# |
|
|
M |
m3 |
in h-( |
|
0 |
42 (jJ G5 |
« O |
|
t*H |
4-> 0 |
P |
|
■5 |
4) |
|
|
hG |
||
|
H |
_5«
CM
‘-M T*‘
G .
<*'<3
«5^
C^*
w • • '
Q 20 ' O PiM W u
w
a
- o
G
<
w
02 G J G pq O - H
03
HH
PP
<
<u
£
cd
<-: o 9° lh
hh : <L>
_ O u ■*£ tj‘>2* 9 ’2-
«^,H
w
.2
o
rt
G
£CJ
-« O
w 0
W bo
G
ffi
CM
r— t
C/5
•*->
O
<
w
a
■ < HH
Pi
<
W'
z>
w
Pi
p
X
M
G
[S ^
PM CM
-»a
<
G “ tn 01 02 <* G Pi
P
CO U ••
hh irj
-£<M
w i2 Mo <
<n
fc1-*
P<
t~t ••
tf
O CM ■< 03
O o
s<
w
w
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 75
Augustus and next to Agrippa. Temple at Panium. Merely sketch ch. x.
9. Herod repairing the temple at Jerusalem. Begun B. C. 19 and finished A. D. 65. Ch. xi. Begun in 18th year of Herod’s reign. Herod began to reign B. C. 37. Jos. correct here and wrong in War I., xxi., 1, when he says it was begun in 15th year of reign. Schurer points out that it was in same year as the visit of the Emperor to Syria, which was B. C. 20 or 19, according to Dion Cassius, liv., 7. Herod has been reigning seventeen years when this visit was made by Caesar. (Jos., Ant., XV., x., 3.) See note in Robertson’s Harmony of the Gospels (p. 265). Look over IV. Maccabees as preparation for lecture on Jewish Alexandrian Philosophy.
See further on Herod, Schurer — History, etc., Div. I.f Vol. I., pp. 392-439.
On IV. Maccabees see further, Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. III., pp. 244-8.
See also Cross — Socrates : The Man and His Message (1918).
Davidson — The Stoic Creed (1907).
Forbes — Socrates (1905).
Hyde — From Epicurus to Christ (1906).
Leonard — Socrates: Master of Life (1916).
Murray — The Stoic Philosophy (1915).
LESSON X: IN THE ROMAN PERIOD
( Continued )
Third lesson, Herod’s Decline and Death. B. C. 19-4. Jos., Ant., Book XVI. and Book XVII., i. — viii. Broadus’ Comm, on Matt., ii., 1.
1. Herod’s law against housebreakers. XVI., i., 1.
2. Troubles with Mariamne’s sons, and Salome and
Antipater. XVI., i., 2 and iii. and iv.
76 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
3. Herod having trouble with the Jews. XVI., v. and
vii., 1.
4. Fresh domestic troubles stirred up by the women
and Antipater and Pheroras. Merely sketch XVI., vii. and viii.
5. Herod Getting into Trouble at Rome. Merely
see this point in XVI., ix. and x.
6. The Trial of Herod’s sons, Alexander and Aris-
tobulus. XVI., xi.
7. Antipater’s ambitious schemes and their outcome.
Merely see this point in XVII., i.-v.
8. Herod now makes Antipas his successor and tries to
regain his health amid many troubles. Death of Antipater. XVII., vi. and vii.
9. Herod alters his will again, and finally dies in B. C.
4. Funeral. XVII., viii.
10. General character of Herod. See Broadus’ Comm, on Matt., ii., 1.
For literature on Philo, see previous list of books. In particular note Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. III., pp. 321-381.
For closing years of Herod, see further Schurer— History, etc., Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 440-467.
Lecture on Philo, concluding the course on Jewish Alexandrian Philosophy.
LESSON XI: THE JEWISH PARTIES
PHARISEES, SADDUCEES, SCRIBES, ESSENES, HERODIANS,
ZEALOTS
1. Pharisees and Sadducees — See Broadus on Matt., iii.,
7.
2. Essenes — Broadus on Matt., p. 46a.
3. Mishna, the two Gemaras, the two Talmuds — Broadus
on Matt., p. 45a, and footnote.
4. Scribes — Broadus on Matt., ii., 4.
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
77
5. Sanhedrin — Broadus on Matt., xxvi., 59.
6. Herodians — Broadus on Matt., p. 451.
7. Zealots — Broadus on Matt., p. 31a and page 217a.
In each case read the portions of Josephus referred to in the Commentary. Lecture on Talmud or Jewish Rab¬ binical Theology.
See further on Pharisees and Sadducees, Robertson, Pharisees and Jesus, ch. i. ; Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. II., pp. 10-43 ; on the Essenes, see Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. II., pp. 188-218; on the Mishna, Gemara, Talmud, Midrash, see Schurer — His¬ tory, etc., Div. I., Vol. I., pp. 117-166; on the scribes, scribism, school and synagogue, life under law, see Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. I., pp. 306-379, Div. II., Vol. II., pp. 44-125 ; on the Sanhedrin, see Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. I., pp. 163-195 ; on the Zealots, see Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. II., pp. 80f.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JEWISH PARTIES
(See previous list on Talmud and Targums, and the histories, periodicals, cyclopaedias and dictionaries.) Abrahams — Studies in Pharisaism and the Gospels (1917).
Baker — Christ and the Pharisees (1919).
Bamberger — Sadducaer (1917).
Bischoff — Jesus und die Rabbinen (1905).
Cohen — Les Phariseens. 2 vols. (1877.)
Davaine — La Sadducaisme (1888).
Delitzsch — Hillel und Jesus (1867).
Elbogen — Die Religionanschauungen der Pharisaer (1904).
Friedlander — Rabbinic Philosophy and Ethics (1912). Geiger — Sadducaer und Pharisaer (1863).
Herford — Pharisaism (1912).
Holscher — Sadduzaismus (1906).
78 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Jost — Geschichte des Judenthums und seine secte. Lauterbach — The Sadducees and Pharisees (1913). Leszynsky — Die Sadduzaer (1912).
Lightley — Les Scribes (1905).
Lucius — Der Essenismus in seiner Verhaltniss zum Judenthum (1881).
Montet — Essai sur les origines des partis sadduceen et phariseen et leur histoire jusq’ a naissance de Jesus- Christ^ (1883).
Narbel — Etude sur le parti phariseen (1890). Oesterley — Religion and Worship of the Synagogue (1907).
Regeffe — La Secte des Essenes.
Robertson, A. T. — The Pharisees and Jesus (1920). Schechter — Die Chassidim (1904).
Schnedermann — Das Judentum und die christliche Verkiindigung in den Evangelien (1884). Wellhausen — Die Pharisaer und Sadducaer (1874). Wicks — Doctrine of God in the Jewish Apocryphal and Apocalyptical Literature (1915).
LESSON XII : THE JEWISH EXPECTATIONS CONCERNING THE MESSIAH
Read as preparatory for this lecture II. Esdras, chs. iii.-xiv. The other chapters and “Jesus” in vii., 28, are doubtless Christian additions. Lecture on the Jewish Picture of the Messiah.
See further on the Messianic Hope, Schurer — His¬ tory, etc., Div. II., Vol. II., pp. 126-187.
For literature on Jewish apocalypses, see previous list.
BOOKS ON THE MESSIANIC HOPE OF THE JEWS AND
ESCHATOLOGY
Adeney — The Hebrew Utopia (1879).
Alexander — The Witness of the Psalms to Christ.
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
79
Andrews — God’s Revelations of Himself to Men (1886).
Anger — Vorlesungen fiber die Geschichte der Messianis- chen Idee (1873).
Baldensperger — Die Messianisch-apokalyptischen Hoff- nungen des Judentums (1903). 3 Aufl.
Bousset — Der Antichrist in der fiberlieferung des Juden¬ tums, des Neuen Testament, und der alten Kirche (1895).
Bousset — Die jiidische Apokalyptik (1903).
Bousset — Kurios Christos (1913).
Box — The Christian Messiah in the Light of Judaism (Journal of Th. Studies for 1912).
Briggs — Messianic Prophecy.
Burkitt — Jewish and Christian Apocalypses (1913).
Buttweiser — Outline of the Neo-Hebraic Apocalyptic Literature (1901).
Case — The Messianic Hope (1917).
Charles — A Critical History of the Doctrine of a Future Life in Israel, in Judaism, and in Christianity (1899).
Charles — Religious Development between the Old and the New Testaments (1914).
Colani — Jesus-Christ et les croyances messianiques de son temps. Second edition (1864).
Cumine — The Messiah (1915).
Delitzsch — Old Testament History of Redemption.
Delitzsch — Messianic Prophecies (1880).
Delitzsch — Messianic Prophecies in Historical Succes¬ sion (1891).
Dewick — Primitive Christian Eschatology (1912).
Drummond — The Jewish Messiah (1877).
Edersheim — Prophecy and History in Relation to the Messiah (1884).
Edersheim — The Witness of Israel to the Messiah.
Emmet — The Eschatological Question in the Gospels (1916).
Flugel — Messiah-Ideal.
80 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Gloag — Messianic Prophecy.
Goodspeed — Israel’s Messianic Hope (1900).
Greenhouse — The Messiah in Jewish History (1906).
Hart — The Hope of Catholic Judaism (1910).
Henstenberg — Christology of the Old Testament.
Higginson — Ecce Messias.
Hilgenfeld — Die jiidische Apokalyptik in ihrer ges- chichtlichen Entwickelung (1857).
Hilgenfeld — The Messiah of the Jews.
Huhn — Die Messianischen Weissagungen des israeli- tisch-jiidischen Volkes (1890).
King — The Messiah in the Psalms (1899).
Klausner — Die Messianischen Vorstellungen des jiidi- schen Volkes im Zeitalter der Tannaiten (1904).
Lagrange — ~Le Messianisme chez les juifs (1908).
Leathes — Witness of the Old Testament to Christ (1868).
Leman — Histoire complete de l’idee messianique chez le peuple dTsrael (1909).
Mackintosh — The Doctrine of the Person of Jesus Christ (1912).
Oesterley — The Evolution of the Messianic Idea (1908).
Orelli — The Old Testament Prophecy of the Consum¬ mation of God’s Kingdom Traced in Its Historical Development (1889).
Porter — Messages of the Apocalyptical Writers.
Riehm — Messianic Prophecy. Second edition (1891).
Sanday — Christologies Ancient and Modern (1910).
Schonefeld — Ueber die Messianische Hoffnung von 200 vor Christo bis gegen 50 nach Christo (1874).
Stanton — The Jewish and the Christian Messiah.
Volz — Tiidische Eschatologie von Daniel bis Akiba (1903).
Windisch — Der Messianische Krieg und das Urchris- tentum (1909).
Woods — The Hope of Israel (1896).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY
81
LESSON XIII: A GLIMPSE OF THE WORLD INTO WHICH JESUS WAS BORN
A Lecture
On the state of culture in general, see Schurer — His¬ tory, etc., Div. II., Vol. I., pp. 1-163, and on Judaism in the Dispersion, see Schurer — History, etc., Div. II., Vol. II., pp. 219-327.
Literature Useful for the Purpose
Besides the various books in many lines already men¬ tioned that interpret the historical conditions of the great era B. C. 5, one may note further:
1. The Greek and Roman writers of the general period
like Appian, Arrian, Caesar, Cicero, Dio Cassius, Epictetus, Horace, Juvenal, Livy, Ovid, Plutarch, Seneca, Strabo, Seutonius, Tacitus. These throw a lurid light on the times.
2. The Papyri, Ostraca, and Inscriptions reflect in vivid
fashion the life of the people. See
Crum — Coptic Ostraca (1902).
Deissmann — Bible Studies (1901).
Deissmann — Light from the Ancient East (1910). Deissmann — St. Paul in the Light of Social and Re¬ ligious History (1912).
Hill and Hicks — A Manual of Greek Historical Inscrip¬ tions (1901).
Kennedy — Sources of New Testament Greek (1895). Milligan — Greek Papyri (1910).
Milligan — Here and There among the Papyri (1922). Moulton, J. H. — From Egyptian Rubbish Heaps (1916). Robertson — A Grammar of the Greek N. T. in the Light of Historical Research. Fourth edition (1923).
See also cyclopaedias and Bible dictionaries.
82 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY 3. Summary Outlines of the Period :
Abbott — -Society and Politics in Ancient Rome (1909). Angus — The Environment of Early Christianity (1915). Anrich — Das antike Mysterienwesen in seinen Einfluss auf das Christentum (1894).
Bauer — Christus und die Caisaren. 2 Aufl. (1879). Beckbr — Gallus.
Benson — Christ and His Times (1889).
Beurlier — Le cult rendu aux empereurs romains (1891). Boissier — La religion romain d’ Auguste aux Antonins.
Two volumes (1874).
Botsford — Hellenic Civilization (1915).
Breed — Preparation of the World for Christ. Second edition (1893).
Carter — The Religious Life of Ancient Rome.
Case — The Evolution of Early Christianity (1914). Church — Pictures of Roman Life and Story (1892). Cumont — Mysteries of Mithra (1903).
Cu mont— Religions orient, dans le paganisme romain (1906).
Davis — The Influence of Wealth in Imperial Rome (1910).
Doellinger — Gentile and Jew. Two volumes (1906). Edersheim— Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah. Vol.
I., Book I. The Preparation for the Gospel. Farrar — Early Days of Christianity. Book I. The World.
Farrer — Paganism and Christianity (1891).
Ferrero — The Ruin of the Ancient Civilization and the Triumph of Christianity (1921).
Fisher — The Beginnings of Christianity (1877). Chs. I.- VII.
Fowler — Religious Experience of the Roman People
(1911).
Fowler — Roman Ideas of Deity in the Last Century be¬ fore the Christian Era (1914).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 85
Friedlander — Roman Life and Manners under the Early Empire. Three volumes (1909-10).
Friedlander — Geschichte der jiidischen Apologetik als Vorgeschichte des Christentums (1903).
Geike — Life of Christ (1877). Chs. I. -VI.
Glover — Conflict of Religions in the Early Roman Em¬ pire (1909).
Glover — Progress in Religion to the Christian Era (1922).
Halliday — Lectures on the History of Roman Religion (1923).
Houston — Anno Domini: A Glimpse of the World into which Messias Was Born (1885).
Hyde — From Epicurus to Christ (1904).
Keim — Rome und das Christentum (1881).
Lanciani — Ancient Rome (1897).
Laurie — Historical Survey of Pre-Christian Education (1895).
Legge — Forerunners and Rivals of Christianity. Two volumes (1915).
Livingston — The Legacy of Greece (1922).
Livingston — The Greek Genius and Its Meaning to Us (1912).
Lord — The Old Roman World (1868).
Mahaffy — Survey of Greek Civilization (1896).
Moore — Religious Thought of Greeks and the Romans from Homer to the Triumph of Christianity (1916).'
Muirhead — The Times of Christ (1904).
Patterson — Mithraism and Christianity (1921).
Petrie — Personal Religion in Egypt before Christianity (1909).
Pressense — Jesus Christ: His Times, Life, and Work (1866). Book I. Preliminary Questions.
Ramsay — The Church in the Roman Empire (1897).
Reitzenstein — Die hellenistischen Mysterien-religionen (1910).
84 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Robertson — Studies in the New Testament (1915). Part I. The Background.
Schmitz — Die Opferanschauung des spateren Judentums und die Opferanschauung des Neuen Testaments (1910).
Seidel — In the Time of Jesus (1885).
Sihler — Testimonium Animas; or Greek and Roman be¬ fore Christ.
Stapfer — Palestine in the Time of Christ (1885).
Stobart — The Glory That Was Greece (1911).
Stobart — The Grandeur That Was Rome (1912).
Sweet, L. M. — Roman Emperor Worship (1919).
Tucker — Life in the Roman World of Nero and St. Paul (1910).
Tuting — The Coming of the Kingdom of Christ to the Roman Empire (1915).
Uhlhorn — Conflict of Christianity with Heathenism (1879).
Wendland — Die hellenistisch-romische Kultur in ihren Beziehungen zu Judentum und Christentum. 3 Aufl. (1912).
Wenley — The Preparation for Christianity in the An¬ cient World (1898).
Wissowa — Die Religion und Mythologie der Romer. 2 Aufl. (1912).
4. Novels Dealing with the Period:
Brooks — A Son of Issachar. A Romance of the Days of Messias (1890).
Bulwer — Days of Pompeii.
Croly — Tarry Thou Till I Come. New Edition (1901).
Farrar — Darkness and Dawn; or Days of Nero (1893).
Gardenhire — Lux Crucis (1904).
Miller — Saul of Tarsus. A Story of Paul’s Time (1906).
THE INTERBIBLICAL HISTORY 85
Rhone — In the Days of the Son of Man (1903). Sienkewicz — Quo Vadis. A Story of the Days of Nero (1893).
Stearns — A Friend of Caesar (1901).
I
PART II: THE LIFE OF CHRIST (B. C. 6 or 5 to A. D. 29 or 30)
PART II: THE LIFE OF CHRIST
(B. C. 6 or 5 to A. D. 29 or 30)
The text-books used in connection with this part of the Syllabus are Robertson’s Harmony of the Gospels, Broadus’ Commentary on Matthew, Josephus, Robert¬ son’s Epochs in the Life of Jesus, and The Student’s Chronological New Testament. Use of other books is strongly encouraged with specific references and with abundant reference to maps. The lectures with each lesson aim to unfold the history from an inner point of view and to be exegetical and spiritual. The Scripture text itself is the basis of study, question, and lecture.
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF IMPORTANT WORKS ON THE GOSPELS AND THE LIFE OF CHRIST
I. THE GOSPELS
1. Introduction to the Four Gospels.
Abbott, E. A. — The Fourfold Gospel. Introduction. Section I. (1913), Section II. (1914), Section III. (1915), Section IV. (1916), Section V. (1917). Abbott — Miscellanea Evangelica (1914).
Abbott — Indices (1907).
Abbott — Clue : A Guide Through Greek and Hebrew. Abbott — The Corrections of Mark.
Abbott — From Tithe and Spirit.
Abbott — Paradosis.
Abbott — Silanus the Christian (1906).
Abbott — Notes on New Testament Criticism (1907). Alexander — Leading Ideas of the Gospels (1898). Badham — Formation of the Four Gospels.
89
90 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Barrows — The Gospels True Histories.
Battifol — Six Lecons sur les evangiles (1897).
Bennett — The Four Gospels from a Lawyer’s Stand- point.
Blass — Philology of the Gospels (1898).
Burton — A Short Introduction to the Gospels (1904).
Chase — The Gospels in the Light of Historical Criticism (1914).
Cladder — Unsere Evangelien (1919).
Cone — Gospel Criticism and Historical Christianity (1891).
Da Costa — The Four Witnesses (1851).
Dale — The Living Christ and the Four Gospels (1890).
Dalman — The Words of Jesus (1902).
Godet — Biblical Studies.
Godet — The Collection of the Four Gospels, and the Gospel of St. Matthew (1899).
Gregory, D. S. — Why Four Gospels (1876).
Hausleiter — Die Vier Evangelien (1906).
Lardner — Credibility of the Gospels. Seven volumes (1857).
Levesque — Nos quatre evangiles. Leur composition et leur position respective (1917).
Luckock — The Special Characteristics of the Four Gospels (1900).
Marvin — Authorship of the Four Gospels (1886).
McVery — Did Jesus Write His Own Gospel? (1912).
Mill — On the Mythical Interpretation of the Gospels. Reply to Strauss (1861).
Moffatt — Theology of the Gospels (1912).
Morehead — Studies in the Four Gospels.
Norton — Genuineness of the Gospels (1848).
Patton — The Sources of the Synoptic Gospels (1915).
Pullan — The Gospels (1912).
Resch- — Aussercanonische Parallel-texte zu den Evan¬ gelien (1893).
Roberts — Discussion on the Gospels (1864).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
91
Robinson— The Study of the Gospels (1898).
Salmon — The Human Element in the Gospels (1907).
Sanday — The Gospels in the Second Century (1876).
Scott — The Making of the Gospels (1905).
Sparrow— The Gospels in Art.
Stanton— The Gospels as Historical Documents. Part I. The Early Use of the Gospels (1903).
Stokoe — Manual of the Four Gospels (1901).
Tischendorf— Origin of the Four Gospels (1867).
Thorburn- — The Mythical Interpretation of the Gospels (1916).
Torre y, C. C. — The Translations Made from the Origi¬ nal Aramaic Gospels (1913).
Wernle — The Sources of Our Knowledge of the Life of Jesus (1907).
Westcott — Introduction to the Four Gospels (1875).
Westcott — Elements of the Gospel Harmony (1851).
Williamson — Four Lectures on the Early History of the Gospels.
Wright — A Synopsis of the Gospels in Greek (1903).
Zimmern — Der historische Werth der altesten Ueberlief- erung.
See also the Bible dictionaries, the New Testament in¬ troductions, and the commentaries on the Gospels.
2. The Synoptic Problem.
Besides the preceding, note the following:
Abbott and Ruspiebrooke — The Common Tradition of the Synoptic Gospels in the Text of the Revised Version (1884).
Albertz — Die synoptischen Streitgesprache (1921).
Bacon — The Beginnings of Gospel Story (1909).
Bacon — Is Mark a Roman Gospel? (1919).
Badham — St. Mark’s Indebtedness to St. Matthew (1897).
Bertram — Die Leidengeschichte Jesu (1922).
92 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Bleek — Synoptische Erklarung der drei ersten Evange- lien (1862).
Bosanquet — Outlines of the Synoptic Record (1904).
Buckley — Introduction to the Synoptic Problem (1912).
Burkitt— Two Lectures on the Gospels.
Burkitt — The Gospel History and Its Transmission. Second edition (1907).
Burkitt — The Earliest Sources for the Life of Jesus
(191°).
Burton — Some Principles of Literary Criticism and Their Application to the Synoptic Problem (1904).
Cadbury — The Style and Literary Method of Luke (1920).
Campbell — The First Three Gospels.
Carpenter — The First Three Gospels. Third edition (1904).
Carpenter, S. C. — Christianity According to St. Luke (1919).
Carus — The Synoptic Gospels (1910).
Cary — The Synoptic Gospels.
Chase — The Gospels in the Light of Historical Criticism (1914).
Cone — Gospel Criticism and Historical Christianity (1911).
Flinders-Petrie — The Growth of the Gospels as Shown by Structural Criticism (1910).
Fullignet — Les sources des evangiles (1911).
Gloag — Introduction to the Synoptic Gospels (1895).
Goguel— L’evangile de Marc et ses rapports avec ceux de Matthieu et de Luc (1909).
Harnack — Luke the Physician (1907).
Harnack— The Sayings of Jesus: the Second Source of St. Matthew and St. Luke (1908).
Harnack — The Date of the Acts and the Synoptic Gos¬ pels (1911).
Hayes — The Most Beautiful Book in the World (1913).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 93
Hayes — The Synoptic Gospels and the Book of Acts (1919).
Hawkins — Horae Synopticse. Second edition (1909).
Hobson — Diatessaron of Tatian and the Synoptic Prob¬ lem (1904).
Hoffmann — Das Marcus evangelium und seine Quellen (1904).
Holdsworth — Gospel Origins (1913).
Holtz mann — Die synoptische Evangelien, ihr Ursprung und geschichtlicher charakter (1863).
Koch — Die Abfassungszeit des lukanischen Geschichts- werkes (1910).
Jameson — The Origin of the Synoptic Gospels (1922).
Jolley — Synoptic Problem for English Readers (1893).
Julicher — Neue Linien in der Kritik der evangelischen Ueberlieferung (1906).
Loisy — Les evangiles synoptique (1907).
Lummis — How Luke Was Written (1913).
Mackinlay — Recent Discoveries in St. Luke’s Writings (1921).
Machlachlan — St. Luke, Evangelist and Historian (1912).
Machlachlan — St. Luke: The Man and His Work (1920).
Mangenot — Les evangiles synoptiques (1911).
Montefiore — The Synoptic Gospels (1909).
Muller — Zur Synopse: Untersuchung fiber die Arbeits- weise des Lukas und Matthaus und ihre Quellen (1908).
Nicolardot — Les procedes de redaction des trois pre¬ miers Evangelistes (1908).
Palmer — Gospel Problems and Their Solution (1908).
Patton — Sources of the Synoptic Gospels (1915).
Pasquier — La solution du probleme synoptique (1911).
Paul — Die Abfassungszeit der synoptischen Evangelien (1887).
94 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Perry — The Sources of Luke’s Passion Narrative (1920).
Purchas — Johannine Problems and Modern Needs (1901).
Ramsay— Luke the Physician (1908).
Ramsay — Was Christ Born at Bethlehem? (1899).
Robertson, A. T. — Studies in Mark’s Gospel (1919).
Robertson— A. T. — Luke the Historian in the Light of Research (1920).
Rohrich — La composition des evangiles (1898).
Rushebrooke — Synopticon: An Exposition of the Com¬ mon Matter of the Synoptic Gospels (1880).
Salmon — The Human Element in the Gospels (1907).
Sanday et alii— Studies in the Synoptic Problem (1911).
Scott — The Making of the Gospels. New edition (1908).
Smith, R. — The Solution of the Synoptic Problem (1922).
Soiron — Die Logia Jesu (1916).
Spitta — Die synoptische Grundschaft (1912).
Stanton — The Synoptic Gospels (1909). Part II. of the Gospels as Historical Documents.
Weiss, B. — Das Marcusevangelium und seine synop- tischen Parallelen (1872).
Weiss, B. — Das Matthausevangelium und seine Lucas parallelen (1876).
Weiss, B. — Die geschichtlichkeit des Markusevangeliums (1905).
Weiss, B. — Quellen des Lukasevangeliums (1907).
Weiss, B. — Die Quellen der synoptischen Ueberlieferung (1908).
Weizsacker — Untersuchungen fiber die evangelische Geschichte, ihre Quellen und die Gang ihrer Ent- wickelung. 2 Aufl. (1901).
Wellhausen — Einleitung in die drei ersten Evangelien (1905).
Wendling — Ur-Markus (1905).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 95
Wendling — Die Entstehung des Markusevangeliums (1908).
Wendt — Die Lehre Jesu. Band I. Die evangelischen Quellenberichte fiber die Lehre Jesu (1886). The Teaching of Jesus. Vol. I. (1892).
Weston — Matthew the Genesis of the New Testament (1900).
Wernle — Die synoptische Frage (1899).
Wernle — The Sources of our Knowledge of the Life of Jesus (1907).
Wetzel — Die synoptischen Evangelien (1883).
Wright — The Composition of the Four Gospels (1890).
Wright-— The Gospel According to St. Luke in Greek (1900).
See Bible dictionaries, introductions and commentaries.
3. The Authorship and Character of the Fourth Gospel.
Abbott, Peabody and Lightfoot — The Fourth Gospel : Evidences External and Internal for its Johannine Authorship (1891).
Abbott, Ezra — On the Authorship of the Fourth Gospel (1880).
Abbott, E. A. — Johannine Vocabulary (1905).
Abbott, E. A. — Johannine Grammar (1906).
Appel — Die Echheit des Johannesevangeliums (1915).
Askwith — The Historical Value of the Fourth Gospel (1910).
Bacon — The Fourth Gospel in Research and Debate (1910).
Baldensperger — Der Prolog des vierten Evangeliums (1898).
Barth — The Gospel of John and the Synoptic Gospels (1907).
Benham — St. John and His Work (1902).
Beyschlag — Zur Johanneischen Frage (1872).
96 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Burney — The Aramaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel (1922).
Chapman — John the Presbyter and the Fourth Gospel (1911).
Clemen— Die Entstehung des Johannesevangeliums (1912).
D’Alma — La Controverse du quatrieme evangile (1908).
D’Alma — Philo et la quatrieme evangile (1911).
Dausch — Das Johannesevangelium (1909).
Delff — Das vierte Evangelium wiederhergestellt (1890).
Delff — Neue Beitrage zur Kritik und Erklarung des vierten Evangeliums (1890).
Drummond — An Inquiry into the Character and Au¬ thorship of the Fourth Gospel (1904).
Evans — St. John the Author of the Fourth Gospel (1888).
Ewald — Das Hauptproblem der Evangelienfrage und der Weg zu seiner Losung (1890).
Fouard, S. — Jean et la fin de l’age apostolique (1904).
Gardner, P. — The Ephesian Gospel (1915).
Garvie — The Beloved Disciple: Studies in the Fourth Gospel (1922).
Gobel — Die Reden des Herrn nach Johannes (1906).
Goguel — Les sources du recit Tohannique de la Passion (1910).
Gordon, S. D. — Quiet Talks on St. John’s Gospel.
Gregory, C. R. — Wellhausen und Johannes (1910).
Green — The Ephesian Canonical Writings (1910).
Grill — Untersuchungen uber die Entstehung des vierten Evangeliums (1902).
Gumbel — Das Johannesevangelium Eine Erganzung des Lukasev. (1911).
Harris, J. R. — The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel (1917).
Hayes — John and His Writings (1917).
Heitmuller— Das Johannesevangelium (1908).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 97
Holland — The Philosophy of Faith and the Fourth Gospel (1920).
Holtz mann, H. J. — Evangelium, Brief e, und Offen- barung des Johannes. 3 Aufl. (1908).
Jackson — The Fourth Gospel and Some Recent German Criticisms (1906).
Jackson — The Problem of the Fourth Gospel (1918).
Johnston — The Philosophy of the Fourth Gospel (1909).
Keisker — Inner Witness of the Fourth Gospel (1922).
Kreyenbuhl — Neue Losung der Johanneischen Frage (1905).
Larfield — Die beide Johannes von Ephesus (1914).
Lepin — L’Origine du Quatrieme evangile (1907).
Lepin — La valeur historique du quatrieme evangile (1910).
Lewis — Disarrangements in the Fourth Gospel (1910).
Lewis, F. G. — The Irenseus Testimony to the Fourth Gospel : Its Extent, Meaning, and Value (1908).
Lias — Doctrinal System of John (1875).
Lightfoot — Essays on the Work entitled Supernatural Religion (1889).
Lightfoot — Biblical Essays (1893).
Loisy — Le quatrieme evangile (1903).
Lowrie — The Doctrine of John (1895).
Luthardt — St. John the Author of the Fourth Gospel (1875).
Monse — Johannes und Paulus (1915).
Overbecic — Das Johannesevangelium (1911).
Peyton — The Memorabilia of Jesus.
Richmond — The Gospel of the Rejection (1906).
Robertson, A. T. — The Divinity of Christ in the Fourth Gospel (1916).
Robinson — Historical Character of St. John’s Gospel (1908).
98 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Sanday — Authorship and Historical Character of the Fourth Gospel (1872).
Sanday — Criticism of the Fourth Gospel (1905).
Schlatter — Die Sprache und Heimat des vierten Evan- gelisten (1903).
Schmiedel — The Johannine Writings (1908).
Schniewind — Die Parallelperikopen bei Lukas und Johannes (1914).
Scott, E. F.- — The Historical and Religious Value of the Fourth Gospel (1909).
Scott, E. F.— The Fourth Gospel: Its Purpose and The- ology (1906).
Scott-Holland — The Philosophy of the Fourth Gospel (1919).
Sears — The Fourth Gospel, the Heart of Christ (1872).
Sense — A Free Inquiry into the Authorship of the Fourth Gospel.
Smith, J. R. — The Teaching of the Fourth Gospel (1903).
Speer — The Greatest Book in the World (1915).
Spitta — Das Johannesevangelium als Quelle der Gesch- ichte Jesu ( 1909) .
Stange — Die Eigenart des Johanneischen Produktion (1914).
Stanton — The Fourth Gospel (Part III of The Gospels as Historical Documents, 1921).
Stevens — Johannine Theology (1894).
Strachan, R. PI. — The Fourth Gospel : Its Significance and Environment (1917).
Vedder — The Johannine Writings and the Johannine Problems (1917).
Watkins — Modern Criticism Considered in its Relation to the Fourth Gospel (1890).
Watson — Mysticism of St. John’s Gospel (1916).
Wearing — The World View of the Fourth Gospel (1918).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 99
Weiss, B. — Das Johannesevangelium als einheitliches Werk (1911).
Wellhausen — Das Evangelium Johannes (1908).
Wendt — The Gospel According to St. John: An Inquiry into its Genesis and Historical Value (1902).
Wendt — Die Schichten im vierten Evangelium (1911).
Worsley — The Fourth Gospel and the Synoptists (1909).
Wrede — Charakter und Tendenz des Johannesevange- liums (1903).
Zahn — Das Evangelium des Johannes (1908).
II. COMMENTARIES ON THE GOSPELS
1. Series on Entire New Testament.
(a) For English Readers :
American Commentary, An — Edited by Alvah Hovey. By various authors (1880-90).
Bengel — Gnomon of the New Testament. Translated by Blackley and Hawes. Three volumes (1867).
Bible Commentary (Speaker’s Commentary). Edited by Cook. By various British authors. New edition (1898).
Bible for Home and School. Edited by Shailer Mathews. By various American authors (1908 — ).
Buckland’s Devotional Commentary. Various writers.
Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges. Various British authors. Nineteen volumes on New Testa¬ ment. (1877-96).
Carroll, B. H. — Interpretation of the English Bible (1912-18).
Century (New) Bible. Edited by W. F. Adeney. By various authors. Thirteen volumes on New Testa¬ ment. (1899-1904).
Clark, G. W. — People’s Commentary (1873-1905).
100 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Clark, T. and T. — Handbooks for Bible Classes.
Devotional Commentary
Dummelow — A Commentary on the Bible in One Vol¬ ume. By various British authors (1909).
Ellicott — New Testament for English Readers. Three volumes. 1878 ff. By various British authors.
Expositor’s Bible. Edited by Sir W. Robertson Nicoll. By various British authors. Twenty-one volumes on New Testament and one index volume (1889-94).
Gray — Christian Workers’ Comm, on the Whole Bible (1915).
Humphrey — Commentary on the Revised Version of the New Testament (1882).
Indian Commentary. Various writers.
Parker — People’s Bible.
Peake — One Volume Commentary on the Bible (1919).
Maclaren — Expositions of Holy Scripture. Volumes on New Testament (1895-1908).
Van Ness — Convention (Southern Baptist) Commen¬ taries. Various Baptist authors (1912—).
Walker and Warman — The Reader’s Commentary (1910—).
Weiss — A Commentary on the New Testament. Trans¬ lated by Schodde and Wilson. Four volumes (1906).
Westminster New Testament. By various British authors.
Westminster Commentaries. Edited by Walter Lock (1901—).
(b) For Greek Students :
Alford — Greek Testament. Four volumes. Sixth edi¬ tion (1874).
Bengel — Gnomon Novi Testamenti. Third edition (1855).
Briggs, Driver and Plummer (editors) — The inter-
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
101
national Critical Commentary. By various American and British authors. Will be about eighteen volumes on N. T. (1895- — ).
Calvin — Commentaries on the N. T. English translation (1847). Tholuck’s edition in Latin is in five volumes and cheap. Covers most of the N. T.
Holtzmann, H. J. (editor) — Der Commentar zum Neuen Testament. By various German authors. Four volumes (1890).
Lietzmann (editor) — Handbuch zum Neuen Testa¬ ment. By various German writers (1906 — ).
Meyer — Commentary on the N. T. from Thess. to Rev. by Lfinemann, Huther and Dfisterdieck. Transla¬ tion. Eleven volumes (1885-1887).
Meyer (edited and thoroughly revised by various Ger¬ man authors) — Kritisch-exegetischer Kommentar fiber das Neue Testament. Sixteen volumes (1897- 1910).
Nicoll (editor) — The Expositor’s Greek Testament. By various British authors. Five volumes (1897- 1910).
Perowne and Robinson (editors) — Cambridge Greek Testament for Schools and Colleges. Nineteen vol¬ umes on N. T. (1887-1915).
Vincent — Word Studies in the N. T. Two volumes (1889).
Weiss, B. — Das Neue Testament im berichtigten Text, mit Kurzer Erlauterung. 2 Aufl. Three volumes (1902-5).
Weiss, J. (editor) — Die Schriften des Neuen Testa¬ ments. Neu fibersetzt und ffir die Gegenwart erklart. By various German authors. 3 Aufl. Two volumes (1917-18).
Zahn (editor) — Der Kommentar zum Neuen Testa¬ ment. By various German authors (1905 — ).
102 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
2. Commentaries on Matthew.
(a) For English students :
Besides those by Bengel, Carroll, Clarke, Ellicott, Humphreys, Maclaren, Parker, B. Weiss, cov¬ ering all the New Testament, the following books by separate authors are to be noted :
Anderson — The Gospel according to St. Matthew (1909).
Broadus— -Commentary on the Gospel of Matthew. American Commentary (1887).
Carr — Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges.
Erdman, C. R. — The Gospel according to Matthew (1920).
Gibson— -The Gospel of Matthew. Expositor’s Bible (1890).
HoRTON—The Gospel according to St. Matthew (1909).
Micklem — The Gospel according to St. Matthew (1917).
Morrison — Practical Commentary on the Gospel accord¬ ing to St. Matthew. Ninth edition (1895).
Robertson — Commentary on the Gospel according to Matthew. Bible for Home and School (1911).
Slater — St. Matthew. The New-Century Bible (1901).
Smith, D. — The Gospel of St. Matthew. The West¬ minster New Testament (1909).
Williams — The Hebrew Christian Messiah (1916). Ex¬ position of Matthew.
(b) For Greek students:
Besides Alford, Bengel, Calvin, Meyer, Vincent and B. Weiss on the whole New Testament, one may note the following separate writers :
Allen- — A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Gospel according to St. Matthew. Int. Crit. Comm. (1907).
Baljon — Commentaar op het Evangelie van Mt. (1900).
Blass — Evangelium secundum Matthseum (1901).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
103
Bruce — The Synoptic Gospels. Exp. Gk. Test. (1897).
Carr — Matthew in the Cambridge Greek Testament (1894).
Cereselo — Authenticita eta e storica autorita del Vangelo di S. Matteo (1909).
Chrysostom— -Homiletical discourses.
Dimmler — Das Evangelium nach Matthaus (1909).
Holtzmann — Die Synoptiker. Hand-Commentar. 3 Aufl. (1901).
Klostermann und Gressmann — Matthaus (1909).
Loisy — Les evangiles synoptiques. Two volumes (1907-8).
McNeile — The Gospel according to St. Matthew (1915).
Niglutsch — Brevis Commentarius in Evangelium S. Matthaei (1913).
Nosgen — Das Evangelium des Matthaus (1897).
Plummer — An Exegetical Commentary on the Gospel ac¬ cording to St. Matthew (1909).
Weiss, B. — Das Matthaus-Evangelium. Meyer Kom- mentar. 9 Aufl. (1898).
Weiss — Die drei alteren Evangelien. Schriften des Neuen Testaments. (1907).
Wellhausen — Das Evangelium Matthsei (1904).
Zahn — Das Evangelium des Matthaus. Zahn Kommen- tar. 2 Aufl. (1905).
3. Commentaries on Mark
(a) For English students:
Besides those on the whole New Testament.
Alexander — Gospel of Mark (1863).
Bacon — The Beginnings of Gospel Story : A Historico- Critical Inquiry into the Sources of and Structure of the Gospel according to Mark (1909).
Bennett — Life of Christ according to St. Mark (1907).
Broadus — Gospel according to Mark.
Chadwick — The Gospel of Mark. Exp. Bible (1887).
104 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Clarke— Gospel of Mark. Am. Comm. (1881).
Dean— The Gospel according to St. Mark (1916).
Erdman— The Gospel of Mark (1917).
Hunter — John Mark; or the Making of a Saint (1917).
Jacobus— The Gospel according to Mark. Bible for Home and School (1915).
Jones, J. D.— Commentary on St. Mark. Four volumes (1919).
Lindsay— The Gospel according to St. Mark.
Luckock— Footprints of the Son of Man as Traced by St. Mark (1889).
Maclear — Gospel of St. Mark. Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges.
Menzies — The Earliest Gospel : A Historical Study of the Gospel according to Mark (1901).
Morison— Practical Commentary on the Gospel accord¬ ing to St. Mark. Seventh edition (1894).
Plummer — Cambridge Bible for Schools.
Robinson— St. Mark’s Life of Jesus (1922).
Robertson, A. T. — Making Good in the Ministry: A Sketch of John Mark (1918).
Robertson, A. T. — Studies in Mark’s Gospel (1919).
Salmond- — The Gospel according to St. Mark. New- Century Bible.
Taylor, J. J.— Gospel according to Mark. S. B. Conven¬ tion Series.
(b) For Greek students :
Besides the general books.
Allen — The Gospel according to Mark (1915).
Du Boisson— The Origin and Characteristics of Mark (1906).
Bruce — Exp. Gk. Test. (1897).
Goguel— L’Evangile de Marc et ses rapports avec ceux de Matthieu et de Luc (1909).
Gould — The Gospel according to St. Mark. Int. Crit. Ser. 1896.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
105
Green, W. — The Gospel according to St. Mark (1909). Holtzmann — Die Synoptiker. Hand-Comm. (1901). Klostermann-Gressm ann— -Markus ( 1907) . Lagrange— Evangile selon St. Marc (1911).
Loisy — L’Evangile selon Marc (1912).
Maclear — Camb. Gk. Test. (1893).
Merx — Das Evangelium Markus (1905).
Plummer — Camb. Gk. Test. (1915).
Rohr — Die Glaubwiirdigkeit des Markusevangeliums (1913).
Swete — The Gospel according to St. Mark. Second edi¬ tion (1902).
Weiss, B. — Meyer Komm. (1901).
Weiss, J. — Das alteste Evangelium (1903).
Weiss, J. — Das Markus Evangelium (1906). Die Schrif- ten des Neuen Testaments.
Wellhausen — Das Evangelium Marci. 2 Aufl. (1909). Wohlenberg — Das Evangelium des Markus. Zahn Komm. (1910).
4. Commentaries on Luke
(a) For English students:
Not on entire New Testament.
Adeney — New-Century Bible.
Bliss — In Am. Comm. (1881).
Burton — Exp. Bible (1890).
Farrar — In Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges. Hayes — The Most Beautiful Book in the World.
Lindsay — Gospel according to St. Luke.
McLaughlin — Commentary on the Gospel according to St. Luke (1912).
Ragg — The Gospel according to St. Luke (1922). Sadler — Gospel according to St. Luke (1886). Stevenson — Handbook to Luke (1901).
(b) For Greek students:
Not on entire New Testament.
106 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Blass — Evangelium secundum Lucam (1897).
Bruce — Synoptic Gospels in Exp. Gk. T. (1897). Burnside — Camb. Gk. Test. (1915).
Cadbury — Critical Studies in the Gospel of Luke and the Book of Acts (1916-18).
Farrar — Camb. Gk. Test. (1884).
Godet — Commentary on the Gospel of St. Luke (1887). Harnack — Luke the Physician (1907).
Holtzmann — Die Synoptiker. Hand-Komm. (1901). Klosterman — Lukas. Handbuch zum N. T. (1919). Koch — Die Abfassungszeit des lukanischen geschichts- werkes (1911).
Loisy — Les evangiles synoptiques (1908).
Plummer — The Gospel according to St. Luke. Int. Crit.
Comm. Fourth edition (1909).
Robertson, A. T. — A Translation of Luke’s Gospel with Grammatical Notes (1923).
Rose — L’evangile selon S. Luc (1904).
Weiss, B. — Meyer Komm. 9 Aufl. (1901).
Weiss, J.— -Das Lukas Evangelium (1906). Schriften d. N. T.
Wellhausen — Das Evangelium Lucae (1904).
Zahn— Das Evangelium des Lukas (1914). 4 Aufl.
(1920).
5. Commentaries on John
(a) For English students :
Not on entire New Testament.
Candler — Practical Studies in the Gospel of John. Three volumes (1912-15).
Dods— The Gospel of John. Exp. Bible. Two volumes (1891).
Gore — Exposition of the Gospel of John (1920).
Hovey — In Am. Comm. (1885).
Maurice — The Gospel of St. John (1906).
McClymont- — New-Century Bible (1901).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
107
Milligan and Moulton — In Schaff’s Comm. (1895). Plummer — Camb. Bible for Schools and Colleges.
Reith — St. John.
Reynolds — The Gospel of St. John. The Pulpit Comm. Two volumes (1887-8).
Robertson, A. T. — Divinity of Christ in the Gospel of John (1916).
Selbie — Belief and Life. Studies in the Thought of the Fourth Gospel (1916).
Watkins — In Ellicott’s Comm. (1879).
Whitelaw — The Gospel of John (1888).
(b) For Greek students:
Not on entire New Testament.
Bert — Das Evangelium des Johannes (1922).
Belzer — Das Evangelium des heiligen Johannes (1905). Blass — Evangelium secundum Johannem (1902). Calmes — L’evangile selon S. Jean (1904).
Carr — Gospel of St. John (1904).
Dods — Expositor’s Greek Testament (1897).
Godet — Comm, on the Gospel of St. John. Two volumes (1886-90).
Goebel — Die Reden unseres Herrn nach Johannem. Two volumes (1906-10).
Heitmuller — Das Tohannes-Evangelium. Schr. d. N. T. (1907).
Holtzmann — Hand-Comm. 3 Aufl. von Bauer (1908). Loisy — Le Quatrieme Evangile. Second edition (1921). Plummer — Camb. Gk. Test. (1913).
Weiss, B. — Meyer-Komm. 9 Aufl. (1902).
Wellhausen — Das Evangelium Johannis (1908). Westcott — Commentary on the Gospel of St. John. Two volumes (1908).
Zahn — Das Evangelium Johannes. Zahn Komm. (1909). 6 Aufl. (1921).
108 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
III. HARMONIES OF THE GOSPELS
Augustine — Harmony of the Evangelists.
Brassac — Nova Evangeliorum Synopsis (1913).
Burton and Goodspeed — A Harmony of the Synoptic Gospels (1917).
Burton and Goodspeed — A Harmony of the Synoptic Gospels in Greek (1920).
Broadus — A Harmony of the Gospels in the Revised Version with New Helps for Historical Study. Critical Notes by Robertson. Twelfth edition (1921).
Cadman — Christ in the Gospels. Four Gospels com¬ bined into one.
Camerlynck et Coppieters — Evangeliorum secundum Matthseum, Marcum et Lucam Synopsis juxta Vul- gatam Editionem (1910).
Campbell — First Three Gospels in Greek (1899).
Clark — Harmony of the Gospels in the Authorized Ver¬ sion (1892).
Finney-— Huck’s Synopsis of the First Three Gospels (1909).
Gardiner — A Harmony of the Four Gospels in Greek (1873).
Heineke — Synopse der drei ersten Kan. Evangelien mit Parallelen aus dem Joh. Ev. (1898).
Hill — The Earliest Life of Christ ever compiled from the Four Gospels, Being the Diatessaron of Tatian (1894).
Huck — Synopse der drei ersten Evangelien. 4 Aufl. (1910).
Kerr — A Harmony of the Gospels in the American Stand¬ ard Version (1903).
Larfeld — Griechische Synopse der 4 neut. Evangelien (1912).
Robertson, A. T. — A Harmony of the Gospels for
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 109
Students of the Life of Christ (1922). Second Edi¬ tion (1923).
Robinson-Riddle — A Harmony of the Gospels in Greek (1885).
Sharman — Records of the Life of Jesus (1917).
Stevens and Burton — A Harmony of the Gospels for Historical Study in the Revised Version. Tenth edi¬ tion (1910).
Van Kirk — A Source Book for the Life of Christ (1919).
Wieseler — Chronological Synopsis of the Gospel History (1877).
Wright — A Synopsis of the Gospels in Greek (1903).
IV. LIFE OF CHRIST
A Small Selection from the Enormous Literature
1. Bibliographies and, Criticism of Literature on the Life of Christ
Anstey — Modern Lives of Christ (1895).
Ayres — Jesus Christ Our Lord. An English Bibliog¬ raphy of Christology Comprising over Five Thousand Titles Annotated and Classified (1906).
Conybeare — History of New Testament Criticism. Is¬ sued for the Rationalist Press Association (1910).
Fant — Die Christologie seit Schleiermacher, ihre Gesch- ichte und ihre Begriindung (1912).
Sanday — The Life of Christ in Recent Research (1907).
Sanday — Christologies Ancient and Modern (1910).
Schweitzer — Von Reimarus zu Wrede (1906).
Schweitzer— The Quest of the Historical Jesus. A Critical Study of Its Progress from Reimarus to Wrede (1910).
Wabnitz — Histoire de la vie de Jesus (1906).
Weinel — Jesus im neunszehnten Jahrhundert. 2 Aufl.
(1906).
110 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Weinel — Jesus in the Nineteenth Century and After (1914).
See further lists in the various lives of Christ, in the Bible dictionaries, and in the New Testament bibli¬ ographies, in particular Hastings’ Dictionary of Christ and the Gospels.
2. Introductory Problems
Anthony — Introduction to the Life of Christ (1896).
Barth — Die Hauptprobleme des Lebens Jesu. 3 Aufl. (1907).
Bauenfeind— Die literarische Form des Evangeliums (1915).
Briggs — New Light on the Life of Jesus (1904).
Bultman— Die Geschichte der synoptischen Tradition (1921).
Burkitt — The Earliest Sources for the Life of Jesus (1910).
Butler — How to Study the Life of Christ (1900).
Caspari — Chronological and Geographical Introduction to the Life of Christ (1869).
Delff — Die Geschichte d. Rabbi Jesus von Nazareth (1889).
Dibelius — Die Formgeschichte des Evangeliums (1919).
Hill — Introduction to the Life of Christ (1911).
Hodge — Historical Atlas and Chronology of the Life of Christ (1899).
Holtzmann, O. — Die Hauptprobleme der Leben-Jesu Forschung (1906).
J ulicher — Neue Linien in der Kritik der evangelischen Ueberlieferung (1906).
Liberty — The Political Relations of Christ’s Ministry (1916).
Meyer, E. — Ursprung und Anfange des Christentums (1921—).
Miller — Our Knowledge of Christ (1914).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
111
Mommert — Zur Chronologie des^Lebens Jesu (1909).
Reville — Jesus de Nazareth: Etudes critiques sur les antecedents de l’histoire evangelique et la vie de Jesus. Two volumes (1897). Second edition of Vol. I. (1906).
Robinson— -Study of the Saviour in the Newer Light (1898).
Sanday — The Sacred Sites of the Gospels (1903).
Schmidt, K. L. — Der Rahmen der Geschichte Tesu (1919).
Soden — Die wichtigsten Fragen im Leben Jesu. 2 Aufl. (1909).
Spitta — Streitfragen der Geschichte Jesu (1907).
Wernle — The Sources of Our Knowledge of Jesus (1907).
Westcott — Introduction to the Study of the Gospels (1887).
Wieseler — Chronological Synopsis to the Gospel His¬ tory (1877).
3. Exhaustive Treatises on the Life of Christ
Andrews — Life of Christ. New edition (1892).
Beyschlag — Das Leben Jesu. Two volumes (1893).
Bovon — Vie de Jesus (1894).
Edersheim — The Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah. Third edition. Two volumes (1886).
Ewald — History of Christ and His Times (1865).
Farrar — Life of Christ. Two volumes (1874).
Geikie — The Life and Words of Christ. Two volumes (1879).
Hanna — Our Lord’s Life on Earth. Six volumes (1876).
Lepsius — Das Leben Jesu. 2 Bde (1917, 1918).
Noesgen — Geschichte Jesu Christi (1891).
Papini — The Life of Christ. Translation from the Ital¬ ian (1923).
112 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Patterson-Smyth — A People’s Life of Christ (1920). Pressense — Jesus Christ: His Times, Life, and Work (1879).
Schlatter — Die Geschichte der Christus (1920).
Smith, D.- — In the Days of His Flesh. Tenth edition (1915).
Weiss, B. — The Life of Christ. Second edition. Three volumes (1909).
Wernle — Jesus (1916).
'4. Handbooks
Anderson, F. L. — The Man of Nazareth (1914). Barton — Jesus of Nazareth (1922).
Bennett — The Life of Christ according to St. Mark (1907).
Campbell — The Life of Christ (1921).
Davis — The Story of the Nazarene (1904).
Dawson — The Man Christ Jesus (1901).
Drury — The Ministry of Our Lord (1911).
Ellicott — Historical Lectures on the Life of Christ (1869).
Fairbairn — Studies in the Life of Christ. New edition (1892).
Garvie — Studies in the Inner Life of Jesus (1907). Glover — The Jesus of History (1917).
Good — The Jesus of Our Fathers (1923).
Headlam — The Life and Teachings of Jesus Christ (1922).
Hill— The Life of Christ (1917).
Holdsworth — The Christ of the Gospels (1911).
Kent — Life and Teachings of Jesus (1913).
Lees — The Life of Christ (1920).
Loofs — Wer war Jesus Christus (1916).
Parker — Ecce Deus (1875).
Rhees — The Life of Jesus (1900).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
113
Robertson, A. T. — Epochs in the Life of Jesus. Popu¬ lar edition (1923).
Robertson, J. A. — The Spiritual Pilgrimage of Jesus. Fifth edition (1922).
Robinson — St. Mark’s Life of Jesus (1923).
Sanday — Outlines of the Life of Christ. Second edition (1908).
Seel ye — Ecce Homo. New edition (1895).
Stalker — Life of Christ (1881). Many editions since. Stewart — The Life of Christ.
Watson — Life of the Master (1900).
Whyte — The Walk and Conversation of Jesus Christ (1906).
Wilson — The Christ That We Forget (1917).
5. Very Radical Works
Bousset — Jesus (1906).
Bousset — Kurios Christos (1914).
Gilbert — Jesus (1912).
Holtzmann, O. — The Life of Jesus (1904). Christos. 2 Aufl. (1915).
Keim — The History of Jesus of Nazara. Six volumes (1876-83). Jesus von Nazara. 2 Bde (1872). Martin, A. W. — The Life of Jesus (1913).
Neumann — Jesus (1906).
Peleiderer — Christian Origins (1906).
Renan — The Life of Jesus. Twenty-third edition (1896).
Schmidt, N. — The Prophet of Nazareth (1905). Schmidt, P. W. — Die Geschichte Jesu (1904).
Stapfer — Jesus Christ. Three volumes (1898).
Strauss — The Life of Jesus Critically Examined.
Translation from fourth German edition (1898). Van Norden — Jesus (1906).
Williamson — The Life and Times of Jesus the Christ (1912).
114 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
6. Jesus Treated as a Paranoiac
Bundy — The Psychic Health of Jesus (1922).
Hall, G. Stanley— Jesus Christ in the Light of Psy¬ chology (1917).
Hitchcock— The Psychology of Jesus.
Holtzmann, O. — War Jesus Ekstatiker? (1903). Jaeger— 1st Jesus Christus ein suggestions-therapeut gewesen (1918).
Loops— What Is the Truth about Jesus Christ (1913). Schaefer- — Jesus in psychiatrischer Beleuchtung (1910). Werner— Die psychische Gesundheit Jesu (1908).
7. The Historicity of Jesus
Bornemann — Jesus als Problem (1909).
Bugge — -Das Christus-Mysterium (1915).
Case — The Historicity of Jesus (1912).
Conybeare — The Historical Christ (1914).
Dibelius — Recent Pamphlet Lit. on the subject in The- olog. Literaturzeitung 1910, No. 10.
Drews— The Christ Myth (1911).
Drews— Die Zeugnisse fur die Geschichtlichkeit Jesu
(1911).
Forrest — The Christ of History and Experience (1897).
Greer— The Historical Christ (1890).
Hauck— -Hat Jesus gelebt? (1910).
Hendrix— If I Had Not Come (1916).
Jensen— Moses, Jesus, Paulus. 2 Aufl. (1909).
Juli cher— Hat Jesus gelebt? (1910).
Kalthoff— Das Christus-Problem (1902).
Kalthoff — Die Enstehung des Christentums (1904). Keim — Der Historische Christus (1867). Klostermann— Die neuesten Angriffe auf die Geschicht¬ lichkeit Jesu.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
115
Lacey — The Historic Christ (1905).
Melhorn — Wahrheit und Dichtung im Leben Jesu. 2 Aufl. (1919).
Piepenbring — Jesus Historique (1909). New ed. (1922).
Riegel and Jordan — Simon, Son of Man (1917). Robertson, J. M. — Christianity and Mythology (1900). Robertson, J. M. — Pagan Christs (1903).
Robertson, J. M. — The Historical Jesus (1916). Robertson, J. M. — The Jesus Problem (1917). Rossington — Did Jesus Really Live? (1911). Schmiedel — Jesus in Modern Criticism (1907).
Seitz — Christus. Zeignisse aus dem Altertum (1896). Simpson — The Fact of Christ (1900).
Smith, D. — The Historic Jesus (1912).
Smith, W. B. — Der vor-Christliche Jesus (1906). Smith, W. B. — The Pre-Christian Jesus (1906).
Soden — Hat Jesus gelebt? (1910).
Soden — Has Jesus Lived? (1911).
Thorburn — Jesus the Christ: Historical or Mythical? (1912).
Thorburn — The Historical Jesus (1916).
Troeltscpi — Die Bedeutung der Geschichtlichkeit Jesus fur den Glauben (1911).
Weinel — 1st das “liberate” Jesusbild widerlegt? (1910). Weiss, J. — Jesus von Nazareth, Mythus oder Geschichte? (1910).
Williamson — The Times and the Teaching of Jesus Christ (1912).
8. The Jesus or Christ ( Jesus or Paul ) Controversy
Bacon — Jesus and Paul (1921).
Breitenstein — Jesus et Paul (1908).
Carpenter — The Historical Jesus and the Theological Christ (1912).
Drescher — Das Leben Jesu bei Paulus (1900).
116 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Dunkmann — Der historische Jesus, der mythologische Christus, und Jesus der Christus (1910).
Feine — Jesus Christus und Paulus (1902).
Goguel— -L’apotre Paul et Jesus-Christ (1904).
Heitmuller — Jesus und Paulus (1915).
Hibbert Journal Supplement — Jesus or Christ. (Re¬ print for January, 1909).
Holtzmann, H. — Paulus als Zeuge wider die Christus- mythe von Arthur Drews (Die Christliche Welt, 17 Feb., 1910).
J ulicher — Paulus und Jesus (1910).
Kaftan-— Jesus und Paulus (1906).
Knowling — Testimony of St. Paul to Christ. Second edition (1911).
Kolbing — Die geistige Einwirkung der Person Jesus auf Paulus (1906).
Meyer, A. — Jesus or Paul (1909).
Reid — Jesus the Christ and Paul the Apostle (1915).
Resch — Der Paulinismus und die Logia Jesu (1904).
Robertson, A. T. — Paul the Interpreter of Christ (1921).
Schmidt, F. — Der Christus des Glaubens und der Jesus der Geschichte.
Schmidt, H. — Der paulinische Christus (1867).
Schweitzer — The Quest of the Historical Jesus (1900).
Scott, C. A. — Tesus and Paul. In Cambr. Biblical Essays (1909).
Weinel — Jesus im neunzehnten Jahrhundert (1906).
Weiss, J. — Paul and Jesus (1909).
Wernle — Jesus und Paulus (1915).
Wustmann — Jesus und Paulus (1907).
Wynne — Fragmentary Records of Jesus of Nazareth from the Letters of a Contemporary (1887).
9. The Person of Christ ( Christology , Kenosis, Son of Man, Son of God or Humanity and Deity of Jesus )
Abbott— The Message of the Son of Man (1909).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 117
Abbott — The Son of Man: Contributions to the Study of the Thoughts of Jesus (1910).
Alexander, Gross — The Son of Man (1901).
Austin, Mary — The Man Jesus (1915).
Bacon — Jesus the Son of God (1911).
Bailey — -Does Hellenism Contribute Constituent Ele¬ ments to Paul’s Christology? (1905).
Baker — Christ and the Pharisees (1919).
Baldensperger — Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu. 2 Aufl. (1892).
Ball — The Kenotic Theory (1898).
Bousset — Jesus der Herr (1916).
Briggs — The Incarnation of Our Lord (1902).
Bruce — The Humiliation of Christ (1892).
Bruckner — Die Entstehung der paulinischen Christolo- gie (1903).
Bushnell — The Character of Jesus (1884). Cairncross— -The Appeal of Jesus (1916).
Chapman — The Consciousness of Christ (1922).
Cooke — The Incarnation and Recent Criticism (1907). Craig — Jesus as He Was and Is (1914).
Decker — Christ’s Experience of God (1914).
Denney — Jesus and the Gospel (1908).
Dorner — History of the Development of the Doctrine and the Person of Christ. Five volumes (1878). Dougall and Emmett — The Lord of Thought (1923). Drummond — Via, Veritas, Vita (1894).
Du Bose, W. P. — The Gospel in the Gospels (1906).
Du Bose, H. M. — The Consciousness of Jesus (1917). Durell — The Self-revelation of Our Lord (1910). Enlow — A Jewish View of Jesus (1920).
Fairbairn — The Place of Christ in Modern Theology (1893).
Fant — Die Christologie seit Schleiermacher (1912). Fieberg — Der Menschensohn (1901).
Findlay, J. A. — Jesus as They Saw Him (1920). Forrest — The Christ of History and Experience (1897).
118 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Forrest — The Authority of Christ (1906).
Forsyth— The Person and Place of Jesus Christ (1909).
Frovig — Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu (1918).
Garvie — Studies in the Inner Life of Jesus (1907).
Gibson — Jesus Christ the Unique Revealer of God (1915).
Gifford — The Incarnation (1897).
Glover — Jesus in the Experience of Men (1921).
Gordan, G. A. — The Christ of To-day.
Gore- — The Incarnation of the Son of God (1891).
Granbery — An Outline of N. T. Christology (1909).
Gunther — Die Entwickelung der Lehre Person Christi im XIX Jahrhundert (1911).
Headlam — The Life and Teachings of Jesus Christ (1923).
Hitchcock — The Psychology of Jesus.
Hoffmann — Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu (1904).
Holdsworth — The Christ of the Gospels (1911).
Holtzmann, H. J. — Das Messianische Bewusstsein Jesu (1907).
Hoyt — The Teaching of Jesus Concerning His Own Per¬ son (1907).
Jefferson — The Character of Jesus (1908).
Kennedy — The Self-Revelation of Jesus Christ.
Klausner — Jesus of Nazareth, His Life, His Times, His Teachings. By a Jew, in Hebrew (1922).
Kuhl — Das Bewusstsein Jesu (1908).
Lepin — Jesus Messie et Fils de Dieu. Third edition (1908).
Liddon— Our Lord’s Divinity (1889).
Lietzmann — Der Menschensohn (1896).
Loofs — What Is the Truth about Jesus Christ? (1913).
Lucas — The Fifth Gospel. The Pauline Interpretation of Christ.
Lutgert- — Johannes Christologie.
Mackintosh — The Doctrine of the Person of Jesus Christ (1912).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 119
MacNeill — The Christology of the Ep. to the Hebrews (1914).
Micklem — The Galilean. 2d ed. (1921).
Muller — Our Lord : Belief in the Deity of Christ (1907).
Mullins — The Authority of Christ (in Freedom and Authority in Religion) (1913).
Nicoll — The Church’s One Foundation: Christ and Re¬ cent Criticism (1902).
Nolloth — The Person of Our Lord and Recent Thought (1908).
Ottley — The Doctrine of the Incarnation (1896).
Parker — Ecce Deus (1875).
Paulus — Der Christus-Problem der Gegenwart (1922).
Peabody — The Character of Christ (1904).
Peters — The Master (1911).
Pfleiderer — The Early Christian Conception of Christ (1905).
Powell — The Principle of the Incarnation (1896).
Relton — A Study in Christology (1919).
Reville — History of the Dogma of the Deity of Christ. Third edition (1905).
Robertson, A. T. — The Pharisees and Jesus (1920).
Ross, G. A. J. — The Universality of Jesus.
Sanday — Christologies : Ancient and Modern (1910).
Schmidt, N. — Son of Man and Son of God in Modern Theology (1904).
Schurer — Das Messianische Selbstbewusstsein Jesu Christi (1903).
Schweitzer — The Quest of the Historical Jesus (1910).
Scott — Dominus Noster (1918).
Seeberg — Christi Person und Werk nach der Lehre seiner Jiinger (1910).
Seeley — Ecce Homo (1866).
Somerville — St. Paul’s Conception of Christ (1897).
Stalker — The Christology of Jesus (1901).
Streatfield — The Self-Interpretation of Jesus Christ (1907).
120 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Temple — The Boyhood Consciousness of Christ (1922). Torrey, R. A. — The Real Christ (1920).
Van Oosterzee — The Person and Work of the Re¬ deemer (1886).
Voelter — Die Menschensohnfrage neu untersucht (1916).
Vonier — The Personality of Christ (1915).
Walker — The Spirit and the Incarnation (1900). Warfield- — The Lord of Glory (1907).
Weiss, J. — Christ: The Beginnings of Dogma (1911). Wetter — Der Sohn Gottes (1916).
Wilkinson, W. C. — -Concerning Jesus Christ the Son of God (1916).
Wrede — Das Messiahgeheimnis in den Evangelien (1907).
Young-— Our Lord and Master (1902).
10. Special Aspects
For lists on Virgin Birth, John the Baptist, Baptism, Temptation, Sermon on the Mount, Lord’s Prayer, Trial, Crucifixion, Resurrection, Ascension, etc., see lessons on those topics.
Aitken — The Christ of the Men of Art (1914). Anthony — The Method of Jesus (1900).
Bernard — The Mental Characteristics of Christ (1888). Bischoff — Jesus und die Rabbinen (1905).
Bishop — Jesus the Worker (1910).
Blaikie — Glimpses of the Inner Life of Our Lord (1876).
Brooks — The Influence of Jesus (1879).
Brocker — Die Wahrheit fiber Jesus (1911).
Broadus — Jesus of Nazareth (1889).
Bruce — The Training of the Twelve. Fourth edition (1894).
Cairns — Christ the Central Evidence of Christianity.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
121
Cameron — The Renascence of Jesus (1915).
Carpenter — The Witness of the Influence of Christ (1905).
Farrar — The Life of Lives (1900).
Farrar — The Life of Christ as Represented in Art. Gibson — Jesus the Supreme Revealer of God (1915). Griffith-Jones — The Master and His Methods (1902). Grist — The Historic Christ in the Faith of To-day (1911).
Hausrath — Jesus und die neutest. Schrif tsteller ( 1908) . Jordan — Jesus und die modernen Jesusbilder (1909). Latham — Pastor Pastorum (1890).
Law — The Emotions of Jesus (1915).
Leighton — Jesus Christ and the Civilization of To-day (1907).
Matheson — Studies in the Portrait of the Messiah (1900).
Matheson — St. John’s Portrait of Christ (1910). McDowell — The School of Christ (1910).
Morgan — Crises of the Christ (1910).
Moule — Scenes in the Life of Our Lord (1909). Myers, M. — The Sinlessness of Jesus (1907).
Parker — The Inner Life of Christ. Three volumes (1882).
Parkin — The New Testament Portrait of Jesus (1908). Robertson, A. T. — The Pharisees and Jesus (1919). Robertson, J. A. — The Spiritual Pilgrimage of Jesus (1917).
Robinson, C. H. — Studies in the Character of Christ (1907).
Selbie — Aspects of Christ (1909).
Slattery — The Master of the World (1906).
Speer — The Man Christ Jesus (1896).
Stalker — Imago Christi. Seventh edition (1889).
Tissot — The Life of Our Lord Jesus Christ. Profusely Illustrated. Third edition (1899).
Thomas a Kempis — The Imitation of Christ.
122 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Ullmann — The Sinlessness of Jesus (1863). Warschauer — Jesus: Seven Questions.
Wendling — The Man of Galilee (1908).
^Wilson — Contrasts in the Character of Christ (1916).
11. The Miracles of Jesus
Abbott — New Testament Miracles.
Argyle — Duke of, The Reign of Law.
Arnold, M. — Literature and Dogma (1898).
Ballard — Miracles of Unbelief (1904).
Belcher— Our Lord’s Miracles of Healing (1872). Best— Beyond the Natural Order (1908).
Beth — The Miracles of Jesus (1907).
Bowne — The Immanence of God (1905).
Brewer — A Dictionary of Miracles (1897).
Bruce — The Miraculous Element in the Gospels (1892). Burton— Christ’s Acted Parables (1893).
Bushnell — Nature and the Supernatural.
Butler, Jos. — Analogy of Religion (1896).
Cairns — Christ the Central Evidence of Christianity. Cooke — The Credentials of Science the Warrant of Faith (1893).
Davies — The Miracles of Jesus (1913).
Duff and Allen — Psychic Research and Gospel Miracles (1902).
Fiebig — Jiidische Wundergeschichte d. neut. Zeitalter
c1911).
Gilbert — The Miracles in St. John’s Gospel and Their Teaching (1922).
Gordon— Religion and Miracle (1909)
Gore — Bampton Lectures (1891).
Habershon — Study of the Miracles (1910).
Headlam— The Miracles of the New Testament (1915). Hume — Enquiry Concerning the Human Understanding. New edition (1896).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 123
Hutchinson — -Our Lord’s Signs in St. John’s Gospel
(1892).
Huxley — Some Controverted Questions (1892). Huxley-— Science and Christian Tradition (1896). Illingworth — The Divine Immanence (1898). Illingworth — Gospel Miracles (1915).
Laidlaw — The Miracles of Our Lord (1892).
Lang — The Miracles of Jesus (1920).
Lyttleton — The Relation between Religion and Science. May — Miracles and Myths of the New Testament (1909).
Micklem — Miracles and the New Psychology (1923). Mozley- — On Miracles (1865).
M ulli n s — Why Christianity is True (1905).
Newman, J. H. — On Miracles (1870).
Rainy, Orr, and Dods — The Supernatural in Christian¬ ity (1894).
Saintyves — Le discernement du miracle (1909). Steinmeyer — The Miracles of Our Lord (1875).
Taylor, W. M. — The Gospel Miracles in their Relation to Christ and Christianity (1880).
Taylor, W. M. — The Miracles of Our Lord and Saviour (1900).
Thompson — Miracles in the New Testament (1911). Traub — Die Wunder im Neuen Testament (1905). Trench — Notes on the Miracles of Our Lord. New edition (1902).
Warfield — Counterfeit Miracles (1918).
Warrington — Can We Believe in Miracles? (1871). Wendland — Miracles and Christianity.
Westcott — Characteristics of the Gospel Miracles (1859).
White, A. D. — Warfare of Science with Religion (1897). Wright — The Finger of God (1903).
See Bible dictionaries and magazines.
124 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
12. The Parables of Jesus
Arnot — The Parables of Our Lord (1872).
Beyschlag — Die Gleichnisse des Herrn (1875). Bourdillon — The Parables of Our Lord.
Browne — The Parables of the Gospels (1915).
Bruce— -The Parabolic Teaching of Christ (1892). Bugge — Die Haupt-Parabeln Jesu (1903).
Calderwood — Parables of Our Lord (1880).
Dods — The Parables of Our Lord (1895).
Drummond — The Parabolic Teaching of Christ (1872). Fiebig — Altjiidische Gleichnisse und die Gleichnisse Jesu. Fiebig — Die Gleichnisse Jesu im Lichte der rabbin.
Gleichnissen (1912).
Goebel- — The Parables of Jesus (1884).
Habershon — A Study of the Parables (1904).
Hubbard — The Parables (1907).
Julicher — Die Gleichnisreden Jesu (1910).
Koch — Die Gleichnisse Jesu (1910).
Lang — Thoughts on Some of the Parables of Jesus (1905).
Lisco — On the Parables (1850).
Lithgow — The Parabolic Gospel (1914).
Miner — The Parabolic Teaching of Christ (1920). Murray — Jesus and His Parables (1914).
Resker — Our Lord’s Illustrations (1899).
Robinson — The Parables of Jesus in Their Relation to His Ministry (1921).
Salmond — The Parables of Our Lord.
Spanuth — Die Gleichnisse Jesu (1906).
Swete — Parables of the Kingdom (1920).
Tamm — Der Realismus Jesu in seinen Gleichnissen (1886).
Taylor — The Parables of Our Saviour (1886).
Thomson — The Parables and their Home (1895). Trench — Notes on the Parables of Our Lord. New edi¬ tion (1902).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
125
Weinel — Die Gleichnisse Jesu. 2 Aufl. (1904).
Young — The Illustrative Teachings of Jesus (1915).
See Bible dictionaries and magazines.
13. The Teaching of Jesus
Besides general works on Biblical Theology and Bible dictionaries.
(a) Teaching as a Whole.
Abbott — The Message of the Son of Man (1899). Adamson — Studies in the Mind of Christ (1898). Beardslee — Teacher-Training with the Master Teacher (1903).
Bischoff — Jesus und die Rabbinen (1905).
Bond — The Master Preacher (1910).
Bousset — Jesu Predigt im ihren Gegensatz zum Juden- tum (1892).
Bruce — The Galilean Gospel (1893).
Brun — Jesu Evangelium (1917).
Burrell — The Wonderful Teacher (1902).
Castor — Matthew’s Sayings of Jesus (1918).
Clarke — The Ideal of Jesus (1911).
Dalman — The Words of Jesus (1898).
Dalman — Jesus-Jeschua (Jesus und Judenthum, 1922). D’Arcy — Ruling Ideas of Our Lord (1901).
Deane — Rabboni (1921).
Decker — Christ’s Experience of God (1915).
Denney — Jesus and the Gospel (1908).
Du Bose — The Gospel in the Gospels (1904).
Evans, M. G. — What Jesus Taught According to the Gospels (1922).
Fullkrug — Jesus and the Pharisees (1904).
Garvie — Studies in the Inner Life of Jesus (1907). Gibson — Christianity to Christ (1885).
Gilbert — The Revelation of Jesus (1899).
Graves — What Did Jesus Teach? (1919).
1 26 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Hall — The Messages of Jesus (1901).
Horne — Jesus the Master Teacher (1920).
Horton — The Teaching of Jesus (1895).
Ihmels — Das Evangelium von Jesus Christus (1911). Jackson — The Table Talk of Jesus (1903).
Jackson — The Teaching of Jesus (1903).
King — The Theology of Christ (1903).
Knox— The Gospel of Jesus (1909).
Lancaster — The Creed of Christ (1905).
Mackintosh — Rabbi Jesus (1911).
Maclaren, Ian — The Mind of the Master (1896). Macfarland — Jesus and the Prophets (1905). McClelland — The Mind of Christ (1909).
McGee — Jesus the World’s Teacher (1907).
Meyer — Le Christianisme du Christ.
Montefiore — Some Elements in the Religious Teachings of Jesus (1910).
Picton — The Religion of Jesus (1893).
Robertson, James — The Teaching of Our Lord (1900). Robertson, A. T. — Keywords in the Teaching of Jesus (1906).
Robertson, A. T. — The Pharisees and Jesus (1920). Schaeder — Das Evangelium Jesu und das Evangelium von Jesu (1906).
Schaefer — The Supreme Revelation. Studies in the Synoptic Teachings of Jesus (1914).
Schneider — Jesus als Philosoph (1911).
Seeberg — Das Evangelium Christi (1905).
Selwyn — The Teaching of Christ (1915).
Skinner, Charlotte — The Master’s Message to Women (1895).
Smith — The Teaching of Christ in John (1904).
Speer — The Principles of Jesus (1905).
Stevens — The Teaching of Jesus (1901).
Stier — The Words of Jesus. Eight volumes (1869). Swete — Studies in the Teaching of Our Lord (1903). Tigert — Christianity of Christ and His Apostles (1905).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 127
Walker, W. L. — The Teaching of Christ in its Present Appeal (1904).
Walker, A. H. — Christ's Christianity (1882). Weinstock — Jesus the Jew (1902).
Weiss, J. — Predigt Jesu.
Wendt — The Teaching of Jesus. Two volumes (1892). Wunkhaus — Der Humor Jesu (1909).
(b) The Father and the Holy Spirit.
Crane — The Teaching of Jesus Concerning the Holy Spirit (1905).
Robertson, A. T. — The Teaching of Jesus Concerning God the Father (1904).
Swete — The Holy Spirit in the New Testament (1909). Walker — The Spirit and the Incarnation (1900).
(c) Christ's Idea of Himself.
See also 9.
Baldensperger — Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu. 2 Aufl. (1892).
Beardslee — Christ's Estimate of Himself.
Bernard — The Central Teaching of Christ (John 14-17) (1897).
Durell — The Self-Revelation of Our Lord (1910). Foster — Teaching of Jesus Concerning His Own Mission (1903).
Fritzsche — Das Berufsbewusstsein Jesu (1905).
Frovig — Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu (1918).
Hanel — Der Schriftbegriff Jesu (1919).
Hitchcock — The Psychology of Jesus (1907). Hoffmann — Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu (1904). Holtzmann, H. J. — Das Messianische Bewusstsein Jesu (1907).
Hoyt — Teaching of Jesus Concerning His Own Person (1907).
Kennedy — The Self-Revelation of Jesus Christ.
Kuhl — Das Bewusstsein Jesu (1908).
128 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Ross — The Self-Portraiture of Jesus (1904).
Schurer — Das Messianische Selbstbewusstsein Jesu Christi (1903).
Schwartzkopff — The Prophecies of Jesus Christ Relat¬ ing to His Death, Resurrection, Second Coming and Prophecy Fulfilled (1897).
Stalker — The Christology of Jesus (1901).
Stokes — What Jesus Christ Thought of Himself (1916).
Voelter — Jesus der Menschensohn oder das Berufs- bewusstsein Jesu (1914).
Streatfield — The Self -Interpretation of Jesus Christ (1907).
(d) The Kingdom and Eschatology.
Atzberger — Die Christliche Eschatologie (1890).
Bartmann — Der Himmelreich und sein Konig (1904).
Boardman — The Kingdom of God (1893).
Bruce — The Kingdom of God (1893).
Candlish — The Kingdom of God (1884).
Caven — Christ’s Teaching Concerning Last Things (1908).
Chafer — The Kingdom in History and Prophecy (1916).
Dewick — Primitive Christian Eschatology (1912).
Dickey — The Constructive Revolution of Jesus.
Dobschutz — The Eschatology of the Gospels (1910).
Durell — The Self-revelation of Our Lord (1910).
Emmet — Eschatological Questions in the Gospels (1916).
Erdman — The Return of Christ (1922).
Gandier — The Son of Man Coming in His Kingdom (1922).
Goodspeed, G. S. — Israel’s Messianic Hope to the Time of Jesus (1900).
Hall — Eschatology (1922).
Haupt — Die eschatologischen Aussagen Jesu in den syn- optischen Evangelien (1895).
Hogg — Christ’s Message of the Kingdom.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
129
Hooke — Christ and the Kingdom of God (1917). Jackson — The Eschatology of Jesus (1913).
Kolbing — Die bleidende Bedeutung der urchristlichen Eschatologie (1907).
Latimer — The Eschatology of Jesus (1913).
Manson — -Christ’s View of the Kingdom.
Mathews — The Messianic Hope of the New Testament (1905).
Muirhead — The Eschatology of Jesus (1904). Oesterley — The Doctrine of the Last Things (1908). Oesterley — The Apocalypse of Jesus (1912). Robertson, A. — Regnum Dei (1901).
Ross, J. J. — Our Glorious Hope (1922).
Sanday — The Life of Christ in Recent Research (1907). Schweitzer — The Quest of the Historical Jesus (1910). Scott, E. F. — The Kingdom and the Messiah (1911). Sharman — The Teaching of Jesus about the Future, ac¬ cording to the Synoptic Gospels (1909).
Stirling — Christ’s Vision of the Kingdom of Heaven (1913).
Titus — Jesu Lehre vom Reiche Gottes (1895).
Vos — Teaching of Jesus Concerning the Kingdom and the Church (1903).
Walker, W. L. — The Cross and the Kingdom as Re¬ vealed by Christ Himself in the Light of Evolution (1902).
Weiffenbach — Die Wiederkunftsgedanken Jesu (1873). Winstanley — Jesus and the Future (1913).
Worsley — The Apocalypse of Jesus (1912).
(e) Ethical and Social Problems.
For special treatises on the Sermon on the Mount, see lesson on that subject.
Bachmann — Die Sittenlehre Jesu (1904).
Briggs — The Ethical Teaching of Jesus (1904).
Cone — Rich and Poor in the New Testament (1902). Flugel — Die Sittenlehre Jesu. 2 Aufl. (1888).
ISO SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Gardner, C. S. — The Ethics of Jesus and Social Progress (1914).
Grimm — Die Ethik Jesu (1903). 2 Aufl. (1917).
Hall — The History of Ethics Within Organized Chris¬ tianity (1910).
Herrmann — Die sittlichen Weisungen Jesu (1904).
Herrmann — Faith and Morals (1904).
Jenks — Political and Social Significance of the Life and Teaching of Jesus (1906).
Jennings — The Social Teaching of Jesus (1915).
Jones, Griffith — The Economics of Jesus.
Jones, J. O. — Politics of the Nazarene (1901).
King — The Ethics of Jesus (1910).
Leighton — Jesus Christ and the Civilization of To-day (1907).
Mathews — The Social Teaching of Jesus (1897).
Peabody — Jesus and the Social Question (1901).
Peabody — Jesus Christ and the Christian Character (1905).
Preisker — Die Ethik der Evangelien und die judische Apokalyptik (1915).
Rauschenbusch — The Social Principles of Jesus (1916).
Sampey — The Ethical Teaching of Jesus (1900).
Savage — Jesus and Modern Life (1893).
Stalker — The Ethic of Jesus (1909).
Vedder — The Gospel of Jesus and the Problems of Democracy (1914).
Zenos — The Teaching of Jesus Concerning Christian Conduct (1905).
14. Lives of Christ for Children
Batchelor — Story of Jesus Told for Little Children (1905).
Bird — Jesus the Carpenter of Nazareth (1900).
Blackall — Stories about Jesus (1890).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
131
Forbush — Boy’s Life of Christ (1905).
Foster — The Life of Jesus Written for the Young (1866).
Geike — A Short Life of Christ. New edition (1914). Hodges — When the King Came (1904).
Newton, R. H.— The Light of the World (1893). Robertson, Ella B. — The Child’s Bible (1921). Sangster — The Sweet Story of Old (1904).
15. Poems about Christ
Arnold, Edwin — The Light of the World (1891). Chittenden — The Pleroma. A Poem of the Christ (1890).
Ford, C. L. — Lyra Christi. Third edition (1892).
Hoge, P. H. — The Divine Tragedy (1905).
Holland, J. G. — Christ and the Twelve (1876). Longfellow — The Divine Tragedy, or Christus. McDuff — The Story of Jesus in Verse (1893).
Milton — Paradise Regained.
Montgomery, Robert — Messiah.
Wesley — The Life of Our Lord Jesus Christ (1693).
16. Romances
Anonymous — Philo-christus (1878).
Brooks — A Son of Issachar (1890).
Burr — Aleph the Chaldsean ; or, The Messiah as Seen from Alexandria (1891).
Carus — The Crown of Thorns (1901).
Clarke — Life and Times of Jesus (1887).
Corelli — Barabbas (1893).
Davis — When Christ Was Here (1905).
Gardenhire — Lux Crucis (1904).
Jacobs — As Others Saw Him (1895).
Johnston, Annie Fellows — Joel, A Boy of Galilee (1896).
132 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Kingsley — Titus, A Comrade of the Cross (1894).
Moore — The Brook Kerith (1916).
Rhone — In the Days of the Son of Man (1903).
Stout — Lacanus, a Friend of Christ (1904).
Sue — The Silver Cross; or, The Carpenter of Nazareth (1898).
Van Dyke — The Story of the Other Wise Man (1899).
Wallace — Ben-Hur. A Tale of the Christ (1880).
Ward, Elizabeth Phelps — The Story of Jesus Christ. Popular edition (1901).
17. N on-Scriptural Accounts of Jesus
Andrews — Apocryphal Books of the Old and New Testa¬ ments (1908).
Barnes — Canonical and Uncanonical Gospels (1893).
Bauer — Das Leben Jesu im Zeitalter d. neut. Apokryphen (1909).
Cowper — The Apocryphal Gospels (1867).
Donohoo— -Apocryphal and Legendary Life of Christ (1903).
Gould, S. Baring — Lost and Hostile Gospels (1901).
Grenfell and Hunt — Logia of Jesus (1897).
Grenfell and Hunt — New Sayings of Jesus (1904).
Griffenhoofe — The Unwritten Sayings of Christ (1903).
Guerber— Legends of the Virgin and Christ (1896).
Hackwood — Christ Lore (1907).
Handmann — Das Hebraer Evangelium (1888).
Harris — The Newly-Recovered Gospel of St. Peter (1893).
Herford— Christianity in Talmud and Midrash (1903).
Hoennecke — Neutestamentliche Apokryphen (1904).
Hone — Apocryphal New Testament (1820).
Horder — The Newly-Found Words of Jesus (1905).
Jackson — Twenty-five Agrapha; or, Extra-Canonical Sayings of Our Lord (1900).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
133
Josephus — Antiquities, Bk. XVIII., ch. iii., § 3.
Krauss — Leben Jesu nach judischen Quellen (1905). Laible — Jesus Christus im Talmud (1900).
Lock and Sanday- — Two Lectures on the Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus (1889).
Mead — Sayings of Jesus (1897).
Nicholson— The Gospel according to the Hebrews.
Orr — New Testament Apocryphal Writings (1904).
Pick — The Apocryphal Life of Jesus (1887).
Pick — The Extra-Canonical Life of Christ (1903).
Pick — Paralipomena (1908).
Pick — Jesus and the Talmud (1913).
Preuschen— Antilegomena (1905).
Rawnsley — Sayings of Jesus (1905).
Resch — Aussercanonische Paralleltexte (1893).
Resch — Agrapha. 2 Aufl. (1906).
Ropes — Die Spriiche Jesu (1896).
Smith, D. — The Unwritten Sayings of Our Lord (1913). Swete — The Apocryphal Gospel of St. Peter (1893). Taylor, C. — The Oxyrhynchus Logia and the Apocryphal Gospels (1899).
Taylor, C. — The Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Tesus Found in 1903 (1905).
Warschauer — Jesus Saith (1905).
White — The Sayings of Jesus from Oxyrhynchus (1922).
LESSON I: BEGINNINGS OF THE GOSPELS AND PREPARATION FOR THE BIRTH
OF JESUS
Robertson’s Harmony, §§ 1-9.
Broadus’ Comm, on Matt. pp. 1-13.
Robertson’s Epochs in the Life of Jesus, Preface and pp. 1-5.
134 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim — Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah, Bk. II., chs. III. — V. ; D. Smith, In the Days of His Flesh, ch. I.; Robertson, Comm, on Matt. (Introduc¬ tion), Studies in Mark’s Gospel, and Luke the Historian.
1. About Harmonies of the Gospels. Harmony, pp.
253-4.
2. Note Luke’s Use of Sources. Footnote to Harmony,
p. 1.
3. About Synoptic Criticism. Harmony, pp. 255-6.
4. The Authorship of the Fourth Gospel. Harmony,
pp. 256-7.
5. The Jesus of History. Harmony, p. 258.
6. Distinguish the Introductions to the Gospels. Har¬
mony, footnote, p. 1.
7. John’s Use of the Term Logos. Harmony, footnote,
p. 2.
8. Comparison of the two genealogies in Matthew and
Luke.
Harmony, pp. 259-62 and footnotes to p. 4.
Broadus on Matt., pp. 1 and 2, 5-7.
9. Be able to state intelligently and in order the histori¬
cal events in Harmony, §§4-9. Be ready to point out places on the map.
10. Sources of the Infancy Stories. Harmony, foot¬
note, p. 5.
11. Form of the Names in Matthew’s Genealogy.
Broadus on Matt., p. 3.
12. Jesus and Christ.
Broadus on Matt., pp. 2, 10. Cf. Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8.
13. Joseph.
Broadus on Matt., p. 8, 9, 13.
14. Mary the Mother of Jesus.
Broadus on Matt., pp. 8-10.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
135
15. The prophecy quoted in Matt. 1 : 22 f . Broadus on Matt., pp. 11-13.
16. The Virginity of Mary.
Broadus on Matt., p. 13.
17. What is “the Problem of Jesus”? Epochs in the Life of Jesus, pp. 1-5.
LESSON II: THE BIRTH OF JESUS
Harmony, §§ 10-16.
Broadus on Matt., ch. II.
Robertson, Epochs in the Life of Jesus, pp. 8-14.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim — Life and Times, chs. VI.- VIII. ; D. Smith — In the Days of His Flesh, ch. I.
1. Give events, places, dates.
2. Probable Time of the Saviour’s Birth in the Light of
New Discoveries. Harmony, pp. 262-7.
3. Unconscious Influence of Augustus. Harmony, foot¬
note, p. 9.
4. Bethlehem. See Comm. (Broadus always meant
hereafter by this abbreviation) on Matt., ii., 1.
5. New Testament Psalms. Harm., p. 11.
6. Herod the King. Comm., pp. 15, 16, 18.
7. The Magi. Comm., pp. 16, 21 f.
8. The Star. Comm., ii., 2.
9. The Christ. Comm., ii., 4.
10. Chief priests and scribes. Comm., p. 18.
11. Four quotations. See Comm, on Matt., ii., 6, 15,
18, 23.
12. Slaughter of the babes. Comm, on Matt., ii., 16.
13. Sojourn in Egypt. Comm., ii., 13.
14. The return to Nazareth. Comm., p. 29.
15. The Virgin Birth of Jesus. Epochs, pp. 8-14.
136 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE VIRGIN BIRTH
(Besides books on the Incarnation, which see in bibli¬ ography, and cyclopaedia articles) :
Benson — The Virgin Birth of Our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ (1904).
Box — The Virgin Birth of Jesus (1916).
Briggs — The Incarnation of Our Lord (1902).
Brown— -The Gospel of the Infancy (1923).
Conrady — Die Quellen der canonischen Kindheitsge- schichte.
Gould, S. Baring — The Birth of Jesus (1885). Grautzmacher — The Virgin Birth (1907).
Hoben — The Virgin Birth (1903).
Knowling — Our Lord’s Virgin Birth (1907).
Kregher — Die jungfrausiche Geburt des Herrn (1900). Lobstein — The Virgin Birth of Christ (1903).
Machen — New Testament Account of the Birth of Jesus (Princeton Rev., 1905 and 1906).
Orr — The Virgin Birth of Christ (1901).
Oussani — The Virgin Birth and Modern Criticism (New York Review, 1907, pp. 313 fT. ) .
Peeters — L’Evangile de l’Enfance (1914).
Prestige — The Virgin Birth of Our Lord (1918). Ramsay — Was Christ Born at Bethlehem? (1898). Randolph — The Virgin Birth of Our Lord (1903). Resch — Das Kindheitsevangelium nach Matt, und Luk. Soltau — The Birth of Jesus Christ (1903).
Stewart — Our Lord’s Nativity and Birth (1905). Sweet — The Birth and Infancy of Jesus Christ (1907). Taylor — Historical Evidence for the Virgin Birth (1921).
OTHER BOOKS OF INTEREST
Adeney — The Women of the New Testament. Bernard— The Songs of the Nativity.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
137
Doyle — The Holy Family (1916).
Gurney — Nunc Dimittis (1895).
Huschke — Zeit der Geburt Jesu Christi (1840). Mackinlay — The Magi (1907).
Page — New Light from Old Eclipses (1890).
Sanday — Sacred Sites of the Gospels (1903).
Thomas — Our Record of the Lord’s Nativity (1900). Upham — Wise Men from the East (1869). Waddy-Moss — The Scene of Our Lord’s Life (1902). Wieseler — Chronological Synopsis (1877).
Zumpt — Das Geburtjahr Christi (1869).
LESSON III: THE LONG YEARS OF SILENCE
Harmony, §§ 17-19.
Comm., pp. 26-30.
Josephus, Ant., Bk. XVII., chs. viii.-xiii.
Robertson — Epochs in the Life of Jesus, pp. 6-8. For fuller treatment, see Edersheim, chs. IX. -X. ; D. Smith, ch. II.; Ragg, Plummer, or any commentary on Luke.
1. The term Judea. Comm, on Matt., ii., 22.
2. The successors of Herod the Great. Comm, on
Matt.,, ii., 22; Josephus, Ant., Book XVII., chs. • • • • • •
V1U.-X111.
(a) Herod’s last will, and way Archelaus received at Jerusalem. Comm, on Matt., and Jos., Ant., XVII., viii.
(b) Archelaus going to Rome, followed by Salome, Antipas, and others. Ant., XVII., ix.
(c) Meanwhile tumult reigns at Jerusalem. Ant., XVII., x.
(d) How Caesar decides the contest and exposes a false claimant. Ant., XVII., xi. and xii.
138 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
(e) Caesar’s advice to Archelaus, and how Archelaus took it. Ant., XVII., xiii.
3. Nazareth. Comm, on Matt., ii., 23.
4. The visit of Jesus the boy to Jerusalem. Harm.,
Section 18. State events, places, dates.
5. The Youth of Jesus. Comm, on Matt., p. 30 f . *
Harm., footnote, p. 14.
6. The First Glimpse of Jesus. Epochs, pp. 6-8.
SPECIAL BOOKS
Brough — The Early Life of Our Lord.
Doyle — The Holy Family (1916).
Durand — The Childhood of Jesus Christ (1911). Forbush — Boy’s Life of Christ (1905).
Meyers, C. — The Boy Jesus (1908).
Monod — The Childhood of Jesus (1889).
Morgan, G. Campbell — The Hidden Years at Nazareth (1898).
Ramsay — The Education of Christ (1902).
Smith — The Holy Child Jesus.
Stapfer — Jesus Christ Before His Ministry (1896). Stewart — Infancy and Youth of Jesus (1905).
Temple — The Boyhood Consciousness of Christ (1922). Van Dyke — The Childhood of Jesus Christ (1905). Wallace — Boyhood of Christ.
Waugh — The Child of Nazareth (1906).
The so-called manuscript by Notowitch, purporting to describe a visit of Jesus to India during this period, is a fraud.
LESSON IV: JOHN THE BAPTIST
Harmony, §§ 20-23.
Comm, on 3 : 1-12.
Robertson — Epochs in the Life of Jesus, pp. 14 and 15.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
139
For fuller discussion, see Robertson — John the Loyal, ch. V. ; Edersheim — Bk. II., ch. XI., and Bk. III., ch. XXVIII.
1. Events, places, dates. Harmony, §§20-23.
2. Luke’s Method of Dating the Event. Harmony,
p. 15.
3. Gospel account of John. Harm., footnote, p. 18.
Read all these references about John.
4. Early life of John. Comm, on Matt., iii., 1.
5. Wilderness of Judea. Comm, on Matt., p. 33.
6. Repent. Comm, on Matt., iii., 2.
7. Kingdom of Heaven. Comm., pp. 35 f.
8. Quotation in Matt., iii., 3. See Comm.
9. John’s dress and food. Comm, on Matt., iii., 4.
10. Meaning of baptize. Comm., p. 39-41.
11. Proselyte baptism. Comm., p. 41b f.
12. Pharisees and Sadducees. Comm, on 3 : 7-9.
13. John’s baptism and Christ’s baptism. Comm, on
Matt., xi., 11, cf. Josephus on John’s baptism. Comm., p. 36.
14. The Jordan. Comm., p. 42 ff.
15. Baptism with water or in water — unto repentance —
in the Holy Spirit and fire. Comm, on Matt, iii., 11. Note carefully exegesis from now on.
16. The Father’s Sanction of the Son. Epochs, pp. 14
and 15.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JOHN THE BAPTIST
Barde — Jean Baptiste (1892).
Behrendts — Studien iiber Zacharias-Apokryphen und Zacharias-Legenden (1859).
Behrendts — Die h. Ueberlieferung der Zach. und Joh. Apokryphen (1904).
Bernonilli — Johannes der Taiifer und die Urgemeinde (1918).
140 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Blakiston — John the Baptist and His Relation to Jesus (1912).
Boissonas — De Y Attitude de Jean Baptiste. Bornemann— Die Taufe Christi durch Johannes. Brandt — Ein talmudisches Zeugnis von dem Johannes (Zschr. f. Neut. Wiss., Heft 4, 1911).
Breest — Johannes der Taiifer (1881).
Breuil — Du Culte de S. Jean Baptiste.
Chenot— Jean le Baptiste.
Coleridge — Ministry of John the Baptist. Vol. I. of his Public Life of Our Lord.
Dibelius — Die urchristliche Ueberlieferung iiber Jo¬ hannes den Taiifer (1911).
Douglas — More than a Prophet (1905).
Duncan — Life, Character, and Acts of John the Baptist (1853).
Feather — John the Baptist.
Gale — The Prophet of the Highest.
Haupt — Johannes der Taiifer (1874).
Houghton — John the Baptist (1889).
Huxtable — The Ministry of St. John the Baptist. Innitzer — Johannes der Taiifer (1908).
Kohler — Johannes der Taiifer (1884).
Konrad— Johannes der Taiifer (1911).
Lofton — John the Baptist. A Poem (1905). McCullough — The Peerless Prophet (1888).
Meyer, F. B. — John the Baptist (1901).
Penick — More than a Prophet (1881).
P ottgiesser — Johannes der Taiifer und Jesus Christus (1911).
Reynolds — John the Baptist (1874).
Robertson, A. T. — John the Loyal. Popular edition (1923).
Rymington — Vox Clamantis (1882).
Simpson — The Last of the Prophets.
Smith— Johannes de Dooper (1908).
Stalker — The Two Johns (1895).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
141
On the baptismal controversy, see the ecclesiologies, Bible dictionaries, and various treatises like Broadus — -Immersion Essential to Christian Baptism.
LESSON V: CHRIST’S BAPTISM AND TEMPTATION
Harmony, §§24 and 25.
Comm, on Matt. 3: 13 — 4: 11.
Robertson— Epochs, pp. 15-23.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. II., ch. XII., and Bk. III., ch. I. ; D. Smith, chs. III.-IV.
1. Three lessons on the Beginnings of Our Lord’s Min¬
istry. Harmony, §§ 24-36.
2. The Year of Obscurity. Duration of this Early Min¬
istry. Harmony, footnote, p. 19.
3. Division of this Early Ministry. Harmony, p. 19.
4. Events, places, dates in this lesson. Harmony,
§§ 24-25.
5. Time of the Baptism of Jesus. Comm, on 3: 13.
6. Place of baptism of Jesus. Comm, on Matt., iii., 13.
7. Design of the baptism of Jesus. Comm, on Matt.,
iii., 14 f.
8. From the water, and the heavenly testimony. Comm.
on Matt., iii., 16 f. The Father’s Sanction of the Son. Epochs, pp. 14-18.
9. The words “tempt” and “devil.” How could Jesus
be tempted? Why should he be? Place of temp¬ tation. Comm, on Matt, iv., 1.
10. Tempted internally, or visibly and audibly. Comm.,
p. 62.
11. The fasting and the ministry of angels. Comm, on
Matt., iv., 2, 111.
12. Twofold meaning of each of the three recorded temp¬
tations, and our Lord’s reply. Meaning of the
142 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
term Son of God in Matt., iv., 3, cf., also iv., 8. Use of Scripture by Christ and Satan. Comm, on Matt., iv., 3 f., 5-7, 8-10.
13. Different order of the three temptations in Matthew
and Luke. Comm., p. 64b.
14. Progress in the three temptations according to Mat¬
thew’s order. Comm., p. 71a.
15. Three principal wrong courses proposed to Jesus.
Comm., p. 68b.
16. Three false views of the devil. Comm., p. 69a.
17. The Moral Issue in the Temptation. Epochs, 18-23.
18. Account of the Temptation in the Logia. Harmony,
footnote, p. 20.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE TEMPTATION OF JESUS
Barrett — The Temptations of Christ (1903).
Birks — God’s Champion, Man’s Example (1890).
Bury — Our Lord’s Preparation for the Messiahship (1909).
Dickson — The Temptation in the Desert.
Foxell — The Temptation of Jesus (1920).
Hicks — Addresses on the Temptation (1903).
Knight — The Temptation of Our Lord (1906). Krummacher — The Temptation of Christ.
Macleod — The Temptation of Our Lord.
Meyer, A. — Die Versuchung Jesu (1918).
Mill — Sermons on the Temptations (1875).
Murray — Studies in the Temptations of the Son of God (1916).
Painter — The Philosophy of Christ’s Temptation (1914).
Palmer — Thoughts on Our Lord’s Temptation (1901). Rawnsley — Our Lord’s Three Temptations (1901). Spitta — Die Versuchung Jesu (1907).
Stewart — The Temptations of Jesus (1903).
Vaughan — The Two Temptations (1872).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
143
LESSON VI : FROM BETHANY BEYOND JORDAN TO CAPERNAUM
Harmony, §§ 26-30.
Josephus, Ant., XVIII., ch. i., 1 — ch. v., 2. Robertson — Epochs, pp. 23-33.
Westcott or any comm, on John 1 : 19 — 2: 12.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., chs. II.-IV. ; D. Smith, chs. V.-VI.
1 Events, places, dates in the beginning of our Lord’s Ministry. Harm., §§26-30. Given only in John’s Gospel.
2. John the Baptist’s testimonies to Jesus and the four
successive days. Harm., footnote, p. 23 ; Epochs, pp. 26-28.
3. Jesus’ Testimonies to John the Baptist. Harmony,
footnote, p. 23.
4. Series of First Things. Harm., second footnote, p.
23 ; Epochs, pp. 28-33.
5. Receiving Jesus as the Messiah. Harm., footnote,
p. 24 ; Epochs, pp. 24 f .
6. The Johannine Presentation of Jesus. Epochs, pp.
23 f.
7. Josephus’ account of
(a) Cyrenius. Ant. XVIII., i., 1.
(b) Judas the Galilean and his new sect. XVIII., i.
(c) Herod Antipas and Philip. XVIII., ii., and iv., 5 and 6. Tetrarchs of what regions?
(d) Pilate and his outrages. XVIII., iii., 1 and 2, and v., 1 and 2. Pilate was Procurator of Judea A. D. 26-36.
(e) Jesus. XVIII., iii., 3. See War VI., v., 4. See what is Josephus’ true position on the Messiah.
(f) Aretas and his daughter’s trouble with her hus¬ band, Herod Antipas, and Herodias. Who was
144 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
this Herod Philip, husband of Herodias? Ant. XVIII., v., 1. Comm, on Matt., p. 314. Note the three Herods of the New Testament who are called Herod.
(g) John the Baptist’s baptism and death. Ant. XVIII., v., 2. Cf. Comm., p. 36a f.
(h) Banishment of the Jews from Rome to Sardinia. Jos., Ant., XVIII., iii., 5.
Roman Emperors during life of Christ:
Octavius reigned, with the title of Augustus, B. C. 27 — A. D. 14. Tiberius, his adopted son, reigned
A. D. 14-37.
Rulers in Judea:
Archelaus, Ethnarch of Judea, Samaria, and Idumea,
B. C. 4— A. D. 6.
Roman Procurators from A. D. 6 to A. D. 42, when a Herod again rules Judea as King, Herod Agrippa I.
Procurators again from 44 A. D. to 70 A. D. Procurators during life of Christ:
Coponius, A. D. 6-9.
Marcus Ambivius, A. D. 9-12.
Annius Rufus, A. D. 12-15.
Valerius Gratus, A. D. 15-26.
Pontius Pilate, A. D. 26-36.
Galilee and Perea remained under Herod Antipas (B. C. 4 — A. D. 39) all through Christ’s life; so did Philip (B. C. 4 — A. D. 34) have all this time Trachonitis and Iturea.
High Priests during Christ's life:
Mathias, B. C. 5.
Joseph, B. C. 4.
Joasar, B. C. 4.
Eleazar, B. C. 6.
Jesus, A. D. 6.
Ananus or Annas, A. D. 6.
Ishmael, A. D. 16
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
145
Eleazar, A. D. 17.
Simon, A. D. 18.
Caiaphas, A. D. 18 until about A. D. 36.
Note frequent changes in the High Priesthood by the civil authorities. Annas and Caiaphas held office long, and they had the esteem of the people in consequence. Annas lives till after Christ’s death and is called High Priest along with Caiaphas.
During Christ’s ministry the rulers whose authority he feels are Tiberius, Pontius Pilate, Herod Antipas, Philip and Caiaphas (High Priest). See dictionaries and cyclopaedias.
BOOKS ON THE TWO-WINE CONTROVERSY
In favor of two-wine theory — Temperance Bible Commentary; Samson, Bible Wines, with three supplements; Fowler, The Wines of the Bible.
Against the view — See Commentaries on John; Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopaedias ; Presbyterian Re¬ view for January, 1881 ; Bibliotheca Sacra for April and July, 1880; Baptist Quarterly Review for April and July, 1887.
LESSON VII: THE EARLY MINISTRY IN JUDEA AND SAMARIA
Harmony, §§ 31 — 36.
Josephus, War Bk., VII., vi.
Robertson, Epochs, pp. 33-40.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., chs. V.-VIII. ; D. Smith, chs. VII. -VIII ; Westcott or any comm, on Jo. 2 : 13 — 4 : 45.
1. Events, places, dates. Time of the passover. Har- mony, §§ 31-36.
146 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
2. Successive scenes of Jesus’ early ministry. Harm.,
footnote, p. 25.
3. The Cleansing of the Temple in the Synoptic Gospels.
Harmony, footnote, p. 25.
4. The Issue with the Jerusalem authorities. Epochs,
pp. 33-8.
5. An Interview with a Jewish scholar. Epochs, pp.
37-9.
6. Part of Jesus’ ministry parallel to that of John.
Harm., footnote, p. 26. Judean ministry ex¬ plains the latter disciples in Judea.
7. Place of John’s imprisonment. Harm., footnote, p.
27 ; Jos., War VII., vi. ; Comm, on Matt., xiv., 3.
8. Reason for John’s imprisonment. Harmony, § 34
and footnote to p. 27 ; Jos., Ant., XVIII., v., 2.
9. John and Jesus preaching to Samaritans. Harm.,
footnote, p. 27.
10. An Interview with a Samaritan Woman. Epochs,
pp. 39 f.
11. Jesus regarded as the Messiah. Harm., footnote,
p. 29.
12. Samaritans. Comm, on Matt., x., 5.
13. Why Jesus went to Galilee. Harm., p. 29,
SPECIAL BOOKS ON SAMARITANS AND NICODEMUS
Montgomery — The Samaritans.
Reid — Jesus and Nicodemus (1906).
Rothstein — Juden und Samaritaner (1908).
LESSON VIII : BEGINNING OF THE GALI¬ LEAN MINISTRY
Harmony, §§ 37-48.
Comm, on Matt. 4 : 12-25 ; 8 : 2-4, 14-17 ; 9 : 2-34. Robertson — Epochs, pp. 40-50.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
147
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, chs. IX.-XI., XIII.-XVII. ; D. Smith, chs. IX.-XIV., XVII.
1. Six lessons on the Great Ministry in Galilee. See
Harmony, §§ 37-71.
2. All by the Synoptic Gospels save one visit to Jeru¬
salem by Gospel of John (ch. 5). Harmony, p. 30. Comm, on Matt., pp. 71 f.
3. Outline of the Galilean Ministry in eight divisions.
Harmony, p. 30.
4. Length of the Great Galilean Ministry. Harmony,
footnote, p. 30.
5. Progress of Christ’s Ministry along three lines. Har¬
mony, footnote, p. 30.
6. Events, places, dates. §§ 37-48.
7. Galilee. Comm, on Matt., iv., 12.
8. The Call to Nazareth. Epochs, pp. 40-2.
9. Capernaum. Comm, on Matt., iv., 13; Harm., foot¬
note, p. 32 ; Epochs, pp. 42-5.
10. The quotation from Isaiah. Comm, on Matt.
4: 14-16.
11. The call to the four fishermen. Harm., footnote,
p. 33 ; Comm, on Matt., p. 76 f.
12. Sea of Galilee. Comm, on Matt., iv., 18.
13. The quotation in Matt., viii., 17. See Comm.
14. Great extent of our Lord’s work in healing and teach¬
ing. First of the three tours of Galilee. This one by Jesus himself accompanied by the four fishermen. Comm, on Matt., iv., 23 ; Harm., footnote, p. 36.
15. Synagogues. Comm, on Matt., iv., 23.
16. Reasons for commanding the healed not to tell.
Comm, on Matt., viii., 4; Epochs, pp. 45-50.
17. On fasting. Comm, on Matt., ix., 14-17.
18. Miracles of Jesus. Comm, on Matt., p. 80b, and
footnote to Comm., p. 275.
19. Leprosy. Comm, on Matt., viii., 2.
148 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
20. Publicans. Comm, on Matt., v., 46. Publicans and
Sinners. Comm, on Matt. 9 : 10.
21. Note Use of Parables. Harmony, §48.
SPECIAL BOOKS
Bruce — The Galilean Gospel (1893).
Merrill — Galilee in the Time of Christ (1901).
LESSON IX: THE SABBATH CONTROVERSY
Harmony, §§49-51.
Comm, on Matt. 12 : 1-14.
Robertson— -Epochs, pp. 51-6.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., ch. XII. ; D. Smith, chs. XV.-XVI. ; Westcott or any comm, on John.
1. Events, places, dates. §§49-51.
2. The feast of John, v., 1. Harm., footnote, p. 42, and
Harm., pp. 267-270.
3. Length of the Saviour’s Ministry. Harm., p. 42, pp.
267-270.
4. Jerusalem Ministry in John. Harmony, footnote to
p. 42.
5. Jesus accused of breaking the Sabbath, and on what
grounds. Harm., §§49-51.
6. Growing hostility to Jesus. Harm., footnote to p. 43
and p. 45 ; Comm., p. 263a; Epochs, pp. 51-6.
7. State and explain the eight arguments used by Jesus
in defense of his position on the Sabbath ques¬ tion. Harmony, §§49-51, and footnote to p. 45 ; Comm, on Matt., xii., 3-8.
8. Real position of Christ as to the Sabbath. Comm.,
p. 260b and 261a.
9. Situation as to the Sabbath under the New Testament
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 14>9
as to the change of day, its significance, and its method of observance. Comm., p. 261a.
10. Two extremes to which we are liable now. Comm., p. 266a.
BOOKS ON THE SABBATH QUESTION
Crafts — The Sabbath for Man (1892). Has full bibli¬ ography.
Flood y — Scientific Basis of Sabbath and Sunday (1908). Gamble — Sunday and the Sabbath (1902).
Love — Sabbath and Sunday.
Salmond — The Sabbath.
Taylor — The Sabbatic Question (1915).
Trevelyan — Sunday ( 1902) .
BOOKS ON CHRIST AND THE OLD TESTAMENT
Burrell — Teaching of Jesus concerning the Scriptures (1904).
Ellicott — Christus Comprobator.
Gamble — Christ and Criticism.
McIntosh — Is Christ Infallible and the Bible True? (1901).
Mead — Christ and Criticism.
Nicoll — The Church’s One Foundation; Christ and Re¬ cent Criticism (1901).
Noesgen — Aussagen des Neuen Testaments ueber den Pentateuch.
Rae— How Jesus Handled Holy Writ (1901).
Saphir — Christ and the Scriptures.
LESSON X : THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT Harmony, §§ 52-54.
Comm, on Matt. 12 : 15-21 ; 5 : 1 — 7 : 29.
150 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 56-71.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., ch. XVIII.; D. Smith, chs. XVII.-XVIII., or some of the books on the Sermon on the Mount or other commentaries on Matt, and Votaw in Hastings’ D. B.
1. Events, places, dates. §§ 52-54.
2. The four lists of the Twelve. Harmony, pp. 271-3;
Comm., p. 213.
3. The New Organization. Epochs, pp. 56-61.
4. Reasons for holding the discourses in Matthew and
Luke to be the same. Harm., footnote, p. 48, and Harm., p. 273-6. Cf. Comm, on Matt., p. 84.
5. Design of the discourse. Comm, on Matt., p. 84 f .
6. Analysis of the discourse. Harmony, § 54.
7. Relation of our Lord’s mission to the preceding reve¬
lation, that he came to complete it. Comm, on Matt., v., 17.
8. Christ’s conception of righteousness contrasted with
that of the Scribes and Pharisees. Comm, on Matt, v., 20.
9. Explain in the light of the two previous points the
six examples of Christ’s teaching : Matt., v., 21-26 (murder), 27-30 (adultery), 31-32 (di¬ vorce), 33-37 (oaths), 38-42 (retaliation), 43-48 (enemies). See Comm, on Matt.
10. State the general principle of Matt., vi., 1 (righteous¬
ness), and the three applications of it in verses 2-4 (alms), 5-15 (prayer), 16-18 (fasting). See Comm, on Matt.
11. Compare the “Lord’s Prayer” in Matthew and Luke
(§ 105), and show what inferences we may draw from the differences in form. Comm, on Matt., p. 131 f. How far is this prayer parallel in the Jewish books? Comm, on Matt., p. 132 f. Two
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
151
divisions of the prayer. Comm, on Matt., p. 133.
12. Analyze Matt., vi., 19-34 into two parts; 19-21
(treasures), 22 f. (the eye), 24 (two masters), 25-34 (food and raiment). Comm, on Matthew.
13. Judging others. Comm, on Matt., vii., 1.
14. The Golden Rule. Comm, on Matt., vii., 12.
15. The Declaration of Principles. Epochs, pp. 61-71.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE LORD’S PRAYER
(Selection from the enormous literature)
Anderson, Robert— The Lord’s Prayer.
Boardman, George Dana — Studies in the Model Prayer (1879).
Bourdaloue — The Lord’s Prayer (1894).
Chase, F. H. — The Lord’s Prayer in the Early Church (1891).
Dibelius — Das Vaterunser (1903).
Dods, Marcus — The Prayer that Teaches to Pray. New edition (1893).
Erb — The Lord’s Prayer (1906).
Farrar — The Lord’s Prayer (1893).
Gladden — The Lord’s Prayer (1881).
Gordon, S. D. — Jesus’ Habits of Prayer (1904).
Gore — Prayer and the Lord’s Prayer (1898). Goulbourn — The Lord’s Prayer (1898).
Hall, Newman — The Lord’s Prayer. Third edition (1897).
Howrie — A Comment on the Lord’s Prayer (1908). Jones, J. D. — The Model Prayer. Third edition (1904). Maurice, F. D. — The Lord’s Prayer. New edition (1893).
McNeile — After This Manner Pray Ye (1916).
Miller, J. R. — The Golden Gate of Prayer (1900). Morrison — The Lord’s Prayer and the Prayer of Our Lord (1917).
152 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Poteat, E. M. — The Religion of the Lord’s Prayer (1914).
Ruskin, John — The Lord’s Prayer and the Church.
Third edition (1896).
Slattery — How to Pray (1920).
Stubbs — Social Teaching of the Lord’s Prayer. New edition (1900).
Van Dyke, H. J. — The Lord’s Prayer (1871). Vaughan, C. J. — The Lord’s Prayer (1876).
Whyte — Lord, Teach Us to Pray (1922).
BOOKS ON THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT
(Brief selection)
Achelis — Die Bergpredigt (1875).
Augustine — The Exposition of the Sermon on the Mount and the Harmony of the Evangelists. Trans¬ lated by Findlay and Salmond in 1873. Trench’s translation (1869).
Bacon, B. W. — The Sermon on the Mount: Its Literary Structure (1902).
Baumgartner — Bergpredigt und Kultur der Gegenwart (1921).
Bischoff — Jesus und die Rabbinen (1905).
Blauvelt — Ultimate Ideals (1917).
Boardman, Geo. D. — -Studies in the Mountain Instruc¬ tion (1880).
Bossuet — The Sermon on the Mount. Translated by Capes (1900).
Bradbury — The Beatitudes (1879).
Carpenter, W. Boyd — The Great Charter of Christ (1900).
Devine — The Religion of the Beatitudes (1918).
Duncan — The Inheritors of the Kingdom (1902).
Dykes — The Beatitudes of the Kingdom. New edition (1887).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
153
Findlay, J. A. — The Realism of Jesus (1922).
Fletcher — The Sermon on the Mount and Practical Politics (1911).
Foston — The Beatitudes and the Contrasts (1911).
Friedlander — The Jewish Sources of the Sermon on the Mount (1911).
Glover — The Beatitudes (1888).
Gore — The Sermon on the Mount. New edition (1904),
Griffith-Jones — The Sermon on the Mount (1903).
Grauert — Die Bergpredigt (1900).
Heinrici — Die Bergpredigt (1905).
Jones, J. D. — The Way into the Kingdom (1900).
Kaiser — Die Bergpredigt des Herrn (1901).
Luther, Martin — Comm, on Sermon on the Mount. English translation (1854).
Lyttleton — Studies in the Sermon on the Mount (1905).
Mackintosh — Christ and the Jewish Law (1885).
Maclaren, A. — Message from the King (1904).
McAfee — The Sermon on the Mount (1910).
Moberley — Fifteen Sermons on the Beatitudes. Third edition (1870).
Rashdall — Conscience and Christ (1916).
Robinson — Studies in the Teaching of the Sermon on the Mount (1922).
Shearer — The Sermon on the Mount (1906).
Schenck — The Ten Commandments and the Lord’s Prayer (1902).
Shorthouse — The Men of the Beatitudes (1904).
Stalker — The Ethic of Jesus.
Steinmeyer — Die Rede des Herrn auf dem Berge (1885).
Strekking — Die Bergrede (1914).
Stubbs — Christ and Economics in the Light of the Ser¬ mon on the Mount (1893).
Tait — The Charter of Christianity (1886).
Tholuck — A Commentary on the Sermon on the Mount (1860).
154 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Vaughan — Characteristics of Christ’s Teaching Drawn from the Sermon on the Mount. Seventh edition (1884).
Votaw — Sermon on the Mount. In Vol. V. of Hastings, D. B.
Weinel — Die Bergpredigt (1920).
lWesley, John — Discourses on the Sermon on the Mount. New edition (1873).
LESSON XI: GOING TO WORK WITH THE
TWELVE
Harmony, §§ 55-63.
Comm, on Matt. 8:1, 5-13 ; 11 : 2-30; 12 : 22-50. Robertson — Epochs, pp. 71-80.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., chs. XIX.-XXII. ; D. Smith, chs. XX., XXIV.
1. Events, places, times. §§ 55-63.
2. Faith of a heathen commander. Comm, on Matt.,
viii., 10. Cf. also Comm., p. 177.
3. Spread of Jesus’ fame and why. Harm., footnote,
p. 57.
4. Despair of John the Baptist. Epochs, pp. 71-4.
5. Design of John’s Message. Comm, on Matt., xi., 2 f.
6. Where was John, and where was Jesus? Harm.,
footnote, p. 57.
7. Relation of John’s Mission to that of Jesus. Comm.
on Matt., xi., Ilf.
8. Rejection of both John and Jesus. Comm, on Matt.,
xi., 16-19.
9. Hades. See Comm, on Matt., xi., 23, and Hell-fire,
Comm., p. 103 f.
10. The Son’s Relation to the Father. Epochs, pp. 74 f .
11. Jesus as the Great Teacher. Comm, on Matt., xi.,
27 f . ; Harmony, footnote to p. 59.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
155
12. The woman anointing the Savior’s feet. Harm., foot¬
note to p. 60.
13. Second circuit of Galilee, taking the Twelve with
him. Harm., § 60, and footnote to p. 61 ; Epochs, pp. 78 f .
14. The busy day. §§61-66. Harm., p. 61.
15. The blasphemous accusation. § 61. Comm, on
Matt., xii., 23-32 ; Harmony, footnote to p. 61 ; Epochs, pp. 77-80. Note parables in § 61.
16. Claim of Jesus to be Messiah, Matt., xii., 28.
17. The sign of Jonah. Comm, on Matt., xii., 40, and
footnote.
18. “This Wicked Generation.” Comm, on Matt., xii.,
45.
19. Mother and brethren. Comm, on Matt., xii., 46-50.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON JESUS* ALLUSION TO JONAH
Crane — Hard Sayings of Jesus Christ. Second edition (1901).
Kennedy — Book of Jonah.
McGarvey — Jesus and Jonah (1896).
Trumbull — Nineveh.
LESSON XII: THE FIRST GREAT GROUP OF
PARABLES
Harmony, § 64.
Comm, on Matt. 13.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 80-3.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., ch. XXIII. ; D. Smith, ch. XXL, or some of the books on the Parables of Jesus in the Bibliog¬ raphy.
1. Events, places, times. § 64. Still in the Busy Day. Note outline of events.
156 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
2. Jesus’ New Style of Teaching. Epochs, pp. 80-3.
3. Meaning and various uses of the term parable.
Comm, on Matt., xiii., 3.
4. Our Lord’s design in employing parables. Comm, on
Matt., xiii., 3.
5. Four things to be done in the interpretation of any
parable. Comm, on Matt., p. 284.
6. What isolated parables have been given heretofore?
Comm, on Matt., p. 285.
7. State the three leading groups of our Lord’s para¬
bles. Comm, on Matt., p. 285 ; Harm., footnote, p. 64.
8. Mention the ten parables in this group, and divide
them into five pairs. Comm, on Matt., p. 294; Harmony, footnote, p. 70.
9. Give the general aim of
(a) The Sower. Comm, on Matt., xiii., 18-23.
(b) The Seed Growing of Itself. Mark iv., 26-29. Any comm, on Mark.
(c) The Tares. Comm, on Matt., p. 299 f. and p. 302.
(d) The Net. Comm., p. 306 f.
(e) The Mustard Seed. Comm, on Matt., xiii. 31 f.
(f) The Leaven. Comm, on Matt., p. 297 f.
(g) The Hidden Treasure. Comm, on Matt., p. 304 f.
(h) The Precious Pearl. Comm, on Matt., p. 305 f.
(i) The Lamp. Comm, on Matt. 5:15 (or Mark 4: 21-Luke 8:16).
(j) The Householder. Comm, on Matt. 13: 51-53.
LESSON XIII : REMAINDER OF THE BUSY DAY AND CLOSE OF GALILEAN CAMPAIGN
Harmony, §§ 65-71.
Comm, on Matt. 8:18, 23-34; 9:1, 35; 11:1; 13:54-8; 14:1-12.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
157
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 83-9,
For full discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., chs. XXIV., XXV., XXVII., XXVIII.; D. Smith, chs. XXL, XXV., XXVI.
1. Events, places, times. §§65-71.
2. Jesus in heathen territory. Epochs, pp. 83-5.
3. The Gadarenes (Matt.), and the Gerasenes (Mark
and Luke). Harm., footnote to p. 71, and Comm, on Matt., viii., 28.
4. Two demoniacs or one. Comm, on Matt., viii.,
28.
5. Details by Mark in § 66 not in Matthew and Luke,
illustration of Mark’s vividness.
6. Devils or demons. Comm, on Matt., viii., 31.
7. Reality of the demoniacal possession. Comm, on
Matt., p. 189 f.
8. Our Lord’s destroying property. Comm, on Matt.,
p. 192.
9. Placing of § 67. Harmony, footnote to p. 74.
10. A second visit to Nazareth, § 69. Footnote to
Harm., p. 77 ; Comm, on Matt., p. 309 ; Epochs, pp. 85 f.
11. Our Lord’s brothers and sisters. Comm, on Matt.,
pp. 310-312. State the three theories, and which seems to have the best of the argument.
12. Third circuit of Galilee, sending the Twelve before
him. § 70, and footnote, p. 78 of Harm. ; Epochs, pp. 86-89.
13. Prayer for laborers. Comm, on Matt., ix., 37 f.,
and x., 1.
14. Details of the instructions to the Twelve. Comm.
on Matt., x., 6 ff., 9 f ., 11, 16, 19 f., 23.
15. Herod Antipas jealous of Jesus. Comm, on Matt.,
xiv., 2; Harmony, footnote to p. 82. Why John is in prison. - Comm., p. 317 ; Harmony, foot¬ note to p. 82.
158 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
16. Why Herod had not at once slain John. Comm, on
Matt., xiv., 5.
17. The Dancing of Salome. Comm, on Matt., p. 318.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON DEMONOLOGY
Alexander— Demoniac Possession (1902).
Davis — Magic, Divination, and Demonology.
Nevius — Demon Possession and Allied Themes (1894). Has extensive bibliography.
Thompson— The Devils and Evil Spirits of Babylonia ,(1903).
LESSON XIV: THE FIRST THREE WITH¬ DRAWALS FROM GALILEE
Harm., §§ 72-79.
Comm, on Matt., 14: 13-15:38.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 89-104.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., chs. XXIX. -XXXIII. ; D. Smith, chs. XXVII.- XXXV.
1. How much of the ministry gone, and how long till
the end. Harmony, p. 85 and footnote.
2. Length of this season of retirement. Time of year.
Harm., p. 85 and footnote.
3. How many withdrawals and whither (Bethsaida,
Tyre and Sidon, Decapolis, Caesarea Philippi). Harm., p. 85 and footnote.
4. Out of Herod’s territory, and to mountains. Harm.,
p. 85.
5. Five reasons for retiring from Galilee. Harm.,
footnote, p. 85, and Comm, on Matt., p. 322.
6. Events, places, dates, in the first three withdrawals.
§§ 72-79.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
1 59
7. First withdrawal to Bethsaida, § 72. What Beth-
saida? Harm., footnote to p. 86. Note that the first effort to gain rest failed.
8. Feeds the multitude. Comm, on Matt., xiv., 13 f.
place, 16, 19-21.
9. Effect on the multitude and on the Twelve. Comm.
on Matt., p. 326.
10. Jesus and the Twelve quitting the scene. Comm, on
Matt., xiv., 22-27, and second footnote on p. 327.
11. Walking on the water. Comm, on Matt., xiv., 28-31.
12. State leading thoughts of § 76.
13. The Galileans and a spiritual Messiah. Epochs, pp.
89-93.
14. The tradition of the elders, etc., § 77, comm, on
Matt., xv., 2, and footnote there as to Mark’s further statements.
15. Jesus’ reply. Comm, on Matt., xv., 3-6, 11, 17-20;
Epochs, pp. 93-97.
16. Reason for special training of the Twelve. Epochs,
pp. 98-100.
17. The second retirement, § 78. Comm, on Matt., xv.,
21, 24 f . ; Epochs, pp. 100-102; Harmony, foot¬ note to p. 94.
18. The third retirement, § 79. Comm, on Matt., xv.,
29; Epochs, pp. 102-4; Harmony, p. 95, foot¬ note.
19. Feeding the multitude twice. Comm, on Matt., p.
346; Harmony, p. 96, footnote.
See Spitta — Jesus und die Heidenmission (1909).
LESSON XV: THE FOURTH RETIREMENT
Harmony, §§ 80-84.
Comm, on Matt., 15:39-16:28.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 104-111.
160 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. III., chs. XXXVI., XXXVII. ; D. Smith, ch. XXXI.
1. Events, places, times. §§ 80-84.
2. Magadan and Bethsaida. Harm., footnote, p. 97, and
Comm, on Matt., xv., 39.
3. Renewed hostility from Jewish leaders. Harm., sec¬
ond footnote, p. 97; Comm, on Matt., 16:1; Epochs, pp. 104-106.
4. Sadducees and Christ. Comm., p. 347.
5. Jesus’ warning about the Pharisees, Sadducees, and
Herod, and the slowness of the disciples to un¬ derstand. Comm, on Matt., xvi., 5-12. Union of Sadducees, Pharisees, and Herod against Jesus.
6. The withdrawal to Caesarea Philippi. Comm, on
Matt., xvi., 13.
7. Caesarea Philippi. Comm, on Matt., p. 351 f.; Har¬
mony, p. 98, footnote.
8. The disciples declare Jesus to be the Messiah.
Harm., footnote, p. 99; comm, on Matt., xvi., 15 and 16; Epochs, pp. 107-109.
10. Jesus’ reply. Comm, on Matt., xvi., 18 f., A, B, C,
D ; Harmony, p. 100, footnote.
11. They must not tell others he is the Messiah. Comm.
on Matt., xvi., 20.
12. Jesus begins plainly to foretell his death and resur¬
rection, § 83 ; comm, on Matt., xvi., 21 ; Epochs, pp. 109-111; cf. instances before this. §31, §§ 48 and 62. Cf. also §§ 84, 85, 86, 88, 96, 99, 101, 108, 113, 125, 128, 130, 132, 137, 139, 140, 141, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152.
13. Peter rebuked. Comm, on Matt., xvi., 23.
14. Conditions of following Jesus. Comm, on Matt.,
xvi., 24-26.
15. Meaning of the Saviour’s coming in Matt., xvi., 27 f. For books on “church,” see Dargan’s Ecclesiology
THE LIFE OF CHRIST l6l
and Hiscox’s New Directory for Baptist Churches.
LESSON XVI: THE CLOSE OF THE SEASON
OF RETIREMENT
Harmony, §§ 85-95.
Comm, on Matt. 17:1 — 18:35; 8:19-22. Robertson — Epochs, pp. 111-119.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. IV., chs.
I.-III. ; D. Smith, XXXII., XXXIII.
1. Events, places, times. §§ 85-95.
2. Time, place and manner of the transfiguration, Har¬
mony, § 85 ; and footnote to p. 102 and to p. 103 ; comm, on Matt., beginning of ch. xvii., and on xvii., 1-4.
3. Design of the transfiguration. Comm, on Matt., xvii.,
9; Epochs, pp. 111-114.
4. Coming of Elijah before the Messiah. Comm, on
Matt., 17:10-13; Harmony, p. 104, footnote.
5. The difficulty of the disciples about the demoniac
boy. Comm, on Matt., xvii., 19 f.
About fasting and verse 21. Comm, on Matt. 17 : 21.
6. The poll tax for the temple. Comm, on Matt., xvii.,
24-27.
7. Difficulty about death of Christ. Matt., xvii., 9 and
22; Epochs, pp. 114-117.
8. The object lesson in humility. Comm, on Matt.,
xviii., 1-9.
9. Their angels. Comm, on Matt., xviii., 10.
10. Winning back an erring brother. Forgiveness of per¬
sonal injury. Comm, on Matt., xviii., 15-25.
11. The word church in xviii., 17 f. Comm, on Matt.
Cf. Matt, xvi., 18. Two uses of the word in the New Testament, as illustrated by these two pas¬ sages.
162 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
12. Restraint and Stimulus. Comm, on Matt., viii., 20 f .
13. The Son of Man. Comm, on Matt., p. 185. Cf.
Son of God. Comm, on Matt. 4 : 3. Also pp. 329 and 353.
14. Light advice from the brothers of Jesus. Epochs,
117 f.
15. Jesus facing Jerusalem. Epochs, pp. 118 f.; Har¬
mony, p. 113, footnote.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE TRANSFIGURATION
Beet, W. E. — The Transfiguration. New edition (1915). Gunsaulus — The Transfiguration (1886).
Vaughan, W. — The Transfiguration of Our Lord. Sec¬ ond edition (1892).
LESSON XVII : THE GREAT CONFLICT IN JERU¬ SALEM AT THE FEAST OF TABERNACLES
Harmony, §§96-101.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 120-125.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. IV., chs. VI.-X. ; D. Smith, ch. XXXVII.; Robertson, The Pharisees and Jesus, ch. II; Westcott or any comm, on John 7 : 11 — 10:20.
1. Location and time of this closing ministry. Harm.,
p. 114.
2. John and Luke furnish exclusive account of this
period till the last journey toward Jerusalem. Harmony, p. 114.
3. Time and meaning of the Feast of Tabernacles. See
comm, on John or Bible Dictionary.
4. Three journeys toward Jerusalem. On the com¬
bination of Luke and John for this period, see Harm., pp. 276-279.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 163
5. The first of these journeys toward Jerusalem. § 95,
and beginning of § 96.
6. Events, places, times. §§ 96-101.
7. Attitude in Jerusalem toward Jesus before he comes.
Epochs, pp. 120 f.
8. Different Groups at the Feast in John 7. Harmony,
p. 114.
9. The Jerusalem Conspirators Outwitted at Home.
Epochs, pp. 121-5.
10. Union of both Parties in the Sanhedrin against
Jesus. Harmony, p. 115, footnote. Read also Chapter II of The Pharisees and Jesus (Rob¬ ertson).
11. The story of the adulterous woman. Harm., foot¬
note, p. 115. See Bibliography for literature on the Agrapha of Jesus.
12. Note that this entire lesson is from John. Cf. the
First and Second Passovers, § 31 and § 49. John supplies our knowledge of the Jerusalem minis¬ try of Jesus before the last passover.
LESSON XVIII : WITHDRAWAL FROM JERUSA¬ LEM INTO JUDEA AND RETURN TO FEAST OF DEDICATION.
Harmony, §§ 102-111.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 126-128.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. IV., chs. XI. -XIII. Ragg, Plummer or any comm, on Luke’s Gospel.
1. The Early Judean Ministry given by John. Har¬
mony, §§ 31-33.
2. This Later Judean Ministry (given by John and
Luke) is similar in many things to the Great Galilean Ministry. Harm., pp. 114, 120, 129; Epochs, pp. 126 f .
164 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
3. Time embraced in this Later Judean Ministry.
Harm., p. 114.
4. Events, places, times. §§ 102-111.
5. The two Bethanys. Harm., footnote, p. 122.
6. Repetition of the model prayer. § 105, and first
footnote in Harm., p. 123.
7. Repetition of the blasphemous accusation. § 106 and
second footnote in Harm., p. 123.
8. Series of Discourses in § 108. Harmony, footnote to
p. 126.
9. Time of the Feast of Dedication. Harmony, § 111.
10. Why Jesus in Jerusalem Now. Epochs, p. 128.
LESSON XIX: FROM BETHANY BEYOND JOR¬ DAN TO THE RAISING OF LAZARUS AT BETHANY NEAR JERUSALEM.
Harmony, §§ 112-119.
Robertson-— Epochs, pp. 129-134.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. IV., chs. XIV., XVIII., XXL ; D. Smith, chs. XXXVIII., XXXIX; Westcott on John, Plummer on Luke or others comms. See also J. D. Jones — The Lord of Life and Death (1919).
1. Events, places, times. §§ 112-119.
2. Second Withdrawal from Jerusalem and Why.
Harmony, § 112, and footnote to p. 131. Cf. the four withdrawals from Galilee. Reception in Bethany in Perea. Epochs, pp. 129-131.
3. The Later Perean Ministry Divided into a Second
(§§ 112-117) and a Third (§§ 120-125) by the Raising of Lazarus at Bethany near Jerusalem (§§ 118-119). Harmony, footnote to p. 131.
4. Length of the Later Perean Ministry. Harmony, p.
131 and second footnote.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
165
5. The Second Perean Ministry. By John and Luke.
§§112-117. Cf. §§26-28 for the first Perean Ministry as given by John.
6. Length of this Second Perean Ministry. Harm.,
footnote, p. 131.
7. Jewish Meals. Harm., footnote, p. 133.
8. The Second Great Group of Parables. §§ 114-117.
9. The Second Journeying towards Jerusalem, and
why. § 118 and footnote to p. 137. This time not through Samaria as in § 95. Special reasons for it then. But now in Perea.
10. The Sanhedrin in Desperation. Harmony, § 119.
Epochs, pp. 131-133.
11. The Third Withdrawal from Jerusalem. Now to the
hills around Ephraim. § 119. Jerusalem now more dangerous than Galilee had been. Not long till the last Passover, and lines closing around the Master. Epochs, p. 133 f. Cf. Jones, J. D. — The Lord of Life and Death. Ex¬ position of John xi. (1920).
LESSON XX: THE LAST JOURNEY TO
JERUSALEM
Harmony, §§ 120-127.
Comm, on Matt. 19 and 20.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 134-137.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. IV., chs. XIX.-XX., XXII.-XXIV. ; D. Smith, ch. XL.
1. Events, places, times. §§ 120-127.
2. The third journey toward Jerusalem. § 120. Cf.
§ 128a.
3. Course of this journey from Ephraim to Jerusalem.
Harm., footnote, p. 139.
4. Combination of Matthew and Mark with Luke from
166 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
now on. Harm., footnote, p. 139 and 141; pp. 276-279; comm, on Matt., p. 393 f.
5. A Third Perean ministry, §§ 122-125. Given by
all the Synoptists. See Harm., footnotes, pp. 141, 143 and 147.
6. Beyond Jordan or Perea. Comm, on Matt., p. 395.
7. Jesus Going to Face the Issue. Epochs, pp. 134-137.
8. “Divorce for every cause.” Comm, on Matt., xix.,
3. Cf. also comm, on Matt., v., 31 f.
9. “For your hardness of heart.” Comm, on Matt.,
xix., 7-9. Cf. also comm, on Matt., v., 32. Cf. Luke xvi., 18; § 117.
10. Details in Matt., xxi., 6-8. Comm., p. 426.
11. “Little Children,” and “of such.” Comm, on Matt.,
pp. 401-404.
12. Christ’s teaching about poverty. Comm, on Matt.,
xix. , 21.
13. “Through a needle’s eye.” Comm, on Matt., xix.,
24.
14. “In the regeneration.” Comm, on Matt., xix., 28.
15. “First shall be last,” and design of the following
parable.
16. Text of Matt., xx., 16. Comm, on Matt., xix., 30.
17. Jesus foretelling his death and the request of James
and John. Harmony, § 125; Comm, on Matt.,
xx. : 17-28.
18. Sketch of Jericho. Comm, on Matt., p. 420; comm.
on Matt., xx., 17-28.
19. Discrepancies as to place and number healed at
Jericho. Harm., footnote, p. 149, and comm, on Matt., xx., 29 f.
20. Parable of the Pounds, not same as the Parable of
the Talents. Harm., § 127 and footnote, p. 150.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
167
LESSON XXI: SUNDAY AND MONDAY OF
THE LAST WEEK
Harmony, §§ 128a-130.
Comm, on Matt. 21 :1-17.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 137-140.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. V., chs.
I.-II. ; D. Smith, ch. XLI.
Westcott or other comms. on John 12.
1. Time of the Last Public Ministry. Harmony, p. 152. 2- Date of our Saviour’s death. Harm., footnote, p. 152.
3. From Jericho to Bethany, time Friday, and descrip¬
tion of Jerusalem. Comm, on Matt., pp. 422- 424, and map.
4. Various visits to Bethany. Harm., second footnote,
p. 152. Spends Saturday in Bethany. Reason for following Mark and not John here. Har¬ mony, third footnote.
5. The Mount of Olives. Comm, on Matt., p. 424.
6. Events, places, times. Sunday, Monday. §§ 128a-
130.
7. The Challenge to Jerusalem. Epochs, pp. 137-139;
Harmony, last footnote on p. 152.
8. The prophecy in Matt., xxi., 4 f . Comm., p. 425.
9. “Upon an ass and upon a colt.” Comm, on Matt.,
xxi., 5.
10. Details in Matt., xxi., 6-8. Comm., p. 426.
11. The Welcome in Jerusalem. Comm., p. 427.
12. Second cleansing of the temple. Comm, on Matt.,
xxi., 5; Harmony, footnote to p. 156.
13. Description of the temple courts. Comm., pp, 429 f.
14. “Out of the mouth of babes and sucklings.” Comm.
on Matt., xxi., 16.
15. The road between Jerusalem and Bethany. Comm.
on Matt., p. 432 f.
168 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
16. The barren fig tree. Comm, on Matt., xxi., 19.
17. A foretaste of the struggle. Epochs, p. 139 f.
18. The Rejection of Jesus by the Jews. Harmony, foot¬
note to p. 158.
LESSON XXII: THE LAST DAY IN CHRIST’S
PUBLIC MINISTRY
Harmony, §§ 131-138.
Comm, on Matt. 21 : 19-23 : 39.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 140-143.
For fuller discussion, see Robertson, The Pharisees and Jesus, chs. II and III; Edersheim, Bk. V., chs. III.-V. ; D. Smith, chs. XLII.-XLIII.
1. Events, places, time. §§ 131-138. Details of this
Tuesday. Harmony, footnote to p. 159.
2. Power of faith. Comm, on Matt., xxi., 20-22.
3. The victorious debate. Epochs, pp. 141-143.
4. The attack of the Sanhedrin. Comm, on Matt. 21 :
23 ; Harmony, footnote to p. 160.
5. The defense of Jesus. Comm, on Matt. 21:24 —
22 : 14.
6. The third group of parables. § 132. General mean¬
ing of each of these three parables. See comm, on Matt, and Harmony, second footnote to p. 160.
7. The attack of the Pharisees and the Herodians. De¬
scription of the Herodians. Comm, on Matt. 22: 15-17.
8. “The Things of Caesar and the Things of God.”
Comm, on Matt., xxii., 21 ; Harmony, footnote to p. 164.
9. Question of the Sadducees and reply of Jesus.
Comm, on Matt., xxii., 30-32; Harmony, foot¬ note to p. 165.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST 1 69
10. Question of the lawyer and the reply of Jesus.
Comm, on Matt., xxii., 34-40.
11. Christ’s final question to which they could not reply.
Comm, on Matt., xxii., 43-46.
12. The authorship of Ps. 110. Comm, on Matt., p. 459 f.
13. Rabbis as successors of Moses. Comm, on Matt.,
p. 464.
14. Phylacteries. Comm, on Matt., xxiii., 5-7.
15. Rabbi. Comm, on Matt., xxiii., 8.
16. Proselytes. Comm, on Matt., xxiii., 15.
17. The irony of Jesus. Comm, on Matt., xxiii., 23-33;
Harmony, footnote to p. 169.
18. Zacharias the son of Barachias. Comm, on Matt.,
xxiii., 35.
19. A mournful apostrophe to Jerusalem. Comm, on
Matt., xxiii., 37-39.
20. Christ’s Last Appearance in the Temple. Harmony,
footnote to p. 172.
See Abbott — The Last Days of Jesus Christ (1918).
LESSON XXIII: FROM THE DISCOURSE ON THE MOUNT OF OLIVES TO THE LAST PASSOVER MEAL.
Flarmony, §§ 139-147.
Comm, on Matt. 24: 1-26:25, 31-35.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 143-149.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. V., chs. VI.-IX. ; D. Smith, ch. XL.-IV.
1. Events, places, times. §§ 139-147. Tuesday after¬
noon and evening, Wednesday, Thursday, and Thursday evening.
2. The great discourse on the destruction of Jerusalem
and the second coming, with outline. § 139. The transition and blending of the two topics.
170 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Comm., p. 479 f. ; Epochs, p. 143 f . ; Harmony, p. 173, footnote.
3. Misleading signs. Comm, on Matt, xxiv., 4-14.
4. “Abomination of desolation,” and “flee unto the
mountains.” Comm, on Matt., xxiv., 15 f.
5. Pella. Comm, on Matt., xxiv., 16.
6. “This generation.” Comm, on Matt., xxiv., 34.
7. “Of that day and hour.” Comm, on Matt., xxiv., 36.
8. Suddenness of the second coming. Comm, on Matt.,
xxiv., 37-51.
9. Parable of the Ten Virgins. Comm, on Matt., p.
498 f ., and p. 500b f.
10. Parable of the Talents. Comm, on Matt., p. 502b f.
11. The Judgment Scene. Comm, on Matt., p. 507b.
12. Serving Christ by serving his brethren. Comm, on
Matt., p. 510.
13. Eternal punishment and eternal life. Comm., p. 511-
551a.
14. Jesus preparing himself for his death and his dis¬
ciples for the separation. Harm., p. 173 and footnote.
15. The Supper at Bethany. Harm., footnote, p. 187
(cf. § 128a, footnote), and comm, on Matt., xxvi., 6 ; Epochs, p. 145 f .
16. The Sanhedrin receives unexpected help. Comm, on
Matt., p. 522; Epochs, pp. 146-148.
17. Did Jesus eat the Passover? Harm., footnotes, p.
190, and pp. 279-284. Five passages in John. Cf. comm., p. 524 f.
18. Was Judas present at the Lord’s Supper? Comm.
on Matt., xxvi., 25 ; Harmony, p. 195, footnote.
19. Jesus’ concern for the disciples. Comm, on Matt.,
xxvi., 31-35; Epochs, p. 148 f.
For literature on the eschatology of Jesus, see Bibli¬ ography.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
171
LESSON XXIV: FROM THE LORD’S SUPPER TO THE AGONY IN THE GARDEN
Harmony, §§ 148-152.
Comm, on Matt. 26 : 26-29, 30, 36-46.
Robertson— Epochs, pp. 150-154.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. V., chs. X.-XII. ; D. Smith, chs. XLV.-XLVI ; Westcott on John 14-17 or Robertson, Divinity of Christ in the Gospel of John.
1. Events, places, time. Thursday night. §§ 148 — 152.
2. The four narratives of the institution of the bread
and wine, in two pairs. Comm, on Matt., xxvi., 26; Harmony, p. 196, footnote.
3. Blessing the loaf. Comm, on Matt., xxvi., 26.
4. The phrase “broken for you” not genuine in I. Cor.
10: 16. Comm, on Matt., p. 529.
5. Four different views of “this is my body.” Comm.
on Matt., p. 529 f.
6. “Blood of the covenant.” Comm, on Matt., p. 530 f.,
and footnote.
7. Different names for the ordinance. Comm, on Matt.,
p. 531b.
8. The future Kingdom. Comm, on Matt., p. 532.
9. Compare the farewell discourse to the eleven in
§§ 149 — 151 (and p. 197, footnote, and p. 198, footnotes) with the formal address to the twelve and others in § 54. Observe adaptation of each to time, place, and circumstances. Epochs, pp. 150-152.
10. Gethsemane. Comm, on Matt., p. 535b f . ; Har¬
mony, p. 201, footnote.
11. A real human soul suffering. Comm, on Matt., p.
536 f.
12. What constituted this suffering? Comm, on Matt.,
p. 539a.
172 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
13. “That ye enter not into temptation.” Comm, on
Matt., xxvi., 41.
14. “Sleep on now,” and “Rise, let us be going.” Comm.
on Matt., xxvi., 45.
15. The struggle of Jesus with himself. Epochs, pp.
152-4.
For books on the Lord's Supper, see literature on Ecclesiology. Also David Smith's Pilgrim's Hospice (1906), and Goetz — Das Abendmahl eine Diatheke oder sein letzter Gleichniss (1920).
i
SPECIAL BOOKS ON CHRIST’S FAREWELL DISCOURSE AND
THE INTERCESSORY PRAYER
Alexander, Thomas — The Intercessory Prayer (1868). Bowen- — Love Revealed. Meditations on John xiii.-xvii. (1884).
Burrell— In the Upper Room (1913).
Dunham — John Fourteen (1917).
Garvie — The Master's Comfort and Hope (1917). Maclaren, Ian — In the Upper Room (1896).
Rainsford — The Lord’s Prayer for Believers. New edi¬ tion (1895).
Sample— Christ’s Valedictory.
Swete — The Last Discourse and Prayer. New edition (1915).
On Judas Iscariot, see
Baldwin — The Gospel of Judas Iscariot (1902).
Page — The Diary of Judas Iscariot (1912).
LESSON XXV: THE ARREST AND TRIAL
OF JESUS
Harmony, §§ 153-161.
Comm, on Matt. 26 : 47-27 : 26.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
173
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 154-160.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. V., chs. XIII.-XIV. ; D. Smith, chs. XLVII.-XLVIII.
1. Events, places, time. Friday, long before dawn and
till sunrise. §§ 153-161.
2. The coming of Judas with the multitude and the
soldiers. Comm, on Matt., xxvi., 47.
3. The betrayer’s kiss. Comm, on Matt., xxvi., 47.
4. The character of Judas. Comm, on Matt., pp.
556b f.
5. The rashness of Peter. Comm, on Matt., pp. 541 f.
6. The surrender of Jesus. Epochs, pp. 154 f.
7. The Jewish trial in three parts. Harm., footnote,
p. 209; comm, on Matt., p. 544.
8. The Roman trial in three parts. Harm., footnote,
p. 216; comm, on Matt., p. 544.
9. Annas and Caiaphas. Comm, on Matt., p. 544.
10. Before Annas. Comm, on Matt., p. 544b f.
11. The Sanhedrin. Comm, on Matt., p. 546.
12 The charge against Him. Comm, on Matt., p. 547.
13. Jesus speaking on oath in a court of justice, and
admitting that He is the Messiah. Comm, on Matt., p. 548b. The blasphemy charged. Legal¬ ity of the High Priest’s course. Comm, on Matt., p. 548b f.; Epochs, pp. 155-160.
14. The ground of conviction and the real ground against
Him. Comm, on Matt., p. 549 f.
15. Peter’s three denials. Harm., footnote, p. 212, and
Comm, on Matt., p. 55 lb-3. Cf. also p. 554.
16. The decision of the Sanhedrin. Comm, on Matt.,
p. 555.
17. The formal stage of Jewish trial. Observe that Luke
alone gives details here. Harmony, § 157 and p. 215 footnote.
18. End of Judas. Comm, on Matt., p. 556-8.
19. The prophecy in Matt., xxvii., 9.
174- SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
20. Pilate. Comm, on Matt., p. 560b f. Cf. also p.
567a.
21. Reasons for our Lord’s silence before the Sanhedrin
and before Pilate. Comm, on Matt., p. 562a.
22. Herod Antipas sees Jesus at last. § 160.
23. About Barabbas. Comm, on Matt., p. 562b f.
24. About Pilate’s Wife. Comm, on Matt., p. 563.
25. Time of the condemnation. Jo., xix., 14. Harm.,
footnote, p. 224, and pp. 284 — 287.
26. The Guilt of Pilate, of the Sanhedrin, of the Jewish
People, of Judas. Harmony, p. 225, footnote.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE TRIAL OF JESUS
Broade— The Sixfold Trial of Our Lord (1899).
Broderick — The Trial and Crucifixion of Jesus Christ of Nazareth (1908).
Buss — The Trial of Jesus (1906).
Chandler — The Trial of Jesus from a Lawyer’s Stand¬ point. Two volumes (1908).
Chapman — Legalized Wrong (1899).
Chase — The Trial of Jesus (1876).
DeLand — The Mis-Trials of Jesus (1914).
Drucker — The Trial of Jesus (1907).
Greenleaf, Simon — The Testimony of the Evangelists Examined by the Rulers of Evidence Administered in the Courts of Justice. Also a Review of the Trial of Jesus (1876).
Hobbs — The Court of Pilate (1906). The so-called Gesta Pilati and Cesar’s Court are also apocry¬ phal.
Husband — The Prosecution of Jesus (1916).
Innes, Taylor — The Trial of Jesus. A Legal Mono¬ graph (1899).
Kastner — Jesus for Pilatus (1912).
Kaye — The Trial of Christ (1909).
Klarman — The Trial of Jesus before Pilate.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
175
Rosadi — The Trial of Jesus (1905).
Stalker — The Trial and Death of Jesus Christ (1894). Stevenson — The Judges of Jesus (1909).
Stout — The Trial and Crucifixion of Christ (1886). Wellford— The Lynching of Jesus (1905).
Wilson, T. F. — The Trial of Jesus. Historical and Legal Standpoint (1906).
LESSON XXVI : THE CRUCIFIXION
Harmony, §§ 162-168.
Comm, on Matt. 27 : 27-66.
Robertson — Epochs, pp. 160-8.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. V., ch. XV. ; D. Smith, ch. XLIX.
1. Events, places, time. The four stages by hours from
the start till the burial. §§ 162-168.
2. The Mockery of Jesus by the Soldiers. Harmony,
§ 162, and footnote to p. 226. Cf. The Mock¬ ery by the Sanhedrin, § 155.
3. Simon bearing the Cross. Comm, on Matt.,
xxvii., 32.
4. Place of the Crucifixion. Harm., footnote, p. 226,
and comm, on Matt., xxvii., 33.
5. Wine and gall. Comm on Matt., p. 569.
6. Nature and time of the Crucifixion. Comm, on
Matt., xxvii., 35.
7. The Accusation. Comm, on Matt., p. 571.
8. State the seven sayings on the Cross, at what point
each one was uttered, and by whom recorded. The first three relate to others, and the last four to Christ. The first three during the first three hours, the last four during the last three hours. Three are by Luke, three are by John, one by Matthew and Mark. Probable order of the
176 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
first three, Harm., footnote, p. 228. Probable order of the last four, Llarm., footnote, p. 232. Meaning of the fourth saying, Comm, on Matt., xxvii., 46.
9. The two robbers and the other revilers. Comm, on Matt., xxvii., 39-44.
10. The darkness. Comm, on Matt., xxvii., 45.
11. The veil of the temple. Comm, on Matt., xxvii., 51.
12. Raising the dead from the tombs. Comm, on Matt.,
xxvii., 52.
13. The shame of the Cross. Epochs, pp. 160-5.
14. Impression made on three classes of spectators.
Comm, on Matt., p. 576b f.
15. Mary Magdalene. Comm, on Matt., p. 577 f.
16. Joseph of Arimathea. Comm, on Matt., p. 579 f.
17. Jesus in the Tomb. Epochs, pp. 165-8.
18. The fear of the rulers. Comm, on Matt., xxvii., 63-5.
19. Setting a watch. Comm, on Matt., xxvii., 66 (end).
20. The Women on the Sabbath. Harmony, p. 237,
footnote.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE CRUCIFIXION
(For literature on the Atonement, see Biblical and Sys¬ tematic Theology, as only a few of the mass of books on the Cross are given.)
Ahlfeld — The Voice from the Cross (1888).
Aldrich — A Critical Examination of the Time of Our Saviour's Crucifixion (1882).
Baxter, Richard — The Crucifying of the World by the Cross of Christ. New edition (1861).
Belzer — Die Geschichte des Leidens und Sterbens der Auferstehung und Himmelfahrt des Herrn (1903). Birks — The Shadow of the Cross in Our Lord’s Min¬ istry (1891).
Brown, Charles — Lessons from the Cross (1904).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
177
Burrell — The Singular Death of Christ (1900).
Clow — The Cross and Christian Experience (1908). Clow — In the Day of the Cross (1909).
Dalman — Der leidende und sterbende Messias (1888). Denney — The Death of Christ. Second edition (1911). Falconer — The Three Crosses (1907).
Forsyth — The Cruciality of the Cross (1909).
Gordon — Reflections in Palestine (1883).
Hanna — The Last Day of Our Lord’s Passion (1871). Hirsch — The Crucifixion from a Jewish Standpoint (1901).
Hoge, P. H. — The Divine Tragedy. A Poem (1905). Howe — The True Site of Calvary (1871).
Krummacher — The Suffering Saviour.
Jowett — The School of Calvary (1911).
Landels — The Cross of Christ (1864).
Nicoll — The Seven Words from the Cross (1896).
Ross, G. A. Johnston — The Cross. The Report of a Misgiving (1912).
Rutherford — Christ Dying.
Simpson — Christus Crucifixus (1909).
Stalker — The Trial and Death of Jesus Christ (1894). Stone — The Passion of Christ (1912).
Stroud — A Treatise on the Physical Cause of the Death of Christ (1846).
Trench, G. H.- — The Crucifixion and Resurrection of Christ in the Light of Tradition (1908).
Tholuck — Light from the Cross ( 1859) 0 Vaughan — Lessons on the Cross and Passion (1869). Wabnitz — Histoire de la vie de Jesus : La passion, la mort, et la resurrection de Jesus (1904).
Westberg — Zur neutest. Chronologie und Golgothas Ortslage (1911).
Wontner — Visio Crucis (1918).
Wright — The Cross of Our Lord (1909).
178 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
LESSON XXVII : THE RESURRECTION AND
ASCENSION
Harmony, §§ 169-184.
Comm, on Matt., ch. 28.
Robertson — Epochs, ch. VIII.
For fuller discussion, see Edersheim, Bk. V., chs. XVI.-XVII. ; D. Smith, ch. L.
1. Movements of Jesus during the Forty Days. First
footnote, Harm., p. 239 and footnote.
2. Events, places, times. §§ 169-184.
3. Five narratives of the resurrection of Jesus. Comm.
on Matt., p. 583.
4. How long did Jesus remain in the tomb? Harm.,
footnote, p. 240, and Harm., pp. 289-291.
5. Time of his resurrection. Harm., pp. 287-289, and
second footnote to p. 239. Cf. Comm, on Matt., p. 583 f. In the Harm., Luke, xxiv., 1, and John, xx., 1, are parallel to Mark, xvi., 2. Then Matt., xxviii., 1, would be a visit before sundown on the Sabbath to see the sepulchre. After sun¬ down the two Marys and Salome bought the spices (Mark, xvi., 1). Early next morning they proceeded to the tomb (Mark, xvi., 2; Luke, xxiv., 1; Jo.,, xx., 1). The resurrection, pre¬ ceded by the earthquake (Matt., xxviii., 2), had already taken place before they came. Such is the probable order of events here.
6. The Attitude of the Disciples. Epochs, pp. 169 f.
7. The fact of the empty tomb. Epochs, pp. 170-2.
8. Five appearances on the first day, and ten in all.
Harm., p. 242.
9. The ten appearances in their order. Comm, on Matt.,
p. 590a.
10. Men or angels, and number. Comm, on Matt., p. 585. The story of the angels. Epochs, pp. 172 f.
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
179
11. John’s intuition. Epochs, pp. 173 f.
12. As to Jesus appearing first to women, and first to
Mary. Comm, on Matt., p. 587 ; Epochs, pp. 174-177.
13. Report of the Watch. Comm, on Matt., xxviii.,
11-15.
14. Unexpected light on the problem. Epochs, pp. 177-9.
15. A Conference on the situation. Epochs, pp. 179-182.
16. The Case of Thomas. Epochs, pp. 182-4.
17. By the Sea of Galilee. Epochs, pp. 184-6; Har¬
mony, p. 247, footnote.
18. The three final commissions of Jesus. Harm., foot¬
note, p. 246.
19. The fact that Jesus rose. Comm, on Matt., p. 588b.
20. What Jesus’ Resurrection carries with it. Comm, on
Matt., p. 589a.
21. Theological importance of Christ’s Resurrection.
Comm, on Matt., p. 589b.
22. Remarks on these appearances in general. Comm, on
Matt., p. 590.
23. On a mountain in Galilee. Number present and to
whom the commission was given. Harm., foot¬ note, p. 249, and Comm, on Matt., p. 591. Wor¬ ship by some, doubt by others. Epochs, pp. 186-8.
24. The commission in Matthew.
(1) “All authority,” etc. Comm., p. 592.
(2) Christianity a missionary religion. Comm., p. 592b f.
(3) “Disciple.” Comm., p. 593.
(4) “All the nations.” Comm., p. 593 f.
(5) Baptizing in the name. Comm., p. 594 f.
(6) The formula for baptism and the design of bap¬ tism. Comm., p. 595 f.
(7) The closing promise. Comm., p. 596b f.
25. The last view. Epochs, pp. 188-190.
180 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION
(A Selection)
Androt — Jesus-Christ est-il resurrecte? (1909).
Anonymous — Resurrectio Christi (1909).
Archer-Shepherd — Nature and Evidence of the Resur¬ rection of Christ (1910).
Boardman — Our Risen King’s Forty Days (1902).
Bowen — Resurrection in the New Testament (1911).
Breton — La Resurrection du Christ (1908).
Brown, J. B. — The Risen Christ (1890).
Bruckner — Die sterbende und auferstehunde Gottheiland in die orientalische Religionen und ihre Verhaltniss zum Christentum (1908).
Burckhardt — Die Auferstehung des Herrn.
Callaud — Le Probleme de la Resurrection du Christ (1909).
Carpenter, W. Boyd— The Forty Days of the Risen Life (1898).
Case — The Resurrection of Jesus (1920).
Eck — Ueber die Bedeutung der Auferstehung Jesu (1898).
Edgar — The Gospel of a Risen Saviour (1892).
Edgar — The Resurrection of Jesus Christ (1886).
Faunce, D. W. — Advent and Ascension (1903).
Frick — The Resurrection and Paul’s Argument (1915).
Goguel — Les sources du recit Tohannique de la passion (1910).
Gurney — The Living Lord and the Open Grave (1902).
Hanna — The Forty Days after Our Lord’s Resurrection (1866).
Herman — The Glory of the Risen Lord (1917).
Ihmels — Die Auferstehung Jesu Christi (1906).
Kennedy — The Resurrection of Jesus Christ (1895).
THE LIFE OF CHRIST
181
Krummacher — The Risen Redeemer (1863).
Lake, Kirsopp — Historical Evidence of the Resurrection of Jesus Christ (1907).
Latham — The Risen Master (1901).
Loofs — Die Auferstehungsberichte und ihr Wert. 3 Aufl. (1908).
Maltby — The Meaning of the Resurrection (1921).
M archant — Theories of the Resurrection (1899).
Milligan, W. — The Resurrection of Our Lord (1886).
Milligan, W.— The Ascension and Heavenly Priesthood of Our Lord.
Moberly — Sayings of the Great Forty Days. New edi¬ tion (1875).
Meyer, A. — Die Auferstehung Christi (1905).
Orr — The Resurrection of Jesus (1908).
Randolph — The Empty Tomb (1906).
Riggenbach — Die Auferstehung Jesu (1905). Trans. (1907).
Ring — The Most Certain Fact in History (1893).
Robinson, C. H. — Studies in the Resurrection of Christ (1909).
Shaw, J. M. — The Resurrection of Jesus Christ (1920).
Simpson, W. J. Sparrow — Our Lord’s Resurrection (1906).
Skrine — The Survival of Jesus (1917).
Spitta — Die Auferstehung Jesu (1918).
Stapfer — Death and Resurrection of Jesus Christ (1898).
Stone — The Glory After the Passion (1912).
Swete — The Appearances of Our Lord After the Resur¬ rection (1907).
Swete — The Ascended Christ (1910).
Tait — Heavenly Session of Our Lord (1912).
Thorburn — Resurrection Narratives and Modern Criti¬ cism (1910).
West, Gilbert — Observations on the History and Evi-
182 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
dences of the Resurrection of Jesus Christ. New edition (1874).
Westcott — Gospel of the Resurrection (1874). Westcott — The Revelation of the Risen Lord. Fifth edition (1891).
PART III: THE ACTS AND THE
EPISTLES
(PROBABLY A. D. 30 to A. D. 90)
PART III: THE ACTS AND THE
EPISTLES
(Probably A. D. 30 to A. D. 90)
The text-books used in connection with this part of the New Testament Syllabus are the American Revision of the New Testament in the Student’s Chronological New Testament, Josephus, the professor’s Epochs in the Life of Paul, Angus’s Environment of Early Christianity, Carver’s Commentary on Acts (or some other commen¬ tary), and any good commentary on the various Epistles. Specific references for further study are given in each lesson to other books like those of Ramsay, David Smith’s Life and Letters of St. Paul, Conybeare and Howson’s Life and Epistles of St. Paul.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
I. BOOKS ON THE APOSTOLIC PERIOD
(A Brief Selection)
1. General History. (See also in the General Bibliog¬ raphy for the New Testament the books on New Testament Times and History.)
Arnold, T. W. — The Roman System of Provincial Ad¬ ministration. New edition (1906).
Botsford — Ancient History.
Botsford — History of Greece.
Botsford — History of Rome.
Bouchier — Syria as a Roman Province (1916).
185
186 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Bury— History of the Roman Empire (27 B. C.— 180 A. D.) (1893).
Droysen — Geschichte des Hellenismus. 2 Aufl. (1877).
Ferrero — Greatness and Decline of Rome. Five vol¬ umes (1907).
Ferrero — Characters and Events of Roman History (1909).
Ferrero — The Women of the Caesars.
Ferrero — Short History of Rome.
Harrer — Studies in the History of the Province of Syria (1915).
Hogarth — The Nearer East (1902).
Juster — Les juifs dans l’empire romaine (1914).
Kaerst — Geschichte des hellenistischen Zeitalters. 2 vol¬ umes (1901-9).
Mahaffy — The Silver Age in the Greek World (1905).
Mommsen— The History of Rome. Five volumes (1894).
Mommsen- — The Provinces of the Roman Empire from Caesar to Diocletian. Two volumes (1909).
Ramsay — Historical Geography of Asia Minor (1890).
Schurer — The Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ. Five volumes (1891).
2. Culture of the Period. (See also the General Bibli¬ ography and that in Lesson XIII on Interbiblical History.)
Abbott — Common People of Ancient Rome (1912).
Baumgartner, Poland and Wagner — Die hellenistisch- romische Kultur (1913).
Botsford — Hellenic Civilization (1915).
Boyd — Public Libraries and Literary Culture in Ancient Rome (1915).
Buckland — The Roman Law of Slavery (1909).
Buss — Roman Law and History in the New Testament (1901).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 187
Butcher — Some Aspects of Greek Genius. Third edi¬ tion (1904).
Davis — The Influence of Wealth in Imperial Rome (1910).
Deissmann — Light from the Ancient East (1910).
Deissmann — New Light on the New Testament (1907).
Dill — Roman Society from Nero to Marcus Aurelius (1905).
Ferguson — Legal Terms Common to the Macedonian Inscriptions and the New Testament.
Fowler — The City-State of the Greeks and Romans. Second edition (1895).
Fowler — Social Life at Rome in the Age of Cicero (1908).
Friedlander — Roman Life and Manners under the Early Empire. Three volumes (1909-10).
Hahn — Rom und Romanismus im griechisch-romischen Osten (1906).
Inge — Society in Rome under the Caesars (1894).
Livingston — The Greek Genius and Its Meaning to Us (1912).
Livingston — The Legacy of Greece (1923).
Mahaffy — Survey of Greek Civilization (1896).
Marquardt — Das Privatleben der Romer (1878).
Meyer, E. — Sklaverei im Aeltestum (1898).
Putnam — Authors and Their Public in Ancient Times (1894).
Skeel — Travel in First Century.
Stobart — The Glory That Was Greece (1911).
Stobart — The Grandeur That Was Rome (1912).
Thieling — Hellenismus in Kleinafrika (1911).
Torr — Ancient Ships.
Tucker — Life in the Roman World of Nero and St. Paul (1910).
.Wendland — Die hellenistisch-romische Kultur. 3 Aufl. (1912).
188 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
3. Philosophy
Arnold, E. V. — Roman Stoicism (1911).
Bevan — Stoics and Sceptics (1913).
Bigg — Neoplatonism (1911).
Bonhoffer — Epiktetand d. Stoa (1890).
Bonhoffer — Epiktet und das Neue Testament (1911). Bussell — The School of Plato (1896).
Cairo, E. — The Evolution of Theology in the Greek Philosophers. Two volumes (1904).
Davidson — The Stoic Creed (1907).
Drummond — Philo-Judaeus, or Jewish-Alexandrian Phi¬ losophy. Two volumes (1888).
Fairbairn — The Philosophy of Religion. Fifth edition (1908).
Hegel — Philosophy of Religion (1895).
Hicks — Stoic and Epicurean (1910).
Hicks — Traces of Greek Philosophy and Roman Law in the New Testament (1896).
Murray — The Stoic Philosophy (1915).
Sharp — Epictetus and the New Testament (1914). Thill y — History of Philosophy.
Windelband — History of Ancient Philosophy (1900).
4. History of Religion and Morality . (See previous lists
in the General Bibliography, in the Interbiblical History, Chapter XII in particular, and the King¬ dom Teaching and the Eschatology of Jesus.)
Adam — Religious Teachers of Greece (1908).
Allard — Le christianisme et l’empire romain de Neron a Theodose (1897).
Allo — L’evangile en face du syncretisme pai'en (1910). Angus — The Environment of Early Christianity (1915). Anrich — Das antike Mysterienwesen in seinem Einfluss auf das Christentum (1894).
Anz — Zur Frage nach dem Ursprung des Gnosticismus.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 189
Arneth — Das classische Heidentum und die christliche Religion. Two volumes (1895).
Baur, A. — Vom Griechentum zum Christentum (1910).
Bauer, B. — Christus und die Caisaren. 2 Aufl. (1879).
Berthelot — Die Stellung der Israeliten und der Juden zu den Fremden (1896).
Berthelot — Das religionsgeschichtliche Problem des spatjudentums (1909).
Berthelot — Die jiidische Religion von der Zeit Esras bis zum Zeitalter Christi (1911).
Beurlier — Le cult rendu aux empereurs (1891).
Bevan — Hellenism and Christianity (1921).
Boissier — La Religion romain d’ Auguste aux Antonius. Two volumes (1874).
Bousset — Die Religion des Judentums im neutest. Zeit¬ alter. 2 Aufl. (1906).
Bousset — Hauptprobleme der Gnosis (1907).
Bousset — Anti-christ.
Bugge — Das Christusmysterium (1915).
Burkitt — Jewish and Christian Apocalypses (1913).
Burton — Spirit, Soul and Flesh (1918).
Caird, E. — The Evolution of Greek Religion. Third edition. Two volumes (1899).
Campbell — Religion in Greek Literature (1898).
Carter — Religious Life of Ancient Rome (1912).
Charles — Eschatology, Hebrew, Jewish, and Christian. Second edition (1913).
Cheetpiam — The Mysteries, Pagan and Christian (1897).
Clemen — Primitive Christianity and Its Non- Jewish Sources (1912).
Clemen — Der Einfluss der Mysterienreligionen auf das alteste Christentum (1913).
Clemen — Die Reste der primitiven Religion im altesten Christentum (1916).
Cumont — Oriental Religions.
Cumont — Mysteries of Mithra (1903).
190 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Cumont — Astrology and Religion among the Greeks and Romans (1912).
Cumont — Les religions orientales dans le paganisme romain.
De Zwaan — Antieke Cultuur om en achter het Nieuwe Testament. Second edition (1918).
Dollinger — The Gentile and the Jew. Two volumes (1906).
Eysinga — Voorchristelijk Christendom (1918).
Edmunds — Buddhistic and Christian Gospels. Two vol¬ umes (1902-9).
Farnell — Higher Aspects of Greek Religion (1912).
Farrer — Paganism and Christianity (1891).
Faye — Introduction a l’etude du Gnosticisme.
Felten — Neutest. Zeitgeschichte (1910).
Ferrero — The Ruin of the Ancient Civilization and the Triumph of Christianity (1921).
Foucart — Les mysteres d’ eleusis (1914).
Fowler — Religious Experience of the Roman People
(i9ii).
Fowler — Roman Ideas of the Deity in the last Century before the Christian Era (1914).
Glover — The Conflict of Religions in the Early Roman Empire (1909).
Glover — Progress in Religion to the Christian Era (1922).
Gunkel — -Zum religionsgeschichtlichen Verstandnis des N. T. 2 Aufl. (1910).
Hall— Historical Setting of the Early Gospel (1912).
Halliday — Lectures on the History of Roman Religion (1923).
Harrison, Miss J. E. — Prolegomena to the Study of the Greek Religion (1903).
Hase — New Testament Parallels in Buddhistic Litera¬ ture (1907).
Heinrici — Die Hermesmystik und das Neue Testament (1918).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
191
Heinrici — Hellenismus und Christentum (1909). Heinrici — Die Eigenart des Christentums (1911). Holtzmann, O. — Neutest. Zeitgeschichte. 2 Aufl. (1906).
Jacoby — Das antike Mysterienwesen und das Christen¬ tum (1910).
Jeremias — Babylonisches im Neuen Testament (1905). Jong — Das antike Mysterienwesen (1909).
Kautsky — Der Ursprung des Christentums (1908). Keim — Rom und das Christentum (1881).
Kennedy — St. Paul and the Mystery-Religions (1913). King — Gnostics (1887).
Legge — Forerunners and Rivals of Christianity (1916). Lewis — Paganism Surviving in Christianity (1892). Lichtenbahn — Die Offenbarung in Gnosticismus (1902).
Lohmeyer — Christuskult und Kaiserkult (1919). Mansel — The Gnostic Heresies (1875).
Milligan — Here and There Among the Papyri (1922). Mills — Our Own Religion in Ancient Persia (1913). Moore — Religious Thought of the Greeks and of the Romans from Homer to the Triumph of Christianity (1916).
Moulton, J. H. — From Egyptian Rubbish Heaps (1916). Norden — Agnostos Theos (1913).
Oesterley — The Doctrine of the Last Things (1908). Oesterley — The Religion and Worship of the Syna¬ gogue. Second edition (1911).
Patterson — Mithraism and Christianity (1921).
Petrie — Personal Religion in Egypt before Christianity (1909).
Pfleiderer — Christian Origins (1906).
Pressense — The Religions before Christ (1862). Pthythian-Adams — Mithraism ( 1915 ) .
Reitzenstein — Die hellenistischen Mysterienreligionen (1910). 2 Aufl. (1920).
Reitzenstein — Poimandres.
192 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Renan — The Influence of the Institutions, Thought, and Culture of Rome on Christianity ( 1880) .
Schmitz, O. — Die Opferanschauung des spatern Juden- tums und die Opferaussagen des N. T. (1910).
Scott — The Apologetic of the N. T. (1907).
Sheldon — The Mystery Religions and Christianity (1918).
Soltau — Das Fortleben des Heidentums in der altchrist- lichen Kirche (1900).
Staerck— Neutest. Zeitgeschichte. 2 Aufl. (1912).
Sweet — Roman Emperor Worship (1919).
Swiney — The Esoteric Teaching of the Gnostics (1909).
Troupe — St. Paul and the Mystery Religions.
Uhlhorn — Conflict of Christianity with Heathenism (1879).
Walton — Cult of Asklepios (1894).
Wenley — Preparation for Christianity (1898).
Westermarck — Origin and Development of the Moral Ideas. Two volumes (1906-8).
Whittaker — The Origins of Christianity. Second edi¬ tion (1909).
Wilamowitz-Moellendorff and Niese — Staat und Gesellschaft der Griechen und Romer (1910).
Wissowa — Die Religion und Mythologie der Romer. 2 Aufl. (1912).
5. The History of Apostolic Christianity
(Most of the church histories have a sketch of the Apostolic age.)
Achelis— Das Christentum in den ersten drei Jahrhun- derten (1912).
Addis — Christianity and the Roman Empire (1902).
Adeney — Men of the New Testament (1915).
Aytoun — City Centers of Early Christianity (1915).
Bacon — The Founding of the Church (1909).
Bartlet— The Apostolic Age (1899).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
193
Baur — The Apostles.
Baur, F. C. — Church History of the First Three Cen¬ turies (1879).
Bigg — The Church’s Task under the Roman Empire (1905).
Blunt — Studies in Apostolic Christianity (1909).
Bruce — The Training of the Twelve.
Burkitt — Early Christianity outside of the Roman Em¬ pire.
Case — The Evolution of Early Christianity (1914).
Camus — L’oeuvre des Apotres (1905).
Clemen — Die Apostelgeschichte im Lichte der neueren Forschungen (1905).
Clemen — Religionsgeschichtliche Erklarung des N. T. (1909).
Clemen — Entwickelung der christlichen Religion inner- halb des N. T. (1908).
Cobern — New Archaeological Discoveries and Their Bearing on the New Testament (1917).
Cox — The First Century of Christianity (1886).
Deane — Friends and Fellow-laborers of St. Paul (1907).
Dewick — Primitive Christian Eschatology (1912).
De Zwaan — Imperialisme van den oudchristelijken geest (1919).
Dobschutz — Christian Life in the Primitive Church (1904).
Dobschutz — Problems of the Apostolic Age (1909).
Drummond, R. J. — The Relation of the Apostolic Age to the Teaching of Christ (1900).
Ewald — Geschichte des apostolischen Zeitalters (1858).
Fairbairn — Studies in Religion and Theology. The Church: in Idea and in History (1910).
Farrar— Early Days of Christianity (1882).
Faye — Etude sur les origines des eglises de 1’age apos- tolique (1909).
Fisher — The Beginnings of Christianity. Second edi¬ tion (1911).
194 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Fletcher — The Psychology of the New Testament.
Foakes, Jackson and Kirsopp Lake — The Beginnings of Christianity (1921 — ).
George — The Twelve.
Gilbert — A Short History of Christianity in the Apos¬ tolic Age (1906).
Gilbert — The First Interpreters of Jesus (1901).
Goguel — Les Chretiennes et 1’empire (1909).
Greenough — The Apostles of Our Lord (1904).
Hardy — Christianity and the Roman Government (1894).
Harnack — The Mission and Expansion of Christianity in the First Three Centuries. Two volumes (1908).
Harnack — The Constitution and Law of the Churches in the First Two Centuries. Second edition (1910).
Hatch — The Organization of the Early Christian Churches (1895).
Hausrath — History of N. T. Times: Apostles. Four volumes (1895).
Hausrath — Jesus und die neutest. Schriftsteller (1908).
Heinrici— Das Urchristentum (1902).
ttENSON — Apostolic Christianity (1898).
Hill — The Apostolic Age (1922).
Hoennicke — Das Judenchristen in 1. und 2. Jahrhun- derten (1908).
Hort — The Christian Ecclesia (1898).
Hort — Judaistic Christianity (1898).
Jones, J. D. — The Glorious Company of the Apostles (1910).
Jungst— Die Quellen der Apostelgeschichte (1895).
Kent — The Work and Teaching of the Apostles (1916).
Kirk — The Religion of Power (1916).
Kiefl — Die Theorien des modernen Sozialismus fiber den Ursprung des Christentums (1915).
Lake — Landmarks of Early Christianity (1920).
Lechler — The Apostolic and Post-Apostolic Times (1886).
Lightfoot — Dissertations on the Apostolic Age (1892).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
195
Lilley — Four Apostles (1915).
Lindsay — The Church and the Ministry *in the Early Cen¬ turies (1902).
Luckock — Footprints of the Apostles (1905).
Matheson — Representative Men of the N. T. (1905). Mathews — The Messianic Hope in the N. T. (1905). McDaniel — The Churches of the New Testament (1921).
McGiffert — A History of Christianity in the Apostolic Age. Second edition (1910).
Meyer, E. — Ursprung und Anfange des Christentums (1921—).
Moorhouse — Dangers of the Apostolic Age (1903). Neander — History of the Planting and Training of the Christian Church. Two volumes (1889).
Nolloth — The Rise of the Christian Religion (1917). Orr — Neglected Factors in the Study of the Early Prog¬ ress of Christianity (1909).
Paterson — The Apostolic Teaching.
Piepenbring — Jesus et les apotres (1911).
Pfleiderer — Primitive Christianity (1906).
Pressense — The Early Years of Christianity (1870). Pressense — The Apostolic Era.
Purves — The Apostolic Age (1900).
Ragg — The Church of the Apostles (1909).
Rall— N. T. History (1914).
Ramsay — The Church in the Roman Empire (1893). Ramsay — Pictures from the Apostolic Church (1910). Rankin — First Saints (1893).
Renan — The Apostles (1898).
Renan — Antichrist (1897).
Ritschl — The Origin of the Early Catholic Church. Robertson, A. T. — Studies in the N. T. (1915). Robertson, A. T. — Types of Preachers in the New Testa¬ ment (1922).
Ropes — The Apostolic Age in the Light of Modern Criticism (1906).
196 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
.Schaff, P. — History of the Apostolic Church (1853). Schell — Traits of the Twelve (1911).
Scott — The Beginnings of the Church (1914).
Selwyn — The Christian Prophets (1901).
Sorley — Jewish Christians and Judaism (1881) .
Still — The Jewish Christian Church. Two volumes (1912, 1922).
Stalker — Christian Psychology (1914).
Vedder — The Dawn of Christianity (1894).
Veitch — The First Christians (1906).
Votaw— -The Primitive Era of Christianity (1902). Watson — In the Apostolic Age (1902).
Weinel — Die Stellung des Urchristentums zum staat (1908).
Weiss, J. und R. Knopf — Das Urchristentums (1917). Weizsacker — The Apostolic Age of the Christian Church. Second edition. Two volumes (1899). Wellhausen, Julicher, et al. — Geschichte der christ- lichen Religion. 2 Aufl. (1909).
Wernle — The Beginnings of Christianity. Two volumes (1903-4).
Wieseler — Chronologie des apostolischen Zeitalters (1840).
See also Hastings — Dictionary of the Apostolic Age, besides the other Bible dictionaries.
ii. special books on the life and teaching of peter
(See also Commentaries on Epistles of Peter.)
Barnes — St. Peter in Rome and His Tomb on the Vati¬ can Hill.
Berks — Studies in the Life and Character of St. Peter (1887).
Couard — Simon Petrus der Apostel des Herrn.
Davidson — St. Peter and His Training.
Elert — Die Religiositat des Petrus (1911).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 197
Fouard — St. Peter and the First Years of Christianity. Green — The Apostle Peter (1873).
Greene — St. Peter (1909).
Grill — Der Primat des Petrus (1904).
Guignebert— La Primaute de Pierre et la Venne de Pierre a Rome (1909).
Henriott — Saint Pierre (1891).
Howson — Horae Petrinae (1883).
Lewis — Petros.
Meyer, F. B. — Peter: Fisherman, Disciple, Apostle (1920).
Reagan — The Preaching of Peter (the Beginning of Christian Apologetics) (1922).
Robinson — Simon Peter. His Life and Times.' Salmond — Life of Peter.
Scharfe — Die petrinische Stromung der neut. Literatur (1893).
Schmid — Petrus in Rom. (1879).
Seeley — The Life and Writings of St. Peter.
Southouse — The Making of Simon Peter.
Spence — Scenes from the Life of St. Peter.
Taylor — Peter the Apostle (1876).
Thomas, W. H. Griffith — The Apostle Peter. Second edition (1905).
Thompson — Life-work of Peter the Apostle.
Upham — Simon Peter Shepherd (1910).
Weiss, B. — Der petrinische Lehrbegriff (1855).
HI. SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE LIFE AND TEACHING OF THE
APOSTLE JOHN
(See also books on the authorship of the Fourth Gospel in Part II and commentaries on Fourth Gospel.)
Benham — St. John and His Work (1902).
Chapman, Dom — John the Presbyter and the Fourth Gospel (1911).
198 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Culross — John Whom Jesus Loved (1878).
Fouard — Saint Jean et la fin de l’age apostolique (1904). Garvie — The Beloved Disciple (1922).
Gloag — Life of St. John (1891).
Hayes — John and His Writings (1917).
Krenkel — Apostel Johannes (1897).
Lias- — Doctrinal System of St. John (1875).
Lowrie — The Doctrine of St. John (1895).
Lutgert — Johannes Christologie.
Matheson — St. John’s Portrait of Christ (1910). McDonald — Life and Writings of John (1877).
Niese — Das Leben des heiligen Johannes (1878). Schwartz — Ueber den Tod der Sohne Zebedai (1904). Scott — The Fourth Gospel : Its Theology and Purpose (1908).
Scott-Moncrieff — St. John, Apostle, Evangelist, and Prophet (1909).
Stalker — The Two St. Johns (1895).
Stevens — Johannine Theology (1894).
Titius — Die Johanneische Anschauung unter dem Ge- sichtspunkt der Seligkeit.
Weiss, B. — Der johanneische Lehrbegriff (1882).
IV. THE LIFE AND TEACHING OF JAMES
(See also commentaries on Epistle of James.)
Bartmann — St. Paulus und St. Jakobus.
Fitch — James the Lord’s Brother.
Mayor — The Epistle of St. James. New edition (1913). Pages I.-LXV.
Meinertz — Der Jakobusbrief und sein Verfasser (1905). Patrick — James, the Lord’s Brother (1906).
Robertson — Practical and Social Aspects of Christianity.
The Wisdom of James (1915). Pages 1-52. Taylor, J. F. — The Apostle of Patience (1907).
Weiss — Der Jakobusbrief und die neuere Kritik (1904).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
199
V. LIFE AND TEACHING OF LUKE
(See also commentaries on Gospel of Luke and on Acts.)
Cadbury — The Style and Literary Method of Luke (1920).
Carpenter — Christianity according to St. Luke (1919). Chase — The Credibility of the Book of the Acts of the Apostles (1902).
Harnack — Luke the Physician (1908).
Harnack — The Acts of the Apostles (1909).
Harnack — The Date of the Acts and the Synoptic Gos¬ pels (1911).
Hobart — The Medical Language of St. Luke (1882). Klostermann — Vindicae Lucanae (1866). Machlachlan — St. Luke Evangelist and Historian (1912).
Machlachlan — St. Luke : The Man and His Work (1920).
Mackinlay — Recent Discoveries in the Writings of St. Luke (1921).
Selwyn — St. Luke the Prophet (1901).
Ramsay — Luke the Physician (1908).
Ramsay — Was Christ Born at Bethlehem? A Study in the Credibility of St. Luke (1899).
Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller and Roman Citizen. Twelfth edition (1909).
Robertson, A. T. — Luke the Historian in the Light of Research (1920).
VI. LIFE AND TEACHING OF PAUL
Only additions to the extensive bibliography of Paul in the author’s Epochs in the Life of Paul (1909), pp. 221-7, which please see at this point. The lists here given are simply supplementary. See also the lists of commentaries on Paul’s Epistles.
200 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
1. Life and Work
Abbott, L. — The Life and Letters of Paul.
Ball — The Apostle of the Gentiles (1885).
Bevan— St. Paul in the Light of To-day (1912).
Cohu — St. Paul in the Light of Recent Research (1910). Deissmann — St. Paul : A Study in Social and Religious History (1912).
Dodd, C. H. — The Meaning of Paul for To-day (1921). Drummond, J. — Paul. His Life and Teachings (1912). Drury — The Prison Ministry of St. Paul (1910). Dudley — St. Paul’s Friendships and His Friends (1911). Fletcher — The Conversion of St. Paul (1910). Gamble— St. Paul the Apostle to the Gentiles.
Gardner — The Religious Experience of St. Paul (1911). Garvie — The Life and Teaching of Paul (1910). Goodwin — A Harmony of the Life of the Apostle Paul (1895).
Hall — Paul the Apostle.
Hausleiter — Paulus.
Haweis — The Picture of Paul (1887).
Johnstone — St. Paul and His Mission to the Roman Empire (1909).
Jones — St. Paul the Orator (1910).
Knopf — Paulus (1909).
Knopf — Probleme der Paulus-forschung (1913).
Lees — St. Paul and His Converts.
Manen — Paulus. Three volumes (1890-6).
Matthews — Paul the Dauntless (1916).
McNeile — St. Paul: Life and Epistles (1920).
Meyer, F. B. — Paul a Servant of Jesus Christ.
Moe — Paulus und die evangelische Geschichte (1912). Muntz — Rome, St. Paul and the Early Church (1913). Munziger — Paulus in Corinth (1902).
Myers — Saint Paul. A Poem.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
201
Noesgen — D. Deissmann’s Paulus fiir Theologen und Laien (1912).
Peabody — The Apostle Patil and the Modern World (1923).
Plooij — De Chronologie Van het Levan Van Paulus (1918).
Plumptre — St. Paul in Asia Minor.
Pounder — St. Paul and His Cities (1913).
Ramsay — Was Paul an Epileptic? ( The Expositor, Nov., 1913).
Redlich — St. Paul and His Companions (1913). Robertson, J. — Scenes from the Life of St. Paul (1862). Robertson, A. T. — Epochs in the Life of Paul. Popular edition (1923).
Robinson — The Life of Paul (1918).
Rosser — Paul the Preacher (1916).
Rutherford — The Last Years of St. Paul (1912). Samuels — Far Hence Unto the Gentiles : St. Paul in a New Light (1915).
Schwartz — Paulus (1910).
Schweitzer — Paul and His Interpreters. A Critical His¬ tory (1912).
Seeligmuller — War Paulus Epileptiker? (1910). Smith, D. — The Life and Letters of St. Paul (1920). Strachan, R. — The Individuality of St. Paul (1916). Vischer — Der Apostel Paulus und sein Werk (1910). Warneck — Paulus im Lichte der heutigen Heiden Mis¬ sion (1914).
Weber — Die antiochenische Kollekte (1917).
Weinel — Paulus als kirchlicher Organisator.
Weinel — Paulus. 2 Aufl. (1915).
Wernle — Paulus als Heidenmissionar.
Wilkinson — Paul and the Revolt Against Him (1914). Wood — The Life and Ministry of Paul the Apostle (1912).
Wrede — Paulus (1907).
202 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Zahn — Zur Lebensgeschichte des Apostels Paulus (Neue Kirchliche Zeitschrift XV.).
2. The Epistles of Paul Treated as a Whole. (Addi¬ tional list.)
r
Bonnet-Schroeder — Epitres de Paul. Fourth edition (1912).
Bruckner — Die chronologische Reihenfolge in welcher die Briefe des Neuen Testaments. Verfasst sind (1890).
Buell — The Autographs of St. Paul (1913).
Champlain — The Epistles of Paul (1906).
Clemen — Einheitlichkeit d. paul. Briefe (1894).
Drummond — The Epistles of Paul the Apostle (1899).
Grafe — Das Verhaltnis der paulinischen Schriften zur sapientia Salamonis (1892).
Hartke — Die Sammlung und die altesten Ausgaben der Paulus briefe (1917).
Hayes — Paul and His Epistles (1915).
Heinrici— Die Forschungen iiber die paulinischen Briefe (1886).
Lake — The Earlier Epistles of St. Paul (1915).
Neil — The Pauline Epistles (1906).
Scott — The Pauline Epistles (1909).
Vischer — Die Paulusbriefe.
Voelter— Die Composition der paulinischen Hauptbriefe (1890).
Way — The Letters of Paul to Seven Churches and Three Friends (1906).
Weinel— Die Echtheit der paulinischen Hauptbriefe (1920).
Weiss, B.— -Present Status of the Inquiry concerning the Genuineness of Paul’s Epistles (1901).
Weiss, B. — Die paulinische Briefe. 2 Aufl. (1902).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
203
3. The Teachings of Paul. (See also lists for the Jesus and Paul Controversy.)
(Only additional books to those in Epochs in Life of Paul.)
Alexander — -Ethics of St. Paul (1910).
Allen — The Christology of St. Paul (1912).
Andrews — The Value of the Theology of St. Paul for Modern Thought.
Bacon — St. Paul’s Message to Religion (Constructive Quarterly, March, 1913).
Bacon — Jesus and Paul (1921).
Bailey — Does Hellenism Contribute Constituent Ele¬ ments to Paul’s Christology? (1905).
Bartmann — St. Paulus und St. Jakobus.
Benz — Die Ethik des Apostels Paulus (1912).
Carre — Paul’s Doctrine of Redemption (1914). Deissner — Auferstehung und Pneumagedanke bei Paulus (1912).
Deissner — Paulus und die Mystik siner Zeit. 2 Aufl. (1921).
Dibelius — Die Geisterwelt im Glauben des Paulus (1909).
Foster — The Resurrection in Paul’s Argument (1915). Garvie — Studies of Paul and His Gospel (1911). Greenough — The Mind of Christ in St. Paul (1909). Griffith-Thomas— The Prayers of St. Paul.
Harford — The Gospel according to St. Paul (1912). Harnack — 1st die Rede des Paulus in Athen ein ur- sprunglicher Bestandteil der Apostelgeschichte ? (1913).
Hatch, W. H. P. — The Pauline Idea of Faith in Its Relation to Jewish and Hellenistic Religion (1917). Headlam — St. Paul and Christianity.
Juncker — Die Ethik des Paulus. II Halfte (1919). Karl — Beitrage zum Verstandnis der soteriologischen Er- fahrungen und Spekulationen des Apostels Paulus.
204 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Kennedy — St. Paul and the Mystery-Religions (1913).
Kxttel — Paulus im Talmud (1920).
Leathes — The Witness of St. Paul to Christ (1869).
Lilley — The Soul of St. Paul (1909).
Lundberg — Christus-Mystiker hos Paulus (1916).
Machen — The Origin of Paul’s Religion (1921).
Mackintosh — Pragmatic Element in Paul’s Teaching (Am. Journal of Theology, July, 1910).
Martin — St. Paul’s Ethical Teaching (1917).
Meyer, A.— Jesus and Paul (1909).
Miller — Paul’s Message for To-day (1914).
Moffatt — Paul and Paulinism (1910).
Montefiore — Judaism and St. Paul (1915).
Morgan — The Religion and Theology of St. Paul (1917).
Olchewski — Die Wurzeln der paulinischen Christologie (1909).
Peck — The Rival Philosophies of Jesus and Paul (1919).
Philippi — Paulus und das Judentum (1916).
Pope — Studies in the Language of St. Paul.
Pope — The Prayers of St. Paul
Prat — La Theologie de Saint Paul. Two volumes (1908, 1912).
Ramsay — The Teaching of St. Paul in Terms of the Present Day (1913).
Reid — Jesus the Christ and Paul the Apostle in the Light of Modern Criticism (1915).
Roberts — Eucken and St. Paul (Contemporary Review, Vol. 97).
Robertson, A. T. — The Glory of the Ministry. Paul’s Exultation in Preaching (1911). Fifth ed. (1923).
Robertson, A. T. — Paul the Interpreter of Christ (1921). Second edition (1922).
Rostron — The Christology of St. Paul (1912).
Scharling — Ekklesiabagrebet hos Paulus (1917).
Schmidt — Der Leib Christi (1919).
Schmoller — Die geschichtliche Person Jesu nach den paulinischen Schriften (Theol. Stud, und Krit. 1894).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 205
Schweitzer — Die Mystik des Apostels Paulus (1912).
Shears — The Gospel according to St. Paul (1919).
Steinmann — Paulus und die Sklaven zu Korinth (1911).
Teichmann — Die paulinischen Vorstellungen von Aufer- stehung und Gericht und ihre Beziehung zur jiidi- schen Apokalyptik (1896).
Weiss — Paul and Jesus (1909).
Westcott, F. B. — St. Paul and Justification (1912).
Williams— A Plea for a Reconsideration of Paul’s Doc¬ trine of Justification (1912).
VII. SPECIAL BOOKS ON ACTS
1. Discussions
Belser — Die Ap. (1908).
Benson — Addresses on the Acts of the Apostles (1901).
Briggs — The Acts of the Risen Lord (1911).
Burton — Records and Letters of the Apostolic Age (1900).
Cadbury — Critical Studies in the Gospel of Luke and the Book of Acts (1918).
Chase — The Credibility of the Books of the Acts of the Apostles (1902).
Clark — Harmonic Arrangement of the Acts and the Epistles (1884).
Clemen — Die Apostelgeschichte im Lichte der neueren Forschungen (1905).
Foakes, Jackson and Kirsopp Lake — The Acts of the Apostles (Part I of the Beginnings of Christianity), Prolegomena. Vol. I., Jewish and Gentile Back¬ grounds (1921). Vol. II., Criticism (1922).
Friedrich — Das Lucas-evangelium und die Apostel¬ geschichte (1890).
Goguel — Introduction au Nouveau Testament, Tome III, Le Livre du Actes (1922).
Harnack — The Acts of the Apostles (1909).
206 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Harnack— The Date of the Acts and of the Synoptic Gospels (1911).
Kennedy— Vital Forces of the Early Church (1920).
Lekebusch — Composition und Entstehung der Apostel- geschichte.
Luckock— The Footprints of the Apostles Traced by St. Luke in the Acts.
Morrison- — Acts and Epistles of Paul.
Pick — The Apocryphal Acts (1909).
Pirot — Les Actes des Apotres et la Commission biblique (1919).
Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen. Twelfth edition (1909).
Robertson, A. T.— Luke the Historian in the Light of Research (1920).
Spitta — Die Apostelgeschichte, ihre Quellen und deren geschichtlicher Werth (1891).
Stifler — An Introduction to the Acts of the Apostles (1892).
Still — The Jewish Christian Church. 2 vols. (1912, 1922).
Vedder — The Dawn of Christianity (1894).
Weiss — Ueber die Asbsicht und den lit. Charakter der Ap. Gesch. (1897).
Wellhausen — Kriticshe Analyse der Apostelgeschichte (1914).
Wendt — The Historical Trustworthiness of the Book of Acts (1913).
Zeller — Contents and Origin of the Acts of the Apostles.
Zahn — Die Urausgabe der Apostelgeschichte des Lukas (1916).
2. Commentaries on the English Text
Besides continuous sets like those of Bengel, Calvin,
Maclaren’s Expositions of Holy Scripture, Parker’s Peo¬ ple’s Bible, Weiss, etc.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 207
Abbott, Lyman — Acts of the Apostles.
Alexander — The Acts of the Apostles Explained. Two volumes (1857).
Andrews — The Acts of the Apostles. West. N. T. (1908).
Bartlet — The Acts of the Apostles. New-Century Bible (1901).
Furneaux — The Acts of the Apostles (1912).
Gilbert — The Acts of the Apostles. Bible for Home and School (1909).
Griffith-Thomas — The Acts of the Apostles. 2 Vols. (1915).
Hackett — The Acts of the Apostles. American Comm. (1882).
Lindsay — The Acts of the Apostles.
Lumby — The Acts of the Apostles.
McGarvey — New Commentary on Acts. Two volumes (1892).
jRackham — The Acts of the Apostles. Westminster Comm. (1901).
Sitterly — From Jerusalem to Rome (1915).
Still — The Acts. Two volumes (1912, 1922).
Stokes — The Acts of the Apostles. Two volumes. The Exp. Bible (1892).
3. Commentaries on the Greek Text
Besides the continuous sets like those by Alford, Ben- gel, Chrysotom, Meyer, etc.
Barde — Commentaire sur les Actes des Apotres.
Blass — Acta Apostolorum (1895).
Burnside — The Acts of the Apostles (1916). Camerlynck — Commentarius in Actus Apostolorum (1910).
Dentler — Die Apostelgeschichte (1912).
208 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Foakes-Jackson — Vols. III. and IV. of Part I. of The Beginnings of Christianity (in preparation 1923). Gloag — The Acts of the Apostles. Two volumes (1870). Hoennicke — Die Apostelgeschichte (1914).
Holtzmann — Die Synoptiker und Apostelgeschichte.
Hand-Commentar. 3 Aufl. (1901).
Kahler — Die Apostelgeschichte (1903).
Knabenbauer — Acta Apostolorum (1899).
Knopf — Die Apostelgeschichte. 2 Aufl. (1907). Knowling — The Acts of the Apostles. The Exp. Gk. Test. (1900).
Loisy — Les Actes (1921).
Rendall — Greek Text with Notes.
Page — The Acts of the Apostles (1897).
Preuschen — Die Apostelgeschichte. Handbuch zum N. T. (1912).
Steinmann — Die Apostelgeschichte (1913).
Weiss, B.— -Die Apostelgeschichte (1902).
Wendt — Meyer Kommentar. 9 Aufl. (1913).
Zahn — Die Apostelgeschichte des Lukas. Kap. I.-XIL (1919).
LESSON I: BEGINNINGS OF APOSTOLIC
HISTORY
(A. D. 29 or 30)
Angus — Environment of Early Christianity, ch. I. Student’s Chron. N. T., Introduction to Acts.
Chron. N. T., Acts 1 and 2.
Carver or any commentary on Acts.
Note in the Introduction the discussion of the date of the book, the author, the unity, the historical credibility, the purpose, the relation to the Gospel of Luke, the rela¬ tion to the Epistles, the sudden close, and the detailed outline of the Acts.
For further study see
Bartlet — The Apostolic Age, pp. I.-XLIV., 1-18 ;
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
209
Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, chs. I. and XVII.; Ramsay — Pictures of the Apostolic Church, chs. I.-III.; Ramsay — Pauline and Other Studies, ch. XII. ;
Swete — The Holy Spirit in the N. T., Part I., ch. V.
special books about the holy spirit
Arnal — La Notion de l’Esprit (1908).
Arthur — The Tongue of Fire (1880).
Crane — The Teaching of Jesus about the Holy Spirit (1905).
Denio — The Supreme Leader (1900).
Dixon and others — Person and Ministry of the H. S. (1890).
Downer — Mission and Ministration of the Holy Spirit (1909).
Gloel — Der heilige Geist (1888).
Gordon — The Ministry of the Spirit.
Griffith-Thomas — The Holy Spirit. Second edition (1922).
Gunkel — Die Wirkungen des heiligen Geistes (1899). Hayes — The Gift of Tongues.
Hobart — Our Silent Partner (1908).
Johnson — The Holy Spirit Then and Now (1904). Kuyper — The Work of the Holy Spirit (1902).
Lechler — Die biblische Lehre vom heiligen Geiste (1900-4).
Leisegang — Der heilige Geist (1919).
Noesgen — Der heilige Geist (1905).
Rees — The Holy Spirit (1915).
Slattery — The Light Within. A Study of the Holy Spirit (1915).
Smeaton — The Doctrine of the Holy Spirit (1882). Swete — The Holy Spirit in the N. T. (1909).
Swete — The Spirit of God in the Church (1912).
Torrey — Baptism with the Holy Spirit. Second edition (1895).
210 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Volz — Der Geist Gottes (1910).
Walker, D. — The Gift of Tongues (1906).
Walker, W. L. — The Spirit and the Incarnation (1909). Walpole — The Mission of the Holy Ghost (1906). Washburn — The Holy Spirit (1918).
Weinel — Die Wirkungen des Geistes (1899).
Welldon — The Revelation of the Holy Spirit (1902). Winstansley — The Spirit in the New Testament (1908). Wood— The Spirit of God in Biblical Literature (1904).
LESSON II: THE YEARS OF WAITING IN
JERUSALEM
(A. D. 30-34)
Angus — The Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 6-9.
Chron. N. T., Acts 3-7.
Carver or any commentary on Acts.
For further study see
Conybeare and Howson — Life and Epistles of St. Paul, Introduction, and first half of ch. I. ;
Ramsay — Pictures of the Apostolic Church, chs. IV.-IX. ; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 367-379;
Smith, D.— Life and Letters of St. Paul, pp. 1-16.
See also Goulbourn — The Acts of the Deacons (1866); Schumacher — Der Diakon Stephanus (1910); chapter on Stephen in Robertson, Types of Preachers in the New Testament.
LESSON III : THE YOUTH OF SAUL OF TARSUS
Angus — Environment, pp. 9 (bottom) -12.
Robertson — Epochs in the Life of Paul, ch. I.
For further study, see
Conybeare and Howson — Life and Epistles of St. Paul, second half of ch. I. and all of ch. II.;
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
211
Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, ch. II.;
Ramsay — Cities of St. Paul, Parts I. and II. ;
Smith — Life and Letters of St. Paul, pp. 17-33.
LESSON IV: THE SCATTERED DISCIPLES AND THE OUTSIDE WORLD
Angus — Environment of Early Christianity.
Chron. N. T., Acts 8.
Epochs in the Life of Paul.
Josephus’ Antiquities.
1. Angus — Environment, pp. 12 (bottom) 17 (top).
2. The Scripture Narrative. Acts viii. About A. D.
34-35.
3. Historical exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
ch. II.
4. For Simon Magus, Candace, and Ethiopia, see some
Bible dictionary.
5. Glimpse of Jewish and Roman Rulers of A. D. 30-37.
Jos., Antiquities, Book XVIII., chs. vi. and vii. (a) Roman Emperors. Tiberius, stepson of Augus¬ tus, was Emperor A. D. 14-37. Tiberius had grandson, Tiberius, son of Drusus, now dead. Caius Caligula, who succeeded Tiberius instead of his own grandson, was grandson of another Drusus, stepson also of Augustus. The succes¬ sion from Augustus to Nero can best be repre¬ sented by a chart :
Augustus B. C. 42 — A. D. 14 = Livia
Tiberius A. D. 14-37 Drusus = Antonia
^ I I
Drusus
Germanicus Claudius 41-54
Caius Caligula Agrippina Britannicus Octavia 37-41 I
Nero 54-68
212 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
(b) Story of the way Caius obtained the crown.
(c) The Herods in the Acts. Herod Agrippa I. (Acts xii., 1) was son of Aristobulus, son of Herod the Great. Herod Agrippa II. (Acts xxv., 13) and his sisters, Bernice and Drusilla, were children of Herod Agrippa I.
(d) Capers of Herod Agrippa I. in Rome, and how finally he was made King of Philip’s Tetrarchy.
(e) How the envy of Herodias and Herod Antipas led to the loss of his Tetrarchy and the increase of Agrippa’s Kingdom.
(f) Pilate deposed from Procuratorship in A. D. 36. No successor for considerable time. Vitellius is Propraetor of Syria till 37, when Petronius suc¬ ceeded him.
See further, Ramsay — Pictures of the Apostolic Church, X.-XI.; Smith — Paul, pp. 34-44; Cf. Pieper — Der Simon Magus Perikope (1911) ; McGiffert — The Apostolic Age, pp. 81-101.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE ROMAN EMPERORS
Henderson — Life and Principate of Nero (1903). Phillips, Stephen — Nero. A Poem (1906).
Tawr — Tiberius the Tyrant.
Willrich — Caligula (1903).
LESSON V: SAUL’S CONVERSION (About A. D. 35)
Environment of Early Christianity
Chron. N. T.
Epochs in the Life of Paul.
1. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 17-21.
2. Four accounts of the Conversion of Saul.
(a) The historical narrative. Acts ix., 1-30.
(b) A justification of his authority as an apostle. Gal. i, 11-24.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
213
(c) An Explanation of his change from Judaism to Christianity before a mob of his countrymen at Jerusalem. Acts xxii., 1-21.
(d) A formal defense of his life before the Roman and Jewish civil rulers. Acts xxvi., 1-23.
3. Historical exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul, ch. III. and IV., 1-6.
See further, Conybeare and Howson — Paul, ch. III. and Appendix II. (for chronological table) ; Ramsay — Pictures of the Apostolic Church, ch. XVI.; Smith — Paul, pp. 45-62; Robertson, Paul the Interpreter of Christ, ch. I.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON SAUL’S CONVERSION
Fletcher — A Study of the Conversion of St. Paul (1910).
Gardner, P. — The Religious Experience of St. Paul (1911).
Lyttleton — Observations on Saul’s Conversion (1774). Planque — La Conversion de l’Apotre Paul (1909).
LESSON VI: THE YEARS OF TRANSITION
(A. D. 36-46)
Environment of Early Christianity.
Josephus’ Antiquities.
Chron. N. T.
Epochs in the Life of Paul.
1. Environment, pp. 21-25 (top).
2. A glimpse at the outside history. Jos. Ant., XVIII.,
viii., and XIX., vii.-ix.
(a) Embassy to Caius Caligula about worshiping the statue, and how Agrippa came to the rescue. Caligula Emperor, 37-41.
(b) Agrippa rebuilding the walls of Jerusalem.
214 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Judea was part of Agrippa’s kingdom from A. D. 42-44.
(c) Ignoble death of Agrippa at Caesarea, A. D. 44. Importance of this date and A. D. 59 or 60 (com¬ ing of Festus) in chronology of Saul’s career. Cf. account in Acts xii., 18-23.
(d) Because of the youth of Agrippa II., Judea and all the kingdom (Samaria and Galilee) became a Roman province, with Cuspius Fadus as Procu¬ rator. A. D. 44.
3. Opening the door to the Gentiles. Acts ix., 31 — xii.,
25. Peter and Cornelius, the dispersed disciples, Barnabas, Saul, the agents in it through the Holy Spirit.
4. The historical exposition. Epochs in the Life of
Paul, chs. IV. (7 and 8), V.
5. Consult any Bible dictionary about Antioch.
See further, Conybeare and Howson — Paul, ch. IV. ; Ramsay— -St. Paul the Traveller, ch. III.; Smith — Paul, pp. 65-80; Robertson, Types of Preachers, chapter on Barnabas.
LESSON VII : THE EPISTLE OF JAMES
(A. D. 49)
1. The author. James, brother of our Lord (Gal.
1 : 19). See Chron. N. T. and Broadus’ Comm, on Matt, xiii., 55. For later history of James see some Bible dictionary or commentary.
2. Date. Chron. N. T. Exhaustive discussion in Mayor
and in my Practical and Social Aspects of Christianity, ch. I. Two theories.
(a) Before A. D. 50, and so earliest N. T. writing, unless Mark and Thess. be so (or Galatians, according to Ramsay). Time of transition. So most writers.
(b) A. D. 62 or later. So argued from dispersion,
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
215
worship in synagogue, corruptions. But these are all Jewish traits and argue other way. Early date has best ground.
3. Character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
4. Analysis of James. See outline in Chron. N. T.
5. Read the Epistle and also any Bible dictionary on
James.
6. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 35-40.
For further study read Robertson — Practical and So¬ cial Aspects of Christianity ; Patrick — James the Lord’s Brother; Mayor — Commentary on James.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON JAMES
Besides the series by one writer
1. On the English Text
Brown, Charles — The General Epistle of James. Sec¬ ond edition (1907).
Carpenter, W. Boyd — The Wisdom of James the Just (1903).
Dale — Discourses on the Epistle of James (1895). Deems — The Gospel of Common Sense.
Johnstone — Lectures Exegetical and Practical on the Epistle of James. Second edition (1889).
Parry — The General Epistle of James (1904). Plummer — The General Epistle of James. The Ex¬ positor’s Bible (1891).
Plumptre — The General Epistle of James. Cambridge Testament for Schools (1878).
Robertson, A. T. — Practical and Social Aspects of Christianity. The Wisdom of James (1915). Winkler — The Epistle of James. American Comm. (1895).
2. On the Greek Text
Belser — Epistel des hi. Jakobus (1909).
216 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Beyschlag— Der Brief des Jakobus. Meyer-Komm. 6 Aufl. (1898).
Camerlinck — Commentarius in epistolas catholicos (1909).
Carr — The General Epistle of James. Cambridge Gk. Testament (1896).
Dibelius — Meyer Comm. 7 Aufl. (1921).
Grafe — Die Stellung und Bedeutung des Jakobus brief es in die Entwickelung des Urchristentums (1904). Hollmann — Der Jakobusbrief. Die Schriften d. N. T. (1907).
Hort— The Epistle of St. James, 1: 1 — 4:7 (1909). Huther — The Meyer Comm, (in English) (1887). Knowling — Comm, on the Epistle of St. James. West¬ minster Series (1904).
Mayor — The Epistle of St. James. Third edition (1910). Meinertz — Der Jakobus Brief und sein Verfasser (1905).
Oesterley — The Epistle of St. Tames. Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
Robertson, A. T. — Practical and Social Aspects of Chris¬ tianity. The Wisdom of James (1915).
Ropes — The Epistle of James. Int. and Crit. Comm. (1915).
Soden, H. von — Der brief des Jakobus. Hand Comm. (1893).
Spitta — Der Brief des Jakobus (1906).
Weiss, B. — Der Jakobusbrief und die neuere Kritik (1904).
Windisch — Handbuch zum N. T. (1911).
LESSON VIII: PAUL’S FIRST MISSIONARY
JOURNEY
(A. D. 48 to 49)
1. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 25-29.
2. The Scripture narrative. Acts, chs. xiii. and xiv.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
217
3. The historical and geographical exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul, ch. VI. For Cyprus, Pam- phylia, Pisidia, Lycaonia, see Bible dictionary. Trace on map.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Chs. V. and VI. ; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, ch. IV.- VI.; Smith-— Paul, pp. 81-106; Robertson, Making Good in the Ministry (Sketch of John Mark).
LESSON IX: THE CONFERENCE AT JERUSALEM
(A. D. 49)
A great Crisis in Christianity. Shall the Jewish Cere¬ monial law be imposed upon the Gentiles?
1. Environment, pp. 30-35 (top).
2. The Scripture narrative. Acts xv., 1-35 ; Gal., chap.
• • li.
(a) The disturbances at Antioch by the Judaizers from Jerusalem, and the appeal to Jerusalem. Acts xv., 1-3.
(b) First public meeting at Jerusalem. Acts xv., 4, 5.
(c) Private interview with leading brethren. Gal.
ii., 1-10.
(d) The second public meeting. Acts xv., 6-29.
(e) The reception of the decision at Antioch. Acts xv., 30-35.
(f) Peter’s subsequent conduct at Antioch. Gal. ii., 11-21.
3. The historical exposition. Epochs in the Life of
Paul, ch. VII.
4. Consult any Bible dictionary for geographical points
and map also.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. VII.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, ch. VII.;
218 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Ramsay — Church in the Roman Empire, chs. II.-III.; Smith — Paul, pp. 107-115; chapter on Paul’s Ecclesias¬ tical Independence in Robertson, Paul the Interpreter of Christ.
LESSON X: FROM ANTIOCH TO TROAS
(A. D. 49)
1. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 41-46.
2. First of Five Lessons on the Second Mission Tour
of Paul. A. D. 49-53.
3. Scripture narrative. Chron. N. T., Acts 15 : 36 —
16:10.
4. Historical Exposition. Robertson, Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 138-148.
5. Consult any Bible dictionary for Galatia.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. VIII.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 194-205 ; Ramsay — Church in the Roman Empire, ch. IV.; Smith — Paul, pp. 116-126.
LESSON XI : PAUL AT PHILIPPI, THESSA- LONICA, AND BERCEA
(A. D. 49 or 50)
1. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 46-51.
2. Scripture narrative. Chron. N. T., Acts 16:11—
17 : 15 ; 1 Thess. 1-3.
3. Historical Exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 148-157.
4. Consult any Bible dictionary for Philippi, Thessa-
lonica, Beroea.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. IX.; Ramsay— St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 205-236; Smith — Paul, pp. 126-142.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 219
Cf. Wace and Thompson — Prehistoric Thessaly
(1912).
LESSON XII : PAUL AT ATHENS (A. D. 49 or 50)
1. Environment, pp. 51-55.
2. Scripture Narrative. Chron. N. T., Acts 17 : 16-34.
3. Historical Exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 157-162.
4. Consult any Bible Dictionary for Athens.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. X.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 237-252; Smith — Paul, pp. 142-149; chapter on Paul in the Center of Greek Culture in Robertson, Paul the Inter¬ preter of Christ.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON ATHENS
Alexander — St. Paul at Athens (1865).
D’Ooge — The Acropolis (1909).
Ferguson — Hellenistic Athens (1911).
Harnack — 1st die Rede des Paulus in Athen ein Ursprunglicher Bestandtheil der Apostelgeschichte ? (1913).
Macduff — St. Paul at Athens (1887).
Shakespeare, Chas. — St. Paul in Athens (1878). Tucker — Life in Ancient Athens (1906).
On Stoic and Epicurean philosophy, see previous bibliography.
LESSON XIII : PAUL AT CORINTH
(A. D. 50-52)
1. Environment, pp. 55-60.
2. Scripture Narrative. Chron. N. T., Acts 18:1-17;
I Cor. 1-3.
220 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
3. Historical Exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 162-166.
4. Consult any Bible dictionary for Corinth.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XII.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 253-261; Smith — Paul, pp. 149-152, 185-188.
Cf. Munziger- — Paulus in Corinth (1908).
LESSON XIV: THE THESSALONIAN LETTERS AND RETURN TO ANTIOCH
(A. D. 50 or 51)
1. The Four Groups of Paul’s Epistles. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 166-167.
2. A Sketch of Paul. Chron. N. T.
3. Introduction to and outline of 1 Thessalonians.
Chron. N. T.
4. Read 1 Thessalonians.
5. Introduction to and outline of 2 Thessalonians.
Chron. N. T.
6. Read 2 Thessalonians.
7. Occasion of these two Epistles. Epochs in the Life
of Paul, pp. 167-171.
8. Return to Antioch via Jerusalem. Acts 18:18-22;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 171-172.
9. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 60-63.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson —
Ch. XI. and end of ch. XII. ; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 262-266; Milligan, Frame or Denney — On 1 and 2 Thessalonians; Smith — Paul, pp. 152-185.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON 1 AND 2 THESSALONIANS Besides the series by the same men.
1. On the English Text
Adeney — New-Century Bible (1907).
Buckland — Comm, on 2 Thess. (1908).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
221
Bullinger — Thess. Epistles (1901).
Cowles — Shorter Epistles of Paul (1879).
Denney — Exp. Bible (1892).
Findlay — Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges (1891).
Garrod — Analysis with Notes (1899).
Hutchinson — Lectures on 1 and 2 Thess. (1883). Lattey — The Epistles to the Thessalonians (1913). Lillie — Lectures on Thess. (1860).
Mackintosh, R. — In Westminster N. T. (1909). Sadler — Eps. of Paul to the Col., Thess., and Tim. (1890).
Stevens — Eps. to the Thess. Am. Comm. (1887).
2. On the Greek Text
Askwith — An Introduction to the Thessalonian Epistles (1902).
Bornemann — In Meyer Comm. (1884).
Eadie — A Comm, on the Greek Text of Paul to the Thess. (1877).
Dibelius — Lietzmann’s Handbuch (1911).
Dobschutz — Meyer Komm. (1909).
Ellicott — Comms. Critical and Grammatical (1884). Findlay — The Epistles of Paul to the Thess. Camb. Gk. Test. (1904).
Frame — A Crit. and Exeg. Comm, on the Eps. of St.
Paul to the Thess. Int. Crit. Comm. (1912). Gutjahr — Die zwei Briefe an die Thess. und der Brief an die Galater (1913).
Harnack — Das Problem des zweiten Thessalonicher- briefs (1910).
Holtzmann, H. J. — 1 Thess. (1911).
Knabenbauer — Comm, in epistolas ad Thessalonicenses (1913).
Jowett — Eps. of St. Paul to the Thess.
Lightfoot — Notes on Eps. of Paul (1895).
222 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Mayer— Die Thessalonicherbriefe (1908).
Milligan — St. Paul’s Eps. to the Thess. (1908). Moffatt— St. Paul’s Eps. to the Thess. Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
Plummer— First Thessalonians (1918) ; Second Thessa- lonians (1918).
Schmidt — Comm, on 1 Thess. (1885).
Schmiedel — Holtzmann’s Hand-Komm. 2 Aufl. (1892). Toussaint— Lettres aux Thess., aux Galates, aux Corin- thiens (1909).
Wohlenberg — Zahn Komm. 2 Aufl. (1908).
Woste — Comm, in Epistolas ad Thess. (1917).
Wrede — Die Echtheit des zweiten Thess. (1903).
LESSON XV: PAUL AT EPHESUS (52-55 or 56)
1. Third Mission Tour of Paul, A. D. 52-56 or 57.
2. The Statesmanship of Paul. Epochs in the Life of
Paul, pp. 173-178.
3. Scripture Narrative. Chron. N. T., Acts 18:23—
19 : 20.
4. Historical exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 178-183.
5. Any Bible dictionary for Ephesus.
6. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 63-67.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XIV.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 267-273; Ramsay— Pauline and Other Studies, III., VIII. ; Ram¬ say — Church in the Roman Empire, chs. V.-VII. ; Smith — Paul, pp. 188-192, 221-234.
Cf. Wood — Discoveries in Ephesus (1877) ; Wynne — Apollos (1910) ; chapter on Apollos in Robertson’s Types of Preachers in the New Testament.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
223
LESSON XVI: FIRST CORINTHIANS 1-7
(A. D. 55 or 56)
1. Second Group of Paul’s Epistles. Chron. N. T.
2. The date of 1 Corinthians and how shown. Chron.
N. T.
3. Place of writing and how known. Chron. N. T.
4. Occasion of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 186-189.
5. Purpose of the Epistle. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
p. 189.
6. Outline and contents. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 189 f.
7. Style and character. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 190 f .
8. Treatment of Timothy and Titus at Corinth. Epochs
in the Life of Paul, pp. 191-193.
9. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 68-73.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XV.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 273-277; Smith — Paul, pp. 234-268.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON 1 CORINTHIANS
Besides continuous commentaries 1. On the English Text
Beet — First and Second Cor. Second edition (1884). Dods — Exp. Bible (1889).
Evans — Speaker’s Comm. (1881).
Gould — Am. Comm. (1887).
Kay — Cor. Epistles (1887).
Massie — Corinthians. New-Century Bible. McFadyen — Eps. to the Cors. (1911).
224 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Parry — Cambridge Bible for Schools (1916).
Ramsay — Historical Comm. (The Expositor, sixth series).
Rendall — The Epistles of St. Paul to the Cors. Date and Composition (1909).
Riggs and Reed — -Epistles to the Corinthians (1922). Robertson, F. W. — Expository Sermons on 1 and 2 Cors. (1870)/
Walker, D. — Letters of St. Paul to the Corinthians (1909).
Walker — Reader’s Comm.
2. On the Greek Text
Bach mann — Zahn Komm. (1910).
Bousset — Schriften d. N. T. (1906).
Edwards — First Cor. (1885).
Ellicott — Crit. and Grammatical Comm. (1887). Findlay — Exp. Gk. Test. (1900).
Godet — Two volumes (1886-7).
Goudge — West. Comm.
Heinrici — Das erste Sendschreiben (1880).
Kuhl— 1 Kor. (1905).
Lietzmann — 1 and 2 Kor. Handbuch (1907).
Lias — -Camb. Gk. Test. (1879).
Lightfoot — -Notes on 1-7 (1895).
Parry — Cambridge Greek Testament (1910). Robertson-Plummer — Int. Crit. (1911).
Schaefer — Erklarung der Briefe Pauli an die Korinther (1903).
Schmiedel — Hand-Comm. (1892).
Stanley — Eps. to the Cors. (1882).
Weiss, J. — Meyer Komm. 9 Aufl. (1910).
Cf. Lutgert — Freihertspredigt und Schwarmgeister in Korinth (1908) ; Mqsimann — Das Zungreden (1911) ; Rohr— Paulus und die Gemeinde von Korinth; Stein- mann — Paulus und die Sklaven zu Korinth (1911).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
225
LESSON XVII: 1 CORINTHIANS 8-16
Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 73-78.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XIII.; Smith — Paul, pp. 269-322.
LESSON XVIII : FROM EPHESUS TO MACE¬ DONIA AND 2 CORINTHIANS 1-7
(A. D. 55 or 56)
1. The plans of Paul. Acts 19 : 21 f ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, p. 183 f.
2. The riot in Ephesus. Acts 19 : 23-41 ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 184-186.
3. The suspense in Troas. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
p. 195.
4. The rebound in Macedonia. Acts 20: 1 ; 2 Cor. 1-7 ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 194-198.
5. Date of 2 Corinthians. Chron. N. T.
6. Unity of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, p. 197 f.
7. Purpose of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, p. 197 f.
8. Outline of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
9. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 78-83 (top). For further study, see Conybeare and Howson —
Ch. XVI.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 277-282; Smith— Paul, pp. 322-327, 341-370.
%
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON 2 CORINTHIANS ALONE
Besides the continuous books and those on both 1 and 2 Cors.
226 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
1. On the English Text
Denney— Exp. Bible (1894).
Farrar — Pulpit Comm. (1883).
Goudge — Mind of St. Paul in 2 Cor. (1911).
Kennedy, J. H. — The Second and Third Letters of St.
Paul to the Corinthians (1900).
Plumptre — Ellicott Comm.
Robertson, A. T.— The Glory of the Ministry. Exposi¬ tion of 2 Cor. 2 : 12—6 : 10.
Waite— Speaker’s Comm. (1881).
Warm an — -Reader’s Comm.
2. On the Greek Text
Bachmann- — Der zweite Brief des Paulus an die Ko- rinther. Zahn Komm. (1909).
Barde — Etude sur la epitre aux Cor. (1906).
Belser — Der zweite Brief des Apostels Paulus an die Korinther (1910).
Bernard— Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
Cornel Y-—Commentarium ( 1907) .
Godet- — La seconde epitre aux Corinthiens (1914). Heinrici — Meyer Komm. 8 Aufl. (1900).
Heinrici— -Das zweite Sendschreiben des Ap. Paulus an die Kor. (1887).
Isaacs- — Second Epistle to the Corinthians (1921). Lietzmann — -Handbuch (1907).
Menzies— -The Second Epistle to the Corinthians (1912). Parry— Cambridge Greek Testament (1916).
Plummer — Int. Crit. Comm. (1915).
LESSON XIX: 2 CORINTHIANS 8-13 (A. D. 55 or 56)
1. Scripture lesson. 2 Cor. 8-13.
2. Spirit of Paul in these chapters. Epochs in the Life
of Paul, p. 198 f.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 227
3. Tourneying toward Greece via Illyricum. Acts 20:2;
Rom. 15:19.
4. The Triumph in Corinth. Epochs in the Life of
Paul, p. 200.
5. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 83-89.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XVII. ; Ramsay — Church in the Roman Empire, ch. XIII.; Smith — Paul, pp. 327-345, 367-371 ; Paul as Church Architect in Corinth (Robertson, Paul the In¬ terpreter of Christ).
LESSON XX: EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS (Probably A. D. 55 or 56)
1. Date. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 201-203.
2. North or South Galatia. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, p. 201 f.
3. Occasion for Writing the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, p. 203 f.
4. Character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, p. 204 f .
5. Outline. Chron. N. T.
6. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 89-93.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XVIII. ; Ramsay — Church in the Roman Empire, ch. VI.; Smith — Paul, pp. 193-221.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON GALATIANS
Besides continuous works
1. On the English Text
Adeney — New-Century Bible.
Askwith — Destination and Date of Galatians.
228 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Bacon — Bible for Home and School (1909).
Beet — Ep. to the Gal. (1885).
Emmet — St. Paul’s Ep. to the Gal. The Reader’s Comm. (1912).
Findlay — Expositor’s Bible (1888).
Gibbon — Ep. to the Gal.
Girdlestone — Devotional Comm.
Hovey — Am. Comm. (1887).
Macgregor — Christian Freedom (1914).
Round — Date of St. Paul’s Ep. to the Galatians (1907). Sanday — Ellicott’s Comm. (1879).
Stevens — Expository lectures (1894).
Watkins — St. Paul’s Fight for Galatians (1914).
Wood — Studies in St. Paul’s Ep. to the Gal. (1887).
2. On the Greek Text
Bousset — Die Schriften d. N. T. (1907).
Burton — Int. and Crit. Comm. (1920).
Ellicott — Ep. to the Gal. New edition (1884). Lagrange — Saint Paul, epitre aux Galates (1918). Lietzmann — Handbuch (1910).
Lightfoot — St. Paul’s Ep. to the Gal. Eleventh edition (1905).
Lipsius — Hand-Comm. (1902).
Loisy — L’epitre aux Galates (1916).
Luther, Martin — Latin Original in 1519, English tr. in 1575.
Ramsay — Hist. Comm. (1900).
Rendall — Exp. Gk. Test. (1903).
Sieffert — Meyer Komm. 9 Aufl. (1899).
Steinmann — Die Leserkreise des Galaterbriefs (1908). Steinmann — Die Abfassungszeit des Galaterbriefs (1906).
Weber — Der Galaterbrief aus sich selbst geschichtlich erklart.
Westcott, F. B. — St. Paul and Justification (1913). Zahn — Zahn Komm. 2 Aufl. (1907).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
229
LESSON XXI: ROMANS 1-8 (A. D. 56 or 57)
1. Date and place of writing. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs
in the Life of Paul, p. 205 f.
2. The amanuensis and the bearer of the letter. Chron.
N. T.
3. Plans of Paul and reason for writing. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 206-210.
4. Character of the church in Rome. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, p. 206 f .
5. Character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 210-212.
6. Outline. Chron. N. T.
7. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 93-98.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch. XIX. ; any Bible dictionary on Romans or introduc¬ tion to a commentary ; Smith — Paul, pp. 374-424.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON ROMANS
Besides continuous books
1. On the English Text
Beet — Ninth edition (1901).
Brown, D. — Analytical exposition (1860).
Chalmers — Expository discourses.
Garvie — New-Century Bible (1901).
Gifford — Speaker’s Comm. (1881).
Gore — A Practical Expos, of Romans.
Grey — Reader’s Comm. (1910).
Griffith -Thomas — 3 vols. (1913).
Hodge, Charles — Theol. expos. (1856).
Hort — Romans and Ephesians. Intr. (1895).
Liddon — Explanatory Analysis (1893).
230 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Moule — Cambridge Bible (1879).
Moule- — Expos. Bible (1893).
Stifler — Exposition (1897).
Williams — An Exposition.
2. On the Greek Text
Barth — Der Romerbrief (1919).
Denney — Exp. Gk. Test. (1901).
Feine — Der Romerbrief (1903).
Godet — T ranslation ( 1 883 ) .
Jowett — Third edition (1894).
Julicher — Schriften d. N. T. 2 Aufl. (1907).
Kuehl— Der Brief des Paulus an die Romer (1913). Lagrange — L’epitre aux Romains (1916).
Lightfoot — Notes on 1-7 (1895).
Lipsius — Hand-Comm. 2 Aufl. (1893).
Lietzmann — Handbuch (1906). 2 Aufl. (1919). Luetgert — Der Romerbrief als historisches Problem (1913).
Pallis — Comm. (1920).
Parry — The Epistle of Paul to the Romans (1912). Richter — Kritisch-polemische Untersuchungen fiber den Romerbrief (1908).
Sanday and Headlam — Int. Crit. Comm. Fifth edition (1905).
Siiedd — Comm, on Rom. (1893).
Spitta — Untersuchungen, etc. (1901).
Toussaint — L’epitre aux Romains (1913).
Vaughan — Seventh edition (1890).
Von Manen — Die Unechtheit des rom. Briefs (1906). Weiss, B. — Meyer Komm. 9 Aufl. (1899).
Westcott, F. B.— -St. Paul and Justification (1913). Zahn— Zahn Komm. (1910).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
231
LESSON XXII : ROMANS 9-16
Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 98-101.
For further study, see commentaries on Romans; Smith — Paul, pp. 425-456.
LESSON XXIII: THE LAST JOURNEY TO
JERUSALEM
(Spring of 56 or 57)
1. Scripture Narrative. Acts 20 : 3-21 : 16.
2. The gathering storm at Jerusalem. Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 213-219.
3. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 101-108.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XX.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 286-303; Smith — Paul, pp. 456-467.
LESSON XXIV: PAUL AT JERUSALEM THE
LAST TIME
(Pentecost of 56 or 57)
1. Scripture narrative. Acts 21 : 17-23 : 35.
2. Historical exposition. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 220-240.
3. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 108-111.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXI.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 303-313; Smith — Paul, pp. 467-479.
232 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
LESSON XXV: PAUL A PRISONER AT
CESAREA
(56-8 or 57-9)
1. Paul before Felix. Acts 24; Epochs in the Life of
Paul, pp. 240-6.
2. Paul before Festus. Acts 25:1-12; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 246-9.
3. Paul before Agrippa. Acts 25:13—26:32; Epochs
in the Life of Paul, pp. 249-253.
4. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 111-117.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXII. ; Ramsay — Pictures of the Apostolic Church, chs. XLII.-XLIV. ; Smith— Paul, pp. 480-489.
LESSON XXVI: PAUL’S VOYAGE TO ROME (Autumn of 58 or 59 to spring of 59 or 60)
1. Caesarea to Myra. Acts 27 : 1-5; Epochs in the Life
of Paul, pp. 256 f .
2. Myra to Fair Havens. Acts 27 : 6-8; Epochs in Life
of Paul, p. 257.
3. Fair Havens to Melita. Acts 27:9-44; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 258-264.
4. The Winter in Melita. Acts 28: 1-10; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 264 f.
5. Melita to Rome. Acts 28: 11-16; Epochs in the Life
of Paul, pp. 265-8.
6. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 118-123. For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXIII.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, Ch. XIV.; Smith — Paul, pp. 490-501 ; chapter on Nautical Terms in Robertson, Luke the Historian.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
233
SPECIAL BOOKS ON VOYAGE OF PAUL AND ANCIENT
SEAFARING
Balmer — Die Romfahrt des Apostels P^ulus (1905). Breuring — Die Nautik der Alten (1886).
Everitt — St. Paul’s Journey to Rome (1904).
Smith — Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul (1880). Torr — Ancient Ships.
Vars — L’art nautique dans l’antiquite (1887).
LESSON XXVII : PAUL IN ROME AND THE LETTER TO THE PHILIPPIANS
(A. D. 60-2 or 61-3)
1. Paul’s effort to win the Jews in Rome. Acts
28 : 16-28 ; Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 268 f .
2. Delay in Paul’s trial and his life in Rome. Acts
28 : 30 f . ; Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 269-272.
3. Third Group of Paul’s Epistles. Chron. N. T.
4. Date of Philippians. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 273-5.
5. Occasion and purpose of the letter. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 273-6.
6. Character of the letter. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 276 f.
7. Outline of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
8. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 123-129.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXIV., XXVI.; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 344-356; Forbes — Footsteps of St. Paul in Rome (1899); any Bible dictionary on Rome; Smith — Paul, pp. 502-522. See Merivale — St. Paul in Rome; Rob¬ ertson — Paul’s Joy in Christ.
234 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON PHILIPPIANS
Besides continuous works
1. On the English Text
Beet — With Col., Eph., Philemon (1891).
Burns — Sermons on Philippians (1917).
Johnstone— Expository lectures. The Phil. Gospel or Pauline Ideals (1904).
Jordan — The Philippian Gospel or Pauline Ideals. Jowett — The High Calling (1909).
Martin — New-Century Bible.
Moule — Philippian Studies.
Noble — Discourses on Philippians.
Rainy — Expos. Bible (1893).
Robertson, A. T. — Paul’s Joy in Christ (1917).
Smith — The Epistle of St. Paul’s First Trial (1899). Yorke — The Law of the Spirit.
2. On the Greek Text
Dibelius — Handbuch zum N. T. (1911).
Ellicott — New edition (1890).
Ewald — Zahn Komm. (1908). 3 Aufl. von Wohlenberg (1917).
Haupt — Meyer Komm. 8 Aufl. (1902).
Jones, M. — Philippians, Westminster Comm.
Kennedy, H. A. A. — Exp. Gk. Test. (1903).
Klopper — Der Brief an die Philipper (1893). Knabenbauer — Comm, in epistolas ad Eph., Phil., et Col. (1913).
Lightfoot — Ninth edition (1891).
Lipsius — Hand-Comm. (1893).
Lueken — Der Brief an die Philipper (1906). Plummer — Philippians (1919).
Robertson, A. T. — Paul’s Joy in Christ (1917).
Soden — 2 Aufl. (1906).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
235
Tillmann — Philipper brief (1917).
Vincent — Int. Crit. Comm. (1897). Second edition (1910).
LESSON XXVIII : PHILEMON AND COLOS-
SIANS
(A. D. 62 or 63)
1. Date of Philemon. Chron. N. T.
2. Purpose and character of the Letter. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 278 f.
3. Outline of the letter. Chron. N. T.
4. Date of Colossians. Chron. N. T.
5. The occasion of the letter. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 279.
6. The new peril of Gnosticism. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs
in the Life of Paul, pp. 280-5.
7. Outline of the letter. Chron. N. T.
8. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 129-134.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXV.; Introduction to Lightfoot’s commentary (The Colossian Heresy) ; any Bible dictionary on Philemon, Slavery, Colossse, Colossians, and Gnosticism ; Smith — Paul, pp. 546-576.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON PHILEMON AND COLOSSIANS
Besides continuous works 1. On the English Text
Alexander, Gross — Colossians and Eph. Bible for Home and School (1910).
Christ and Colossse (1922).
236 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Dargan — Am. Comm. (1887).
Findlay — Pulpit Comm. (1895).
Maclaren — Expos. Bible (1888).
Moule — Cambr. Bible (1893).
Moule — Colossian Studies.
Mullins — Convention Comm, on Ephesians and Colos- sians (1913).
Nicholson — Oneness with Christ.
Rutherford— -Epistles to Colossae and Laodicea (1908).
2. On the Greek Text
Abbott, T. K. — Int. Crit. Comm. (1897).
Dibelius — Handbuch zum N. T. (1912).
Ellicott — New edition (1890).
Ewald — Zahn Komm. (1905).
Haupt — Meyer Komm. (1903).
Lightfoot — Tenth edition (1904).
Meinertz — Die Gefangenschaftsbriefe (1917). Oesterley — Exp. Gk. Test, on Philemon (1910). Oltramare — Commentaire (1891).
Peake — Exp. Gk. Test, on Colossians (1903). Schumann — Paulus an Philemon (1908).
Soden — Hand-Comm. 2 Aufl. (1893).
Vincent — Int. Crit. on Philemon (1897).
Westcott, F. B. — A Letter to Asia (1914).
Williams — Cambr. Gk. Test. (1907).
LESSON XXIX: EPHESIANS (A. D. 62 or 63)
1. Date of the epistle. Chron. N. T.
2. Destination of the epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 285 f.
3. Purpose of the letter. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 286 f.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 237
4. Contrast with Colossians. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in
the Life of Paul, pp. 287-9.
5. Outline of the letter. Chron. N. T.
6. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 134-139.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXV.; any Bible dictionary and commentary; Smith — Paul, pp. 522-545.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON EPHESIANS
Besides continuous works by same author
1. On English Text
Alexander — Bible for Home and School (1910).
Beet — Comm, on Eph., Phil., Col., Philemon (1891). Candlish — Exposition (1895).
Dale — Lectures on Ephesians.
Findlay — Expos. Bible (1892).
Gore — A Practical Exposition (1898).
Hitchcock — Epistle to the Ephesians — An Encyclical of St. Paul (1913).
Hort — Rom. and Eph. Intr. (1895).
Lidgett — God in Christ Jesus. A Study of St. Paul’s Ep. to the Eph. (1915).
Martin — New-Century Bible.
McPhail — Ep. to Eph. (1893).
McPherson — Ep. to Eph. (1892).
Moule — Ephesian Studies (1900).
Mullins — Convention Series (1913).
Stroeter — The Glory of the Body of Christ (1909).
2. On the Greek Text
Abbott — Int. Crit. Comm. (1897).
Belser — Komm. (1908).
Dibelius — Handbuchzum N. T. (1912).
238 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Eadie — Third edition (1883).
Ellicott — Fifth edition (1884).
Ewald — Zahn Komm. 2 Aufl. (1910).
Haupt — Meyer Komm. 8 Aufl. (1902).
Knabenbauer- — Commentarius in epistolas ad Ephesios (1913).
Krukenberg— Der Brief an Eph. (1903).
Lueken — Die Schriften des N. T. (1906).
Meinertz — Die Gefangenschaftsbriefe (1917).
Murray — Cambr. Gk. Test. (1915).
Oltramare — Commentaire (1891).
Robinson — St. Paul’s Ep. to the Eph. (1903).
Salmond — Exp. Gk. Test. (1903).
Soden — Hand-Comm. 2 Aufl. (1893).
Westcott, F. B. — St. Paul’s Ep. to the Eph. (1906). Wohlenberg — Strack-Zoeckler ( 1895 ) .
LESSON XXX : RELEASE OF PAUL AND
1 TIMOTHY
(Probably 63 to 66 or 67)
1. The outcome of the first Roman imprisonment.
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 290-2.
2. The visit to the east. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
p. 292.
3. The visit to Spain. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 292 f.
4. The Burning of Rome. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 293 f .
5. The return east for the last time. Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 294 f .
6. Date of the Pastoral Epistles (fourth group).
Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the Life of Paul, p. 295.
7. Genuineness of the Pastoral Epistles. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 295 f.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 239
8. Sketch of Timothy’s career. Chron. N. T.
9. Paul’s location when he wrote 1 Timothy (1:3).
10. Purpose and character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ;
Epochs in the Life of Paul, pp. 296-9.
11. Outline of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
12. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 140-143.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXVII. (first half), Appendix I. on the Date of the Pas¬ toral Epistles; Ramsay— St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 356-60; Smith — Paul, pp. 579-622.
See also Steinmetz — Die zweite romische Gefang- schaft des Apostels Paulus (1897) ; Harrison — The Problem of the Pastoral Epistles (1921).
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON PASTORAL EPISTLES
Besides continuous works
1. On the English Text
Bowen — Dates of Pastoral Letters (1900).
Findlay — Appendix on the Pastoral Epistles to Saba¬ tier’s Apostle Paul (1893).
Greene, J. P. — Convention Series (1915).
Harvey — Am. Comm. (1890).
Horton — New-Century Bible.
Humphreys — Cambridge Bible (1897).
James — The Genuineness and Authorship of the Pastoral Epistles (1906).
Laughlin — The Pastoral Epistles in the Light of One Roman Imprisonment (1905).
Lilley — The Pastoral Eps. (1901).
Moule — Second Timothy.
Plummer — Expos. Bible (1896).
Pope — Pastoral Eps. (1901).
Ramsay — Historical Comm, on the First Ep. to Tim. (The Expositor, 1909-11).
240 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Stock- — Plain Talks on the Pastoral Epistles (1914). Strachan — West. N. T. (1910).
Wage— Speaker’s Comm. (1885).
2. On the Greek Text
Belser — -Die Pastoral brief e (1907).
Bernard-— Cambr. Gk. Test. (1899).
Bertrand— Essai critique, etc. (1888).
Brown, E. F. — Pastoral Epistles (Westminster Comm., 1917).
Dibelius— Handbuch zum N. T.
Ellicott — Fifth edition (1883).
Eylau — Zur Cbron. d. Pastoralbriefe (1888). Harrison— The Problem of the Pastoral Epistles (1921). Hesse — Die Entstehung der neut. Hirtenbriefe (1889). Holtzmann— Die Pastoralbriefe kritisch und exegetisch behandelt (1880).
Kohler — Schriften N. T. 2 Aufl. (1907). Knabenbauer— Commentarius in S. Paul’s Epistolas ad Timotheum, ad Titum (1913).
Kraukenberg — -Komm. (1901).
Lutgert— Die Irrlehrer der Pastoralbriefe (1909). Maier— Die Hauptprobleme der Pastoralbriefe Pauli (1910).
Mayer — -Ueber der Pastoralbriefe (1913).
Meinertz— Die Pastoralbriefe des heil. Paulus (1913). Niebergall— Handbuch zum N. T. (1909).
Parry — The Pastoral Epistles (1920).
Soden— Hand-Comm. ( 1893 ) .
Weiss, B.— Meyer Komm. 7 Aufl. (1907).
White— Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
Wohlenberg— Zahn Komm. (1906).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
241
LESSON XXXI: THE LAST YEAR OF
PAUL’S LIFE
(Autumn of 67 till summer of 68)
1. Sketch of Titus. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the Life
of Paul, pp. 299 f.
2. Paul’s plans for the winter. Epochs in the Life of
Paul, p. 300.
3. The heresy in Crete. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 300 f .
4. Date of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
5. Purpose of the Epistle. Chron. N. T. ; Epochs in the
Life of Paul, pp. 301 f.
6. Outline of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
7. The arrest of Paul. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
p. 303.
8. The new charges. Epochs in the Life of Paul,
pp. 304 f.
9. The close confinement. Epochs, pp. 305 f.
10. The desertion of Paul’s friends. Epochs, pp. 306 f.
11. The first stage of the trial. Epochs, pp. 307-9.
12. The loneliness of Paul. Epochs, pp. 309-11.
13. A last message to Timothy (date and purpose of
2 Tim.). Chron. N. T. ; Epochs, pp. 311 f.
14. Outline of 2 Timothy. Chron. N. T.
15. Paul’s estimate of his career. Epochs, pp. 312 f.
16. Paul longs for Jesus. Epochs, pp. 313-15.
17. The Condemnation. Epochs, p. 315.
18. Paul’s death. Epochs, pp. 316 f.
19. A backward look. Epochs, pp. 317-19.
20. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 143-147.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXVII. (last half) ; Ramsay — St. Paul the Traveller, pp. 360-366; Ramsay — Pauline Studies, Ch. XIV.; Pic¬ tures of the Apostolic Church, chs. L.-LI. ; Smith — Paul, pp. 623-661.
242 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
LESSON XXXII: I PETER (About A. D. 65)
1. The General or Catholic Epistles. Chron. N. T.
2. Sketch of Simon Peter. Chron. N. T.
3. Date of 1 Peter. Chron. N. T.
4. Location of Peter at time of writing. Chron. N. T.
5. Readers of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
6. Character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
7. Outline of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
8. Consult any Bible dictionary on 1 Peter.
9. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 147-156.
For further study, see Ramsay — Church in the Roman
Empire, ch. XIII.; Lumby — (Expositor’s Bible); Bigg — (Int. Crit. Comm.) ; Expositor’s Gk. Test.
See also Erbes — Die Todestage der Apostel Paulus und Petrus (1899) ; Guignebert — La primaute de Pierre et la venne de Pierre a Rome (1909) ; Lietzmann — Petrus und Paulus in Rom.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON EPISTLES OF PETER AND JUDE
Besides continuous works
1. On the English Text
Bennett — New-Century Bible (1901).
Cooke and Lumby — Speaker’s Comm. (1881). Johnstone — The First Ep. of Peter (1888).
Lumby — Expos. Bible (1893).
Plumptre — Cambr. Bible (1879).
Ross — First Epistle of Peter (1918).
S almond — S chaffs Comm. (1883).
Williams — Am. Comm. (1890).
2. On the Greek Text
Beck — Erklarung der Brief e Petri (1895).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES 243
Bigg — Int. Crit. Comm. (1901).
Blenkin — The First Ep. General of St. Peter (1915). Camerlinck — Commentarius in epistolas catholicas (1909).
Couard — Commentaire (1895).
De Zwaan — 2 Peter en Judas (1909).
Foster — Literary Relations of the First Ep. of Peter (1913).
Georghian — Der Brief des Judas (1905).
Goutard— -Essai critique et historique sur la prem. epitre de S. Pierre (1905).
Grosch — Die Echtheit des II. Briefes Petri. 2 Aufl. (1914).
Gunkel— Schriften d. N. T. 2 Aufl. (1907).
Hart, Strachan, Mayor — Exp. Gk. Test. (1910). Henkel — Der zweite Brief des Apostelfiirsten Petrus gepriift auf seine Echtheit (1904).
Hollmann — Die Schriften d. N. T. (1906).
Hort— I. Peter 1:1-2:17 (1898).
King — Did St. Peter Write in Greek? (1871).
Knopf — Die Briefe Petri und Juda (1912).
Kuhl — Meyer Komm. 6 Aufl. (1897).
Maier — Der Judasbrief (1906).
Masterman — Eps. of St. Peter (1900).
Mayor — The Epistle of St. Jude and the Epistle of St. Peter (1907).
Robson — Studies in the Sec. Ep. of Peter (1915).
Soden — Hand-Comm. (1896).
Spitta — Der zweite Brief des Petrus und der Brief des Judas (1885).
Van Kasteren — De Eerste Brief van d. Ap. Petrus (1911).
Weiss, B. — Die erste Petrusbrief und die Kritik (1906). Windisch — Handbuch zum N. T. (1911).
Wohlenberg — Zahn Komm. (1915).
244 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
LESSON XXXIII : JUDE AND 2 PETER (About A. D. 66-6 7)
1. Sketch of Jude. Chron. N. T.
2. Date and relation to 2 Peter. Chron. N. T.
3. Purpose and Character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
4. Outline of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
5. Date and readers of 2 Peter. Chron. N. T.
6. Purpose and character of the Epistle. Chron. N. T.
7. Outline. Chron. N. T.
8. Any Bible dictionary on Jude and 2 Peter.
9. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 156-163.
For further study, see Lumby- — (Expos. Bible) ; Bigg
— (Int. Crit. Comm.) ; Mayor and Strachan — Exp. Gk. Test.
LESSON XXXIV: HEBREWS 1-7 (About A. D. 69)
1. Date. Chron. N. T.
2. Author. Chron. N. T.
3. Destination. Chron. N. T.
4. Purpose and character of the book. Chron. N. T.
5. Outline. Chron. N. T.
6. Any Bible dictionary or commentary on Hebrews.
7. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 164-174.
For further study, see Conybeare and Howson — Ch.
XXVIII.; Edwards — Expositor’s Bible; Westcott — Commentary ; Scott, E. F. — The Epistle to the Hebrews.
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON HEBREWS Besides continuous works
Anderson, R. — The Hebrews Epistle in the Light of the Types (1911).
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
245
Ayles — Destination, Date and Authorship of the Ep. to the Hebrews (1899).
Bailey — Leading Ideas of Ep. to the Heb. (1907). Dale — Jewish Temple in the Christian Church.
Du Bose — High Priesthood and Sacrifice (1908). Edwards — Expos. Bible (1888).
Goodspeed — Bible for Home and School (1908). Kendrick — Am. Comm. (1890).
Lidgett — Sonship and Salvation (1921).
Lowrie — An Explanation of Hebrews.
Milligan — The Theology of the Ep. to the Heb. (1899).
Moule — Messages from the Ep. to the Heb. (1909). Murray — Devotional comm.
Nairne — The Epistle of Priesthood (1913).
Peake — New-Century Bible (1904).
Porter — The Twelve-Gemmed Crown (1913).
Rendall — The Theology of the Hebrew Christians (1886).
Rotherham — Ep. to the Heb. (1906).
Saphir — Exposition of Hebrews.
Scott, E. F. — The Epistle to the Hebrews (1922). Shepardson — Lectures on Heb.
Welch — Authorship of the Ep. to the Heb. (1899).
Besides continuous works
1. On the Greek Text
Andel — De Brief aan de Hebraer (1906).
Blass — Brief an die Hebraer, Text, Angabe der Rhythmen (1903).
Bruce — The Ep. to the Heb. (1899).
Davidson, A. B. — Ep. to the Heb. (1882).
Delitzsch — Two volumes. Transl. (1870).
Dibelius — Der Verfasser des Hebraerbriefes (1910). Dods — Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
Farrar — Camb. Gk. Test. (1893).
246 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Heigl — Verfasser und Adresse des Briefes an die Hebraer (1905).
Hollmann — Schriften d. N. T. 2 Aufl. (1907).
MacNeill — The Christology of the Ep. to the Heb. (1914).
Menegoz — La theologie de Pepitre aux Hebreaux (1894).
Nairne — The Alexandrian Gospel (1917).
Riggenbach — Zoeckler Komm. 2 Aufl. (1913).
Seeberg — Der Brief an die Hebraer (1912).
Slot — De letterkundige Vorm van den Brief aan de Hebraer (1912).
Soden — Hand-Comm. (1899).
Vaughan — Ep. to Heb. (1899).
Weiss, B. — Meyer Komm. 6 Aufl. (1902).
Weiss, B. — Der Hebraerbrief in zeitgeschichtlicher Be- leuchtung (1910).
Westcott — Ep. to Heb. Third edition (1906).
Wickham — Westm. Comm. (1910).
Windisch — Handbuch zum N. T. (1913).
Wrede — Das literarisches Ratsel des Hebraerbriefs (1906).
LESSON XXXV: HEBREWS 8-13
Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 174-193.
For further study, same references as previous lesson and add Josephus, Ant., Book XX., ch. XI.; War, Book II., chs. XIV.-XX. for a vivid picture of the war with Rome and the destruction of Jerusalem (A. D. 70). Read The Wandering Jew.
THE ACTS AND THE EPISTLES
247
LESSON XXXVI: THE EPISTLES OF JOHN (Perhaps A. D. 85 to 90)
1. Probable date. Chron. N. T.
2. Docetic and Cerinthian Gnosticism. Chron. N. T.
3. Destination of I. John. Chron. N. T.
4. Purpose and character of the Ep. Chron. N. T.
5. Outline of the Ep. Chron. N. T.
6. Destination and character of II. John. Chron. N. T.
7. Outline of II. John. Chron. N. T.
8. Destination and character of III. John. Chron. N. T.
9. Outline. Chron. N. T.
10. Any Bible dictionary or commentary on the Epistles
of John.
11. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 194-208.
For further study, see Findlay — Fellowship in the
Eternal; Law — The Tests of Life; Westcott — Comm.; Brooke — (Int. Crit. Comm.).
SPECIAL COMMENTARIES ON THE EPISTLES OF JOHN
Besides continuous works
1. On the English Text
Alexander — Eps. of John (1889).
Barrett — Devot. Comm, on I. John (1910).
Bennett — New-Century Bible.
Cameron — Eps. of John.
Cox — Private Letters of St. Paul and St. John (1887). Findlay — Fellowship in the Eternal (1909).
Gore — Epistles of John (1921).
Green — Ephesian Canonical Writings (1910).
Law — Tests of Life. Second edition (1909).
Lias — Eps. of John (1887).
Ramsay, A. — Westm. N. T. (1910).
248 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Robertson, J. A. — The Johannine Epistles (1920). Sawtelle — Am. Comm. (1890).
Steele — Half Hours with St. John’s Epistles.
Watson — Second edition (1910).
2. On the Greek Text
Besides continuous works
Baumgartner — Schriften d. N. T. (1907).
Belser— -Komm. (1906).
Bresky — Das Verhaltnis des zweiten Johannesbriefes zum dritten (1906).
Brooke — Int. Crit. Comm. (1912).
Haupt — The First Ep. of John (1893). Holtzmann-Bauer — Hand-Comm. ( 1908) .
Luthardt — Zoeckler Komm. 2 Aufl. (1895).
Plummer — Camb. Gk. Test. (1886).
Rothe — Komm. (1878). Tr. in Exp. Times iii.-v. Smith, D. — Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
Weiss, B.— -Meyer Komm. 6 Aufl. (1900).
Westcott — Eps. of John. Third edition (1892). Windisch — Handbuch zum N. T. (1811).
Wurm — Die Irrlehrer im ersten Johannesbrief (1904).
PART IV: THE REVELATION OF JOHN (PROBABLY ABOUT A. D. 95)
PART IV: THE REVELATION OF JOHN
(Probably about A. D. 95.)
Broadus’ Syllabus on Revelation is here reproduced with some additions, and use is made also of the Chron. rN. T., besides references to other literature.
SPECIAL BOOKS ON THE REVELATION
Besides the continuous works
1. On the English Text
Benson — The Apocalypse (1900).
Berg — The Drama of the Apocalypse (1894).
Brown, C. — Heavenly Visions (1911).
Brown, D. — The Structure of the Apocalypse (1891). Calmes — L’apocalypse devant la tradition et devant la critique. Second edition (1907).
Cadwell — The Revelation of Jesus Christ (1920). Campbell — The Patmos Letters Applied to Modern Criticism (1908).
Case — The Millennial Hope (1918).
Case — The Revelation of John (1920).
Charles — Studies in the Apocalypse (1913).
Chevalin — L’apocalypse et les temps presents (1904). Clark — The Holy Land of Asia Minor (1914).
Cowles — Revelation (1871).
Dean — The Book of Revelation (1915).
Eckman — When Christ Comes Again (1917).
Forbes — International Handbook on the Apocalypse (1907).
Geil — The Isle that is called Patmos (1905).
251
252 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDYV
Gibson — Apocalyptic Sketches (1910).
Gigot — The Apocalypse of St. John (1915).
Guinness — The Approaching End of the Age.
Gwynn — The Apocalypse of St. John (1897).
Hill — Apocalyptic Problems (1916).
Horne — The Meaning of the Apocalypse (1916). Johnson — John’s Revelation (1904).
Jowett, G. T. — The Apocalypse of St. John (1910). Lee — Bible (Speaker’s) Comm. (1881).
Matheson — Sidelights upon Patmos.
McNairn — The Apocalypse.
Milligan — Discussions on the Apocalypse (1893). Milligan — The Revelation of St. John (1885). Milligan — The Expos. Bible (1889).
Moule — Some Thoughts on the Seven Epistles (1915). Mozley— The Christian’s Hope in the Apocalypse (1915).
Osborn — The Lion and the Lamb (1922).
Palmer — The Drama of the Apocalypse (1902).
Paul — Latter Day Light on the Apocalypse (1898). Peake — The Person of Christ in the Revelation of John (Mansfield College Essays, 1909).
Porter — Messages of the Apocalyptic Writers (1905). Pounder — Historical Notes on the Book of Revelation (1912).
Ramsay, A. — Westminster N. T. (1910).
Ramsay, W. M. — The Letters to the Seven Churches (1905).
Randall — Pulpit Comm. (1890).
Ross, J. J. — Pearls from Patmos (1923).
Scott, C. Anderson — New-Century Bible (1902).
Scott, C. Anderson— Devot. Comm. (1906).
Scott, J. J. — Lectures on the Apocalypse (1909).
Seiss — The Apocalypse.
Selwyn — The Christian Prophets and the Prophetic Apocalypse (1900).
Smith, J. A. — Am. Comm. (1888).
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
253
Smith, J. A. — Patmos (1875).
Smith — The Divine Parable of History (1901).
Smith — The World Lighted (1890).
Strange — Instructions on the Revelation of St. John the Divine (1900).
Terry — Biblical Apocalyptics (1898).
Timbrell — The Last Message of Jesus Christ (1905). Whiting — The Revelation of John (1918).
2. On the Greek Text
Besides continuous works
Allo — L’apocalypse et l’epoque de la parousia (1915). Allo — Saint Jean. L’ Apocalypse (1921).
Beckwith — The Apocalypse of John (1920).
Bleek — Lectures on the Apocalypse (1875).
Boll — Aus der Offenbarung Johannis (1914).
Bousset — Meyer Komm. 6 Aufl. (1906).
Bullinger — Die Apokalypse (1904).
Bungeroth — Schliissel zur Offenbarung Tohannis (1907).
Charles — The Revelation of John. 2 Vols. (1921). Davidson, S. — Outlines of a Comm, on Revelation (1894).
Delaport — Fragments sahidiques du N. T. Apocalypse (1906).
Elliott — Horae Apocalypticae. Four volumes. Fourth edition (1851). *
Gebhardt — Doctrine of the Apocalypse (1878). Glasgow — Comm, on Apoc. (1872).
Gunkel — Schopfung und Chaos (1905). Holtzmann-Bauer — Hand-Comm. 3 Aufl. (1908). Hort — The Apoc. of St. John, chs. 1-3 (1908). LaMPAKIS — O i Itttol aarripes rrjs 7 AnoKaXyip ews ( 1909) . Laughlin — The Solecisms of the Apocalypse (1902). Linder — Die Offenbarung d. Joh. aufgeschlossen (1905). Moffatt — Exp. Gk. Test. (1910).
254 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Peake — The Revelation of St. John (1921).
Reymond — L’apocalypse (1908).
Sim cox — Camb. Gk. Test. (1893).
Spitta— Die Off. d. Joh. (1889).
Trench — Eps. to Seven Chs. Seventh edition (1897). Swete — Apoc. of St. John. Second edition (1907). Vaughan— Lectures on Rev. of St. John.
Vischer — Die Off. John (1886).
Voelter — Das Problem der Apok. (1893).
Voelter — Die Offenbarung Johannis (1911).
Weiss, B. — Apokalypse. 2 Aufl. (1902).
Weiss, J.— Schriften d. N. T. (1904).
Wellhausen — Analyse d. Off. Joh. (1908).
LESSON I: REVELATION 1-3
1. Date of the Apocalypse. Chron. N. T.
2. Authorship. Chron. N. T.
3. Purpose and character of the Apocalypse. Chron.
N.T.
4. Outline. Chron. N. T.
5. Resemblance to Old Testament (Broadus).
Among the first things that strike one in this book is the resemblance of the imagery to that of the Old Testament prophets, particularly to Isaiah, Ezekiel, Daniel and Zechariah. A few examples :
I., 13 ff. Description of Christ’s glorious appear¬ ance, compare Dan. x., 5, 6 and vii., 9; Ezek. i., 7 and xliii., 2.
IV. Throne, with rainbow. Ezek. i., 26, 28.
4. Twenty-four elders — like heads of David’s courses.
6-8. Four animals. Ezek. i., 10; x., 14; Isa. vi., 2.
V. Scroll written within and without. Ezek. ii., 9 ;
Zech. v., 1-3.
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
255
VI. , 14. As a scroll rolled together. Isa. xxxiv., 4.
VII. , 3. Sealing. Ezek. ix., 4.
X. , 5, 6. Angel swearing. Dan. xii., 7.
XI. , 1. Measuring reed. Ezek. xl., 3; Zech. ii., 1.
3, 4. Two witnesses, two olive-trees, two can¬ dlesticks. Zech. iv., 2, 11, 14.
XII. , 7. Michael. Dan. x., 13, 21.
XIII. , 12. Beast. Dan. vii., 2-8.
XIV. , 20. Wine-press. Isa. lxiii., 3.
XV. , 3. Song of Moses and the Lamb. Ex. 15: Iff.
XVII., XVIII. Babylon. Almost all from the Old Testament.
XIX. , 17. Invitation to the birds. Ezek. xxxix., 17-20.
XX. , 8. Gog and Magog. Ezek. xxxviii., 2; iii.,
19.
12. The books in the judgment. Dan. vii., 10 ; xii., 1 ; Psa. lxix., 28.
XXI. , 1. New heavens and earth. Isa. lxv., 17- 19;lxvi., 22. 10 ff. New Jerusalem. Ezek. xlviii., 30 ff.
XXII. , 1, 2. River out of the throne and the tree of life. Ezek. xlvii., 1, 12. Zech. xiv., 8.
Very many others. Yet no quotations from the Old Testament at all. Westcott and Hort give a list of nearly 400 references or allusions to the Old Testament.
6. Statement of the theories of interpretation (Broadus).
Ch. iv. and v. are introductory to the visions.
Ch. vi. ff. present predictions.
Immense multitude of theories now usually divided into three great classes (see Tregelles in Horne, Davidson, Angus’ Hand Book, Annotated Par. Bible, Alford, and especially Elliott). But four other classes should be added, making seven:
256 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
(a) Preterist theories. That all fulfilled in the past.
(1) Neronian — that written in time of Nero, and all fulfilled in two or three years — most Germans, Renan, Stuart, Cowles.
(2) Domitianic — that written in time of Do- mitian, and fulfilled in three or four cen¬ turies — Bousset, and most Romanist writers now.
(b) Historical theories — that fulfillment going on throughout history, past and future.
(1) Synchronous — make the three series of seven parallel. — Lord, Vaughan, Fairbairn. Some include also the seven churches, as in part Vitringa, Elliott, IV., p. 485.
(2) Continuous — make the three series of seven successive. — Elliott (closely followed by Cumming), Barnes, most English and American writers now.
(c) Futurist theory — that all yet to be fulfilled in the future.
(d) Theory of successive fulfillment. Arnold, Alex¬ ander, see Elliott, IV., p. 564. Examined in El¬ liott, IV., p. 620. Our Lord certainly seems to describe himself as “coming” at the destruction of Jerusalem. Similar to this theory is what Lee calls the Spiritual System (Bib. Comm., p. 491).
(e) Theory of miscellaneous or sporadic fulfillment.
(f) Theory that all is merely spiritual. Davidson, III., 627 ff.
(g) Historical spiritual theory. Since Broadus wrote as above, Sir W. M. Ramsay (Letters to the Seven Churches) has proposed a new theory of considerable plausibility. He takes the two beasts to be Imperial and Provincial Rome and conceives the point of the book to be the en¬ couragement of the Christians in their struggle
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
25 7
with Rome during the Domitianic persecutions with the promise of ultimate spiritual victory over Rome. This struggle with Rome is used as a type of Christianity’s conflict with the world power of evil in all the ages, but without specific application of all the images to definite persons and events. The picture is drawn on large canvas with bold outline and symbolic imagery of the world conflict. The actual condition of the Seven Churches is thus seen to be immedi¬ ately in the writer’s mind. The discoveries in Asia Minor throw some light on this theory. The lessons of the book are spiritual for all time, though the historical background was defi¬ nite and near to the readers of the book.
7. Scripture lesson. Rev. 1-3.
8. Any Bible dictionary or commentary.
9. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 208-212.
For further study, see Ramsay — Letters to the Seven
Churches; Swete — Apocalypse of St. John; Hort — Apocalypse 1-3 ; Charles — Commentary ; Moffatt — Commentary.
LESSON II: REVELATION 4-11
. Scripture lesson. Rev. 4-11.
2. History of the Theories (Broadus).
Sketch of the history of interpretation of the book. (Elliott’s history fullest — brief in Smith’s Dictionary. Herzog, etc. — also in Stuart.) Three great periods.
I. In first three centuries before Constantine the Chris¬ tians were persecuted by authorities at Rome ; they there¬ fore regarded Rome as their great enemy, the beast, the harlot, the antichrist, etc., and looked with longing for the coming of Christ to reign 1,000 years with his people. Some regarded this reign as involving only spiritual en¬ joyments. But others took a grossly sensual view —
258 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Chiliasm, like “The Gates Ajar,” and much worse — a tend¬ ency strengthened by Montanism, and this led to violent opposition, so that some in the third century began to attack the book as too much encouraging Chiliasm. (See Neander, I., p. 649 fif. Herzog, “Chiliasmus.”)
II. After Constantine (say A. D. 325), views changed. Rome was now reckoned the friend and supporter of Christianity. Became common to hold that Christ’s reign of 1,000 years began with Constantine. He (Constan¬ tine) was the man-child of chap, xii., born of the woman, the church. So there had already begun before the res¬ urrection, a secular reign of Christ for 1,000 years. Consequences of this change: (1) Thus the longing for Christ’s coming died out among men. (2) So, too, arose the historical theory of interpretation — part, already past, the 1,000 years having begun, remainder yet to come. Successive interpreters make the book a waxen nose (Ebrard in Herzog). Every interpreter of each suc¬ cessive age would find in the book events up to his time. This not wrong, if cautiously done. But constant tend¬ ency was, as it has been ever since, to make these events cover the whole ground of the book, so as to infer that the end was near. For this tendency two reasons: (1) We are taught to look for Christ’s coming. (2) Only the men whose imaginations were inflamed by the thought that the book showed Christ’s coming to be cer¬ tainly near, set themselves to write expositions of the book. We easily see the error thus committed by men who lived, say six or nine centuries ago, in assuming that the events up to their time covered nearly the whole ground — and there is here a warning.
III. The Reformers of the 16th century (Luther, Cal¬ vin, etc.) gained two new points. (1) It was already more than 1,000 years since Constantine. (2) They be¬ gan to see in the harlot Babylon the Papacy. Then com¬ paring Daniel and 2 Thess., they identified the harlot Babylon with Antichrist. That the Papacy is Antichrist
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
259
was asserted by Luther, Calvin, Knox, and in 1703 was declared by Turrettin to be the firm belief of all Re¬ formers and Protestants. This position has obviously great plausibility. In the first period the Christians had understood the Babylon of chap. xvii. to be Rome, espe¬ cially in xvii., 9. So the Protestants were but reviving the interpretation of the early Fathers, only not Pagan, but Papal Rome.
To escape from the Protestant position, two Spanish Jesuits, late in the 16th century, devised each a new theory. Ribera of Salamanca, in A. D. 1585 (about 3 centuries ago), presented the Futurist scheme; and a little later, Alcasar of Seville, the Preterist scheme (El¬ liott, IV., 465-469). Of course, each has since been a good deal modified.
It is curious to trace the history of the principal works that followed. In England Mede, in 1632, published a powerful exposition on the historical scheme. The sec¬ ond beast is the Papacy, the first three vials are John Huss, Luther, Queen Elizabeth, etc. But Hammond, in 1656 (time of Cromwell, when Churchmen were hardly treated by the Puritans, and so less hostile to Rome) adopted the Preterist scheme of Alcasar. In France, Jurieu, a Protestant exiled by revocation of the Edict of Nantes, published in 1685 an exposition mainly based on Mede; and this was answered five years after by the celebrated Bossuet, taking the preterist view, so as to guard the Papacy from the charge of being the harlot Babylon and Antichrist. His view has ever since been the favorite among Romanists.
In the 18th century the most famous works are those of Vitringa (in Holland) and Sir Isaac Newton, both on the historical theory. Late in the century began the great series of Preterist expositions in Germany, continuing to the present day.
Among historical expositors (including nearly all Prot¬ estants out of Germany) the French Revolution intro-
260 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
duced a new idea, viz. : that popular revolution and in¬ fidelity, one or both, are among the things predicted by the beast and the vials. It was found to be just 1,260 years from Justinian’s edict, recognizing the Pope’s su¬ premacy, to the French Revolution. The French Revo¬ lution still plays an important part in most treatises on the historical scheme.
Early in this century the Futurist theory was urged by some Romanists and some Church of England writers.
3. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 212-216.
For further study, see Swete, Moffatt, Charles, Beck¬ with, Dean.
LESSON III: REVELATION 12:1-19:10
1. Scripture lesson. Rev. 12:1 — 19:10.
2. Examination of the theories (Broadus).
I : PRETERIST THEORIES
Neronian Preterists hold that the book was written in the reign of Nero (who died A. D. 68), or in that of Galba, just after; that all the predictions refer to the overthrow of Judaism by the destruction of Jerusalem in A. D. 70 (see chap, xi., 8), and the fall of Heathenism as represented by the death of Nero and the interruption of his persecutions. A favorite passage with them is xvii., 9, 10, where the 6th head, beginning with Julius Csesar, would be Nero, and the 7th which was to follow, “must remain a little time,” viz. : Galba, who reigned a few months. That is certainly one of the most exact correspondences ever yet found in the interpretation of the book. (Duesterdieck, Cowles, p. 38.) They say that Rome is called a harlot because idolatrous. They dwell much on the expression, “the time is at hand,” i., 3 ; xxii., 6, 10, etc. They insist that we must not expect to find a separate event corresponding to every detail of the
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
261
imagery. Stuart compared Psalm xviii., in which David’s deliverance from Saul is described by high wrought and multiplied images.
Objections
(1) It depends on the theory of the early (Neronian) date, which is contrary to the very strong evidence of the early Christians and conflicts with the striking appro¬ priateness of the book to be the last book of the New Testament. (Compare Bernard.) Still a good many orthodox writers now contend for early date, on general grounds, as Lightfoot (on Gal.), Westcott on John (Bib. Comm.). Opinion that it was written in the time of Nero is first found in the Syriac translation of Revelation, made in the 6th century (Warfield, p. 232).
(2) The fulfillment being so long past, it ought by this time to have become quite plain ; but it is not so.
(3) It is impossible to work out the details, referring chap, vi.-xi. to overthrow of Judaism, and chap. xii. or xix. to death of Nero and end of the persecutions he introduced. And Psa. xviii. is by no means a parallel case.
(4) In the favorite text, xvii., 9-11, what of the 8th head (in verse 11) ? Compare xiii., 3. Stuart makes it refer to a popular belief that Nero was not really dead, or would come to life again — a strange interpretation, surely. Cowles rejects this, but has nothing to substitute.
(5) Predictions as to future rest and glory are belittled by being restricted to earthly conditions, and to 3 or 4 years. Stuart tried to remove this objection by making chap, xx.-xxii. refer to future triumphs of Christianity. But thus there exists a great leap in the interpretation with no corresponding gap in the prediction. And then what of vii., 9 ff ., and many similar passages ?
(6) Analogy of Old Testament prophecies is against it. Daniel, most closely connected with Revelation, pre¬ dicts (according to the common view) as far as the com-
262 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
in g of Christ, and probably much farther. So with most of the prophets. But here only 3 or 4 years at farthest.
Yet this is the opinion of most Germans now, including Ewald, Duesterdieck, DeWette (though not of Hengsten- berg and Ebrard). Also of Stuart, who commonly fol¬ lowed the Germans ; and of Renan, in his book, “L’ Anti¬ christ/’ Recent, brief and clear exposition on this theory in Cowles. The Germans like it, because it reduces the prophetic element to a minimum ; Cowles, because it takes away everything mystical, makes all simple and clear.
Domitianic Preterists.
This view began with the Spanish Jesuits about 3 cen¬ turies ago, and was put in better form nearly 2 centuries ago by Bossuet, who was not only a most eloquent preacher, but a most skillful controversialist (Variations of Protestantism).
They hold that the Apocalypse predicted the triumphs of Christianity over Judaism and Paganism, in the first 3 or 4 centuries. As to Jews, only their later calamities predicted, for the book was written twenty-five years after the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus. It might include the second destruction in time of Barcochba. But the destruction by Titus was the great calamity to the Jews and Judaism, of which the subsequent events were but subordinate consequences. Thus the Domitianic scheme gains over the Neronian as to Rome and Pagan¬ ism, but loses as to Jerusalem and Judaism.
In the details, Bossuet utterly fails (Elliott, IV., p. 550 ff.). His particular interpretations are not only often wanting in plausibility, but they often contradict one an¬ other, and involve great confusion and arbitrariness. Thus the destruction of the Apocalyptic Babylon is with him only the partial destruction of Pagan Rome by the North¬ ern barbarians. But it was Christianized Rome, and not Pagan Rome, that was sacked by the Goths. And then Babylon was to be afterwards the seat of unclean beasts
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
263
and demons — whereas Rome after the sacking by the bar¬ barians continued to be the seat of professed Christianity. Such facts seem fatal to Bossuet’s scheme. Moreover the 3l/2 years (1,260 days) so prominent, are not explained. But any one who wishes to meet the Romanists on the interpretation of Revelation, must make himself well ac¬ quainted with the Domitianic Preterist scheme, of which Bossuet is said to be still the principal exponent.
II : FUTURIST THEORIES
These hold that all, at least after chap, i.-iii., refers to Christ’s second advent and events immediately preceding it. Some say even the Epistle to the seven churches. Israel is the literal Israel.
The Apocalyptic beast or Antichrist under his last head, is held to be a personal, infidel opposer of Christianity, who will rule over Saints 3l/2 years (no year-day), till destroyed by Christ’s coming.
These writers then agree with the Preterists in reject¬ ing year-day and holding to only literal Israel, but op¬ posed as to time of fulfillment.
The Futurist theory was devised, as the Preterist was, three centuries ago (by Spanish Jesuit Ribera), to set aside the Protestant historical interpretation. It is of late a good deal advocated in the church of England, for several reasons. (1) Dissatisfaction with the common Protestant interpretations and with the Preterist scheme, and just cutting the knot. (2) Opposition to year-day theory, which was little heard of — really, not a little dif¬ ferent. Chief advocate Dr. S. R. Maitland — also some of the celebrated Oxford tracts. (Elliott, IV., 524, 526.) I know of no American work advocating it, and but one German Protestant work, that of Fuller, 1875.
This theory cannot be proved, nor entirely disproved. The analogy of the Old Testament prophecies is against it. It seems inconsistent with statements such as ‘‘the
264 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
things must shortly come to pass,” etc., but this might be explained. It seems less appropriate to console John’s first readers — but James said, “Be patient, brethren, unto the coming of the Lord.” To take the Apocalyptic Israel as the literal Israel involves the literal restoration of the Jews, etc, (which is very doubtful), and also various practical difficulties in accord with events that have al¬ ready occurred, so as to make it very probable that some of the predictions have been, at least in part, fulfilled.
One thing they urge is certainly true, viz. : that the book is really a prophecy of the second coming of Christ, and the events that will precede it — not of coming events in general, ending with the second coming. This is im¬ portant. For Christians the great event of the future is Christ’s second coming, and other things derive their chief importance from their relation to it. And so we are still in the same attitude as regards this book that the first readers occupied, still looking for the great com¬ ing event, - though some of the preliminary events have no doubt already occurred.
Hi: HISTORICAL THEORIES
1. Synchronous. This holds that the three series of Sevens are parallel. Some writers include the seven churches also, as Vitringa (Elliott, IV., 485). This syn¬ chronous scheme is adopted by very many English writ¬ ers ; e.g. Vaughan, Fairbairn. It has able representatives in Lord and Smith. They do not suppose that the three series correspond at every step, as for example, that the fourth seal, the fourth trumpet and the fourth vial mean exactly the same event; but that each series begins near the time of John, and each extends to the second coming of Christ. In favor of this theory :
(1) Analogy of many Old Testament prophecies, par¬ ticularly Pharaoh’s dream (two sevens too), and Dan¬ iel’s prophecies.
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
265
(2) The imagery of the later seals and later trumpets seems naturally to suggest the time of the end ; e.g. vi., 12-17, particularly verse 17, and vii., 9-17 ; again, x., 6 (sixth trumpet) and xi., 15:
(3) Difficulty of fixing certainly the fulfillment of the seals and trumpets upon the other theory. Upon the con¬ tinuous theory, these, at any rate the seals, are long past, and it ought to be possible to settle their interpretation ; but the various schemes are still uncertain. (This holds against Elliott’s seals as truly as against Bossuet’s scheme of the whole.) Upon synchronous theory, much easier to suppose that the first of each series, while still obscure, will become plain hereafter, in connection with the second coming.
Each of these three arguments has no small weight. Objections
(1) it seems to us less natural than the continuous theory; it appears to make of the book a jumble.
(2) In viii., 1, the trumpets seem to grow out of the seals — seventh seal has no fulfillment indicated, save in the trumpets. Still, there is the silence in heaven — and it may be said that the matter ends with only that, be¬ cause other and parallel series were to follow.
Thus the synchronous seems to have very good ground as against the continuous theory.
(2) Continuous. Elliott (closely followed by Cum- ming), Barnes, and most English and American writers now.
This seems to us more natural. Events beginning soon, and extending to the second coming. If the preterist and the futurist theories are not established, we seem shut up to the historical, and the continuous is in itself the natural way to take the successive theories, if there is nothing to the contrary.
266 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Two Great Difficulties
apply to both of the historical theories, but one of them especially to the continuous theory.
(1) Lack of clear fulfillment of the early predictions. If the continuous theory be correct, then the seals were fulfilled long ago, and should now be clear.
Thus Elliott makes the sixth seal refer to the time of Constantine, the others of course preceding. These, then, ought to be clear. Well, as to the four horsemen of the first four seals, Elliott makes a fair showing for taking the horses as denoting the Roman Empire, the horse being sacred to Mars from the time of Romulus (tradi¬ tion) L, 117 f.
The first seal is the period of preparation which fol¬ lowed the reign of Domitian, beginning a year or so after these visions and reaching to the early years of Corn- modus, say three-fourths of a century.
The second seal represents the civil wars which fol¬ lowed, vi., 4.
The third seal is quite imperfectly made out. Alex¬ ander Severus, oppressive taxation (black horse denoting consequent distress — rider with balance represents Ro¬ man proconsuls, etc. To prevent these the Senate some¬ times fixed the price of food (proof from Cicero!!). Oil and wine. All Emperors had given the Roman populace grain— at this period oil also was given by several em¬ perors ; and of a later Emperor (Aurelian) we are told that he determined to give the people wine — don’t know that he did (Elliott, L, 165). Does not this look like trifling?
The fourth seal the great famine, pestilence, etc., in the third quarter of the third century. Fits very well.
The fifth seal the persecutions under Diocletian, about A. D. 300. Fits very well. “How long” (vi., 10) re¬ ferred to the fact that many grievous persecutions oc-
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
267
curred before this. The Christian martyrs, before this time, already were beginning to expect and to declare that their blood would be avenged (Elliott, I., 210) — of course they did.
The sixth seal — primary vision (vi., 12-17) destruction of the Pagan power in the Empire, by Constantine. This does not come up to the strong language. Did the pagans universally (every bondman and freeman, verse 17) be¬ lieve that the day of the Lamb’s wrath had then come? It was not a day of general wailing and woe, for Con¬ stantine did not forbid pagan worship ; he tolerated and protected it.
Second vision, chap, vii., the twelve tribes of Israel mean the mass of professing Christians under and after Constantine (when multitudes joined the Christians, most of them without piety) and the 144,000 the elect of grace at that time. There is thought to be special refer¬ ence to Augustine, who so clearly brought out the doc¬ trine of election and the certain salvation of the elect, as prefigured by the vision of the palmbearers.
Thus the interpretation of the sixth seal seems quite a failure, and this is the main point in the series. The third also fails, and the others, though more plausible, are in no case certain. No infidel could be converted by the fulfillment of this series of seals, as given by Elliott, and his is generally regarded as the best interpretation of them on the continuous scheme. And Elliott expresses willingness to have his whole theory tested by the six seals, III., 267.
(2) The other great difficulty about historical schemes is, that they seem to require the year-day theory.
Year-day theory first mentioned A. D. 1190 (see El¬ liott, Cowles’ Appendix and Lee). Applied to the 1,260 days (xi., 3 and xii., 6) ; the 42 months (xi., 2 and xiii., 5) ; the time, times and half a time — Zy2 years (xii., 14) — this last in Dan., vii., 25 ; xii., 7. Besides some (e.g.
268 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Elliott) so understand the 5 months (ix., 10), the hour and day and month and year (ix., 15), and the 3% days (xi., 9, 11).
The principle is denied by Preterists and Futurists, in¬ cluding Romanists, Rationalists, and some orthodox writers, and also by most of those who hold to successive fulfillments, or to the purely spiritual theory.
1. Passages chiefly relied on to establish the year-day theory are three, Dan. ix., 24-27; Ezek. iv., 4-6; Numb, xiv., 33-34.
In Daniel, Gabriel tells him it shall be “seventy weeks” until Messiah.
Ezek. iv., 4-6, 390 days and 40 days, “I have appointed thee each day for a year.”
Numb, xiv., 34 — “each day for a year.”
This is all the Scriptural proof — a few other passages adduced by some, but clear that they furnish no proof. Correspondence between Jewish Sabbath, Sabbatical year and year of Jubilee. Further argued that results as to the Papacy show that the principle is true.
Bush urges that in attacking year-day we attack the Protestant Reformation, which built itself largely on the application of Revelation to the Papacy. If true, this would settle nothing, for the Reformers made many grave mistakes. But it is not true, for Luther and other Reformers of his time knew nothing of the year-day theory at all.
2. Objections to the year-day theory.
Observe that it is improbable in itself, and requires clear proof from Scripture.
In Dan. ix., 24-27, it is literally “70 sevens” or “70 hebdomads,” and may mean “70 sevens” of years, just as well as “70 sevens” of days. Gesenius quotes from a late Latin writer the phrase “hebdomas annorum,” “a seven of years.” Some Rabbinical writers use the He¬ brew term in this way, a seven of years. Elliott says that
THE REVELATION OF JOHN 269
this proves nothing as to Scripture, but certainly as to Daniel at least, it proves such a sense possible.
Daniel had been considering Jeremiah’s prediction that the captivity would last 70 years, and thought they must be nearly ended (Dan. ix., 2). Then he prayed long for God’s forgiving mercy to Israel, and Gabriel appeared saying that it would be “70 sevens” till Messiah.
As the prophecy he had been studying told of 70 years, so here he would naturally understand 70 sevens of years, seven times as long. Compare “till 7 seven times? Yea, till the contrary be proved. This phrase in Daniel and usage 70 sevens would more naturally mean 70 weeks, it does not certainly mean that, the other being not only possible, but under the circumstances natural.
In Ezek. iv., 4-6, the day is appointed as a symbol of a year ; but the Lord does not there say day and mean year.
In Numbers xiv. there is a correspondence between the appointed punishment of the nation and the time spent by the spies, “each day for a year.” Now if God had said, “Ye shall wander 40 days,” and it had turned out 40 years, this would then be a case in point.
These passages show that such might have been the meaning, that such a prophetic relation could have been established, but they do not at all prove that it was done. If the question be asked, what right have you to under¬ stand that 1,260 days signify 1,260 years? — do these pas¬ sages prove the right? At most they only furnish a perhaps.
But then remember how many dates are given elsewhere in prophecy and never with the year-day meaning. The prophecy which Daniel himself was studying, the prophecy of Jeremiah as to 70 years, was correctly taken by him as literal. Suppose he had taken it as year-day, then it would have meant 25,200 years. So, too, with Daniel’s time, times, and the dividing of a time (vii., 25 and xii., 7), said to mean not merely years but (1,260 days and
270 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
so) 1,260 years; compare Dan. iv., 17, 23, 25, 32, where four times over it is predicted that Nebuchadnezzar’s insanity would last until 7 “times” should have passed over him. Here a time is evidently a year — nobody would understand the 7 times to be 2,520 years. And we are bound therefore so to understand the Zl/2 times of Daniel till the contrary is proved. This phrase in Daniel and Revelation sounds mysterious and seems to prove some¬ thing, but Daniel’s own usage shows what he means by it. In like manner in Revelation, if we apply the year- day theory to the 3p2 years, we should also apply it to the 1,000 years of Christ’s reign, making it 360,000 years, which nobody does, except Mr. Lord, Glasgow, and a German writer, Driessen, A. D. 1717.
Thus then the year-day theory is possible, but not proven, with a strong probability against it from the very usage of Daniel and Revelation.
Now as to the results of the year-day theory.
Take Elliott’s interpretation. The 1,260 years begins with the decree of Justinian, recognizing the Pope’s supremacy, in A. D. 529-533. Add 1,260, and we get 1789-93, French Revolution. Then, we are told, the Papacy was overthrown. But afterwards Phocas issued a decree confirming the Pope’s supremacy, in 604-8, and this with 1,260 gives 1864-8. So a few years ago it was urged that at that epoch, say 1867, Christ would come and completely destroy the Papacy. To this effect nu¬ merous works of Cumming.
In 1872 Dr. Cumming, following Elliott, published an¬ other volume, comparing events of 1870 with the vials in chap, xvi., and triumphantly claiming that here was a plain fulfillment, etc.
And what right have we to count the 1,260 years from two distinct decrees, 75 years apart? Elliott says Jere¬ miah’s 70 years of the captivity have to be counted both from B. C. 606 to decree of Cyrus, and from B. C. 588 ( destruction of Jerusalem) to decree of Darius, about
THE REVELATION OF JOHN
271
B. C. 518 or 520. This is not at all certain; and if it were, we could not with any certainty infer the same thing here.
So the results prove nothing conclusive. Mr. Lord is very chary of fixing the beginning of the 1,260 years.
The year-day theory may perhaps be true — no better can be said for it.
The Historical Scheme in general does not stand or fall with the year-day theory; but all the now current his¬ torical interpretations are based on it.
3. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 216-221.
For further study, see Swete, Moffatt, Charles, Beck¬ with, Dean.
LESSON IV: REVELATION 19:11-22:21
1. Scripture lesson. Rev. 19:11 — 22:21.
1. The Millennium. Rev. XX. (Broadus).
A thousand years would be natural as a round number for a long period. Plato’s Republic supposes men to re¬ turn to life at the end of every thousand years, and the Talmud variously connects a period of a thousand years with King Messiah (Lee, p. 809).
i: DIFFERENT THEORIES ABOUT THE MILLENNIUM
1. The 1,000 years after the Christian era, or after the triumph of Christianity over Pagan Rome in time of Con¬ stantine (some say Charlemagne about A. D. 800). Towards the end of the 10th century there was a wide¬ spread opinion that the end of the world was approach¬ ing. Many charters of that time begin with the words : “As the world is now drawing to a close.”
In the beginning of the 14th century, 1,000 years after Constantine, the Turks came into prominence (thought to be Gog and Magog).
This theory was once universal. Now held by the
272 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Romanists. Enough for us that during this period Popery and Mohammedanism were almost universal in place of primitive Christianity.
2. Millennium a new Church organization. The Ana¬ baptists of Munster, 1533, made it the new Zion, with community of gods and wives. Swedenborg made it the new Jerusalem Church, which he founded. The Mormons call themselves Latter-day Saints, and propose to restore nature to Paradisaical innocence, by a sort of Theocracy and polygamy. “The Temple’’ at Jaffa, etc. (community of goods). Many others.
3. Millennium before second Advent, or postmillennial Advent. According to this view the millennium consists in a general prevalence of Christianity upon earth, before the second coming of Christ — supposed to be prefigured by Old Testament prophets, particularly the latter part of Isaiah. This view is the most common one among us — first mentioned three centuries ago (Elliott, IV., 103n). It grew out of the first theory, as heretofore explained. The best book in favor of it is probably Brown on the second Advent.
The great argument against it is the passages, “Shall he find faith on the Earth?” — “As in the days of Noah, Lot,” etc., Rev. i., 7 ; chap, xx., etc. The common view must at least be greatly modified.
4. Millennium after second Advent, or premillennial Advent. Christ will come, first resurrection of the saints only, who will reign with Christ in this world 1,000 years — then Satan loosed again, renewed struggle and victory, resurrection of the wicked and last judgment.
This was common among the early Christians, many of them with gross notions we call Chiliasm — contrast Mil- lennarianism — so the words apostle and missionary — mar¬ riage supper and New Jerusalem signifying that every day a sumptuous meal and plenty of gold and precious stones. But not all Christians were Chiliasts in this sense.
This view is now increasingly popular — its advocates
THE REVELATION OE JOHN
273
usually called Adventists or Millennarians. Good speci¬ men in Elliott. Lord holds in like manner that it shall follow the Advent, and then carries out the year-day theory consistently by making the 1,000 years represent 360,000 years. Throughout this period the holy dead, having had their resurrection, are to reign with Christ on earth — and only after that will come the resurrection of the wicked and the judgment. This follows the text strictly. Glasgow gives the same view as to 360,000. See also “Yesterday, to-day,” etc., for beautiful descrip¬ tions of the marriage of the Lamb, Millennium and Many Mansions.
This has in its favor the plain meaning of Rev. xx., and the teachings of our Lord above mentioned, and the utter uncertainty as to when Christ will come, which is not so strictly true according to the third theory. These are strong arguments. See valuable article in Presb. Review, July, 1882.
5. Purely spiritual — 1,000 years and all — Davidson. Swedenborg (No. 842) says that the phrase 1,000 years signifies an indefinite time. In general he says that when “thousand” stands alone (i. e. not 7 thousand, 12 thousand, etc.), it always denotes an indefinite number; he has been so told from Heaven. In the Heavenly world, to which our Bible answers, they read for “a thousand” an indefi¬ nite number. And they wonder there at the errors upon earth about this matter of the 1,000 years.
6. Millennium in modified sense — Fairbairn, Milligan. Fairbairn’s view: Millennium before second Advent, but indefinite as to time. Consisting only in greater preva¬ lence of Christianity than ever before, and its introduc¬ tion constitutes in one sense a coming of Christ — there will be many comings.
Milligan compares Ezek. xxxix., 9-12, to show that 7 years, 7 months, there signify only complete destruction or cleansing, not denoting a particular period of time. So he thinks here — 1,000 years denoting completeness of
274 SYLLABUS FOR NEW TESTAMENT STUDY
Christ’s reign — 1,000 being a favorite number in this book, to symbolize what is perfect and glorious in the condition of Christianity, e. g. ix., 4 ff. ; xxi., 16. This quite pos¬ sible.
II : TIME OF BEGINNING
To some extent discussed independently of the question as to time of second Advent. Early Christians— -some said acceptable year of the Lord and A. D. 365 — many said at end of 6,000 years, and this according to Septuagint chronology would be about A. D. 550 (Elliott, L, 370, 371). Very many, as A. D. 1000 approached, thought Christ would come then. (See above.) Of late the time is usually inferred from the 1260 years. But the time of Christ’s second coming is unknown and unknowable.
Remark upon Glasgow’s grave calculations as to whether the earth can hold the population at the end of 1,000 years (not to say 360,000) of profound peace, uni¬ versal industry, and freedom from vices. A new Mal¬ thusianism. He holds (1) that the sea may cease, and the deserts and ice mountains be changed; (2) that the earth may be enlarged; (3) that natural inclinations may be so moderated as to restrict the increase of the race.
Note. — The lectures which accompany these lessons dwell on the moral and spiritual instructions of the book, showing that whatever view may be adopted as to the fulfillment of its predictions, it should be freely used for practical edification.
3. Environment of Early Christianity, pp. 221-226.
For further study, see, as above, Swete, Moffatt, Charles, Beckwith, Dean.
|
Date Due |
|||